Home

ZyXEL P-335WT User's Manual

1. lt a EZ E Server in Internet newark Sales Network onde IP 2 IGA 2 ER a K SE N Serverin R amp D Network lt a SP3 IGA3 LAN Addresses D efault IPs ES IGA emeser gt 192 168 1 1 de Ex G Gassene gt 192 168 2 1 168 3 IGA EE gt 192 168 3 1 9 1 5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP port mapping They are Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 136 P 335 Series User s Guide e One to One In One to One mode the Prestige maps one local IP address to one global IP address e Many to One In Many to One mode the Prestige maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA e PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature the SUA Only option e Many to Many Overload In Many to Many Overload mode the Prestige maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses e Many One to One In Many One to One mode the Prestige maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address e Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Note Port numbers do not change for One to One and Many One to One NAT mapping types The following table summarizes these types Table 56 NAT Mapping Types TYPE IP MAPPING SMT ABBREVIATION Many to One SUA PAT Many to Many Overload ILA1
2. The port number is its interface index under the interface group Table 140 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits PVC PERMANENT OT VIRTUAL CIRCUIT 1 eum Sat 2 349 Chapter 35 SNMP Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 36 System Information and Diagnosis This chapter covers the information and diagnostic tools in SMT menus 24 1 to 24 4 These tools include updates on system status port status log and trace capabilities and upgrades for the system software This chapter describes how to use these tools in detail Type 24 in the main menu to open Menu 24 System Maintenance as shown in the following figure Figure 211 Menu 24 System Maintenance Menu 24 System Maintenance ie Ss ES 4 Da T d Ge 9 1 di System Status System Information and Console Port Speed Log and Trace Diagnostic Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Upload Firmware Command Interpreter Mode Call Control Time and Date Setting Remote Management Setup ko 36 1 System Status The first selection System Status gives you information on the status and statistics of the ports as shown next Figure 212 System Status is a tool that can be used to monitor your Prestige Specifically it gives you information on your ADSL telephone line status number of packets sent and received To get to System Status type 24 to go to Menu 24 System Maintenance From this menu type 1 System Status
3. Pre Shared Key Type your pre shared key in this field A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection Type from 8 to 31 case sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal 0 9 A F characters You must precede a hexadecimal key with a Ox zero x which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key For example in 0x0123456789ABCDEF Ox denotes that the key is hexadecimal and 0123456789ABCDEF is the key itself Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre shared key You will receive IPSec Protocol a PYLD_MALFORMED payload malformed packet if the same pre shared key is not used on both ends Encryption Select DES or 3DES from the drop down list box The Prestige s encryption Algorithm algorithm should be identical to the secure remote gateway When DES is used for data communications both sender and receiver must know the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput Authentication Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop d
4. v TITT ETT TITT TITT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Trigger Port LABEL DESCRIPTION H This is the rule index number read only Type a unique name up to 15 characters for identification purposes All characters are permitted including spaces Incoming Incoming is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The Prestige forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the Prestige to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 145 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 10 Firewall This chapter gives some background information on firewalls and explains how to get started with the Prestige firewall 10 1 Introduction to Firewall 10 1 1 What is a Firewall Originally the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another The networking term firewall i
5. Bw MGMT Monitor Details DHCP Table Details Packet Statistics Details Parental Control Statistics Details VPN Monitor Details WLAN Station Status Details The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen Table 2 Status Screen Icon Key ICON DESCRIPTION Language Select a language from the drop down list box to have the the web configurator display in that language Click this icon to open a web help page relevent to the screen you are currently configuring Click this icon to open the setup wizard The Prestige has a connection wizard and a bandwidth management wizard n E Esc Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information Click this icon at any time to exit the web configurator B20 seconas E Select a number of seconds or None from the drop down list box to refresh all screen Betre ne statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 50 P 335 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance System General screen It System Name is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is t
6. Chapter 7 LAN 124 P 335 Series User s Guide 7 3 1 How Any IP Works Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices the Prestige to decide which hop to use to help forward data along to its specified destination The following lists out the steps taken when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first time through the Prestige 1 When a computer which is in a different subnet first attempts to access the Internet it sends packets to its default gateway which is not the Prestige by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table 2 When the computer cannot locate the default gateway an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN 3 The Prestige receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address 4 The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table Once the ARP table is updated the computer is able to access the Internet through the Prestige 5 When the Prestige receives packets from the computer it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer After all the routing information is updated the computer can access the Prestige and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the Prestige 7 4 IP S
7. LAN or WAN 41 5 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device e JavaScripts enabled by default 393 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting P 335 Series User s Guide e Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary 41 5 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address 41 5 1 1 1 Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 238 Pop up Blocker Mail and News Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 394 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 239 Internet Options Internet Options jrs General Security Privacy Content
8. My IP Address a b c d Peer ID Type E mail Local IP Address 197 168 110 Peer ID Content H urcom pany com G Local ID Type E mail Local ID Content HO YSureompanyve om 13 18 VPN and Remote Management If a VPN tunnel uses a remote management service port Telnet FTP WWW SNMP DNS or ICMP and terminates at the Prestige s LAN or WAN port configure remote management REMOTE MGNT to allow access for that service If the VPN tunnel terminates at the Prestige s LAN IP address configure remote management for LAN WAN server access or LAN amp WAN If the VPN tunnel terminates at the Prestige s WAN IP address configure remote management for WAN server access or LAN amp WAN Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 14 Trend Micro Security Services This chapter contains information about configuring Trend Micro Security Services TMSS 14 1 Trend Micro Security Services Overview TMSS helps protect computers on a network that access the Internet through the Prestige TMSS scans computers behind the Prestige for potential vulnerabilities such as spyware missing security patches trojans etc and then tells you how to update the computer so as to fix the vulnerability The Prestige includes TMSS parental controls that allows you to block web pages based on pre defined web site categories such as pornography gambling etc 14 1 1 TMSS Web Page TMSS is enabled by default on th
9. Network Address Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet Translation protocol address used within one network for example a private IP address used in a local network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Internet Choose None to disable NAT Choose SUA Only if you have a single public IP address SUA Single User Account is a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public IP addresses Full Feature mapping types include One to One Many to One SUA PAT Many to Many Overload Many One to One and Server When you select Full Feature you must configure at least one address mapping set Please see the NAT chapter for a more detailed discussion on the Network Address Translation feature When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 27 3 Configuring the PPTP Client Note The Prestige supports only one PPTP server connection at any given time To configure a PPTP client you must configure the My Login and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection After configuring My Login and Password for PPP connection press SPACE BAR and then ENTER in the Encapsulation field in Menu 4 Internet Access Setup to
10. 0 is the default and signifies any port Type a port number from 0 to 65535 Some of the most common IP ports are 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POPS Type a port number in this field to define a port range This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field If Local Port Start is left at 0 Local Port End will also remain at 0 Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Table 74 Rule Setup with Manual Key LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote Address Start Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router s configured local IP addresses The remote address fields do not apply when the Secure Gateway IP Address field is configured to 0 0 0 0 In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Enter a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router Remote Address End When the remote IP address is a single address type it a second time here Mask When the remote IP address is a range enter the end static IP address ina range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the remote IP address is a subnet address enter a su
11. Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the Prestige in an Ethernet network It is recommended you enter your computer s Computer name in this field see the Wizard Setup chapter for how to find your computer s name This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Chapter 20 System 242 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 98 General LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator Type how many minutes a management session either via the web configurator Inactivity Timer or SMT can be left idle before the session times out The default is 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Password Setup Change your Prestige s password recommended using the fields as shown Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system passwo
12. Cancel Apply Communications To install component select the check box nest to the component name or clear the check box if you do not want to install it shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in component click Details Components s Netheeting a Phone Dialer v O Universal Plug and Play 0 4 ME O el Virtual Private Networking 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 4 4 ME Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk B66 3 MB Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details 231 Chapter 18 UPnP P 335 Series User s Guide 18 4 2 Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install UPnP in Windows XP s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Mikke A Oper tor Aesieted Dialing sack Neg Ka ff SE Dial up Preferences Address e Network Connections Network Identification T Bridge Connections Network Tasks Advanced Settings Optional Networking Components Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add or remove components of Windows XP To add or remove a component click the checkbox shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components Sa Management and
13. Select this check box to turn on the Keep Alive feature for this SA Turn on Keep Alive to have the Prestige automatically reinitiate the SA after the SA lifetime times out even if there is no traffic The remote IPSec router must also have keep alive enabled in order for this feature to work Chapter 13 VPN Screens 178 P 335 Series User s Guide 179 Table 73 Advanced Rule Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT Traversal Select this check box to enable NAT traversal NAT traversal allows you to set up a VPN connection when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers The remote IPSec router must also have NAT traversal enabled You can use NAT traversal with ESP protocol using Transport or Tunnel mode but not with AH protocol nor with manual key management In order for an IPSec router behind a NAT router to receive an initiating IPSec packet set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to the IPSec router behind the NAT router Key Management The advanced configuration page is only available with the IKE IPSec keying mode Click the Basic button below in order to be able to choose the Manual IPSec keying mode Make sure the remote gateway has the same configuration in this field Protocol Number Enter 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP 17 for UDP etc 0 is the default and signifies any protocol Enable Replay As a VPN setup is processing intensive the system is vulnerable to Denial of Detection Service DOS att
14. e The Trend Micro anti virus version numbers on the TMSS client is older than the version numbers downloaded to the Prestige In both of these cases you should either buy TM anti virus software TIS if the free trial has expired and you have no other anti virus software installed or update the TIS package Up to date displays if e The Trend Micro anti virus version numbers on the TMSS client computer are the same as the numbers downloaded to the Prestige You don t have to do anything in this case Apply Click Apply to save the settings Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 14 5 Parental Controls Screen Select the Parental Controls tab from the TMSS main screen The following screen displays Figure 108 Parental Controls Parental Control Restrict Web Features Activex I Java IT Cookies web Proxy Blocking Schedule Day to Block IV Everyday M sun M mon M Tue M wed M Thu M Fri M Sat Time of Day to Block 24 Hour Format All day C From Start 0 hour fo min End fo hour fo min Select Categories IV Pornography kW alcohol Tobacco IV Illegal Questionable M Gambling MV violence Hate Racism V Abortion IV Illegal Drugs Apply Reset Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services 198 P 335 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 Parental Controls LABEL DESCRIPTION Restrict Web Features Select the box es to restrict a f
15. 20 4 Dynamic DNS Screen To change your Prestige s DDNS click the System link under Maintenance and the Dynamic DNS tab The screen appears as shown 243 Chapter 20 System P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 130 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Service Provider WwwDynDNS ORG v Dynamic DNS Type Dynamic DNS Host Name Ee User Name Password EEE Enable Wildcard Option Enable off line option Only applies to custom DNS IP Address Update Policy amp Use WAN IP Address C Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address C Use specified IP addressppoo0 Pe rm The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Dynamic DNS Select this check box to use dynamic DNS Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Dynamic DNS Type Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider Host Name Enter a host namesin the feld provided You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma Enter your user name Enter the password assigned to you Enable Wildcard Option Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard Enable off line option This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL that you can specify while you are off line I
16. Advanced Nemos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address oman DS Server Search Ide seem CETINE Remove oman suthi Search lider lt lt lt a Add Remove 4 Click the Gateway tab e Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways e Ifyou have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 In the Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP 1 For Windows XP click start Control Panel In Windows 2000 NT click Start Settings Control Panel 44700 C S Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 292 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer G Y iy Documents ke Outlook Express WM Paint S Files and Settings Transfer Wi Ei Command Prompt A My Music Acrobat Reader 4 0 Pr ZE di Tour Windows xP 4 My Recent Documents Vi My Pictures F windows Movie Maker Control Panel Ka Printers and Faxes amp Help and Support Search A
17. Figure 282 Macintosh HD folder eo OG a Macintosh HO Back Forward i Computer Home Favorites Applications 12 items 19 31 GB available L Applications Mac 05 9 b Documents Library System 4 Double click the Utilities folder 429 Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 283 Applications Folder OO A Applications Rf e A Computer Home Favorites Applications 39 items 19 31 GB available Utilities Address Book Calculator F a Ten fa a a i i D af eer oro Clock DVD Player 5 Double click the Print Center icon Figure 284 Utilities Folder OO Utilities mm SE e A Back Forward Computer Home Favorites Applications 30 items 19 31 GB avallable Hi i Lg Keychain Access NeplofeMans Network Utility A ODEC Administrator Print Center Process Viewer 6 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen Figure 285 Printer List Folder Stylus C43 7 Set up your printer in the Printer List configuration screen Select IP Printing from the drop down list box 8 In the Printer s Address field type the IP address of your Prestige 9 Deselect the Use default queue on server check box 10Type LP1 in the Queue Name field 11Select your Printer Model from the drop down list box If the printer s model is not listed select Generic Appendix D Print Server 430 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 286 Printer Configuration OG Printer List IP Print
18. RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet Remote Command Service RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet Simple File Transfer Protocol SFTP TCP 115 SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange Simple Network Management Program systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 212 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 86 Commonly Used Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP Us
19. This may be unnecessary for data that does not require such security so PFS is disabled None by default in the Prestige Disabling PFS means new authentication and encryption keys are derived from the same root secret which may have security implications in the long run but allows faster SA setup by bypassing the Diffie Hellman key exchange 13 12 Advanced Rule Setup Screen Select Advanced at the bottom of the Rule Setup screen The following screen displays 177 Chapter 13 VPN Screens Figure 91 Advanced Rule Setup Rule Setup Property Active C Keep Alive IT NAT Traversal Key Management Protocol Number Enable Replay Detection DNS Server for IPSec VPN Local Policy Local Address Local Port Start Local Port End Remote Policy Remote Address Start Remote Address End Mask Remote Port Start Remote Port End Authentication Method My IP Address Local ID Type Local Content Secure Gateway Address Peer ID Type Peer Content IKE Phase 1 Negotiation Mode Encryption Algorithm Authentication Algorithm SA Life Time Key Group Pre Shared Key IKE Phase 2 Encapsulation Mode IPSec Protocol Encryption Algorithm Authentication Algorithm SA Life Time Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS Basic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Advanced Rule Setup P 335 Series User s Guide LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate this VPN policy Keep Alive
20. gt IGA1 M M Ov ILA2Z gt IGA2 ILA3 gt IGA1 ILA4 lt gt IGA2 Many One to One ILA16 3 IGA1 M ILA2 gt IGA2 ILA38 gt IGA3 Server Server 1 IP amp gt 3 IGA1 Server Server 2 IP gt IGA1 1 1 ILA1 3 IGA1 M 1 ILA2 3 IGA1 1 1 Server 3 IP 3 IGA1 9 2 Using NAT 137 Note You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA NAT to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the Prestige Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide 9 2 1 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT SUA Single User Account is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server The Prestige also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types You can configure Full Feature in the SMT menus only 9 3 SUA Server A SUA server set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though SUA makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service 1s on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server
21. s 1 eme mm pm mm r x kV gt Be Se see Us S e Sonunun mannen ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless stations within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate 457 Appendix Wireless LANs P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 304 Infrastructure WLAN af E V ad d d Wireless Stati Station A Fi WW B SS 1 h P p on Wireless Station RB WW Station C Les f Fai weer Fm pr am ep aa eee Oe mm me HATE e Mat mmm eee sr SE r SE ea T k a TE wn e e rrr T Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by IEEE 802 11a b g wireless devices Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing inte
22. 0xE06A 57450 Urgent Ptr 0x0000 0 Options 0000 02 04 02 00 RAW DATA 0000 45 00 OG 20 00 02 00 0088 OG FR 20000 2 OL OI A dee esd eee 2 somes OED 00 00 00 00 04 OL 0 EE BED 00 Oi OO OOO ni eed bots ood Ss eed 0020 60 02 20 00 EO 6A 00 00 02 04 02 00 Press any key to continue 36 4 Diagnostic The diagnostic facility allows you to test the different aspects of your Prestige to determine if it is working properly Menu 24 4 allows you to choose among various types of diagnostic tests to evaluate your system as shown in the following figure Follow the procedure next to get to Diagnostic 1 From the main menu type 24 to open Menu 24 System Maintenance 2 From this menu type 4 to open Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis 358 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 218 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic ME ly Pang Host 2 WAN DHCP Release 3 WAN DHCP Renewal 4 Internet Setup Test System 11 Reboot System Enter Menu Selection Number Host IP Address N A 36 4 1 WAN DHCP 359 DHCP functionality can be enabled on the LAN or WAN as shown in LAN amp WAN DHCP LAN DHCP has already been discussed The Prestige can act either as a WAN DHCP client IP Address Assignment field in menu 4 or menu 11 3 is Dynamic and the Encapsulation field in menu 4 or menu 11 is Ethernet or None when you
23. 18 3 UPnP Screen 229 Click the UPnP link under Management to display the UPnP screen Figure 127 Configuring UPnP General UPnP Setup Device Name ZyXEL P 334WT Internet Sharing Gateway IV Enable the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature IM allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP M Allow UPnP to pass through Firewall D Note For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 Configuring UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable the Universal Plug Select this checkbox to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use and Play UPnP feature a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the Prestige s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Allow users to make Select this check box to allow UPnP enabled applications to configuration changes automatically configure the Prestige so that they can communicate through UPnP through the Prestige for example by using NAT traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application Chapter 18 UPnP P 335 Series User s Guide Table 96 Configuring UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Allow UPnP to pas
24. 192 168 10410 RAGS FW 172 2141 480 Slo gt 1L12 214 180 S137 UDP derf ult permit s lt 2 0 gt B 08 01 2000 11 48 41 Locall Notice le Ore ah RAS FW 192 168 77 88 hoz SITTER 520 UDP d tault p rmit lt 2 0 gt B 08 01 2000 ihe 19 LocallsN tic O27 260s OO BRAC Fl LNL STAS IGMP lt 2 gt default permit lt 2 0 gt B 08 01 2000 11 48 39 HOCad Li n Notrce VO Eet Eh 0 RASE EW TA l JL NE EG IGMP lt 2 gt default permit lt 2 0 gt B 36 3 2 Call Triggering Packet Call Triggering Packet displays information about the packet that triggered a dial out call in an easy readable format Equivalent information is available in menu 24 1 in hex format An example is shown next 357 Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 217 Call Triggering Packet Example IP Frame ENETO RECV Size 44 44 Time 17 02 44 262 Frame Type IP Header IP Version 4 Header Length 20 Type of Service 0x00 0 Total Length 0x002C 44 Identification 0x0002 2 Flags 0x00 Fragment Offset 0x00 Time to Live OxFE 254 Protocol 0x06 TCP OxFB20 04288 OxCOA80101 192 168 1 1 Ox 00000000 0 0 0 0 Header Checksum Source IP Destination IP TCP Header Source Port 0x0401 1025 Destination Port 0x000D 13 Sequence Number 0x05B8D000 95997952 Ack Number 0x00000000 0 Header Length 24 Flags 0x02 S Window Size 0x2000 8192 Checksum
25. A list of commands can be found by typing help or at the command prompt Always type the full command Type exit to return to the SMT main menu when finished Figure 228 Valid Commands Copyright cy 1994 gt 2005 ZyXEL Communications Corp P 335 P 335WT gt Valid commands are sys exit ether ip ipsec bridge radius 8021x autoSec 38 2 Call Control Support The Prestige provides two call control functions budget management and call history Please note that this menu is only applicable when Encapsulation is set to PPPoE in menu 4 or menu I 1 1 The budget management function allows you to set a limit on the total outgoing call time of the Prestige within certain times When the total outgoing call time exceeds the limit the current call will be dropped and any future outgoing calls will be blocked To access the call control menu select option 9 in menu 24 to go to Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control as shown in the next table Figure 229 Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control 1 Budget Management 2 Cal History Enter Menu Selection Number 38 2 1 Budget Management Menu 24 9 1 shows the budget management statistics for outgoing calls Enter I from Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control to bring up the following menu 375 Chapter 38 System Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 230 Budget Management Menu 24 9 1 Budge
26. Chapter 23 Introducing the SMT 264 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 107 Main Menu Summary MENU TITLE DESCRIPTION VPN IPSec Setup Use this menu to configure VPN connections joo fet Use this to exit from SMT and return to a blank screen 23 3 Changing the System Password Change the Prestige default password by following the steps shown next 1 Enter 23 1 in the main menu to display Menu 23 1 System Security Change Password 2 Type your existing system password in the Old Password field for example 1234 and press ENTER Figure 145 Menu 23 System Password Menu 23 1 System Security Change Password Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL 3 Type your new system password in the New Password field up to 30 characters and press ENTER 4 Re type your new system password in the Retype to confirm field for confirmation and press ENTER Note When you type in a password the screen displays an for each character type 265 Chapter 23 Introducing the SMT P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 24 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup contains administrative and system related information 24 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup contains administrative and system related information shown next The System Name field is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your compu
27. Connections Programs Advanced Settings d Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet Ze zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without pour implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without implicit consent comet Pop up Blocke Presses pop up windows from appearing Block pop u f 3 Click Apply to save this setting 41 5 1 1 2 Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen 395 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 240 Internet Options Internet Options pr General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings e Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet Ze zone Hedium Blocks third party cookies that do not hawe a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without pour implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable Information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windo
28. E mail Local ID type IP Local ID content tom yourcompany com Local ID content 1 1 1 2 Peer ID type IP Peer ID type E mail Peer ID content 1 1 1 2 Peer ID content tom yourcompany com The two Prestiges in this example cannot complete their negotiation because Prestige B s Local ID type is IP but Prestige A s Peer ID type is set to E mail An ID mismatched message displays in the IPSEC LOG Figure 88 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example PRESTIGE A PRESTIGE B Local ID type IP Local ID type IP Local ID content 1 1 1 10 Local ID content 1 1 1 10 Peer ID type E mail Peer ID type IP Peer ID content aa yahoo com Peer ID content N A 13 9 Pre Shared Key A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation see Section IKE Phases for more on IKE phases It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection 13 10 VPN Rules Click Edit on the Summary screen or click the Rule Setup tab to edit VPN rules 171 Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 89 Rule Setup Rule Setup Property IV active V keep Alive IT NAT Traversal IPSec Keying Mode IKE v DNS Server for IPSec VPN 10 10 20 30 Local Policy Local Address 10 10 20 40 Remote Policy Remote Address Start 0 0 0 0 Remote Address End Mask 0 0 0 0 Authentication Method My IP Add
29. IP Alias 2 IP Address IP Subnet Mask RIP Direction RIP Version The following table Table 50 IP Alias LABEL IP Alias 1 2 Apply Reset describes the labels in this screen DESCRIPTION Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the Prestige IP Address Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask RIP Direction RIP Version Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige RIP Routing Information Protocol RFC1058 and RFC 1389 allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets Select the RIP direction from Both In Only Out Only None When set to Both or Out Only the Prestige will broadcast its routing table periodically When set to Both or In Only it will incorporate the RIP information that it receives when set to None it will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Prestige sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends th
30. P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 82 IPSec Architecture IPSec Algorithms ESP Protocol AH Protocol RFC 2406 m RFC 2402 T B S HMAC MD5 DES Encryption Authentication RFC 2403 3pes Algorithm Algorithm RFC 2404 IPSEC IKE CP Key 3 Management Manual FA 12 2 1 IPSec Algorithms The ESP Encapsulating Security Payload Protocol RFC 2406 and AH Authentication Header protocol RFC 2402 describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure including implementation algorithms The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES Data Encryption Standard and Triple DES algorithms The Authentication Algorithms HMAC MD5 RFC 2403 and HMAC SHA 1 RFC 2404 provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols Please the IPSec Algorithms section for more information 12 2 2 Key Management Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE ISAKMP or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN 12 3 Encapsulation The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode Chapter 12 Introduction to IPSec 160 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 83 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation Original IP TCP S Transport Mode IP IPSec TCP Datz Protected Packet Header Header Header Tunnel Mode IP IPSec IP TCP Data Protected Packe
31. PN 125 PAN E 126 EE ae LAN E EE i a EE E 128 Chapter 8 Eg EE EEE 130 CH EJ EEE EEE ENE RE PRE PE 130 S R PEN tes 130 NN RT NA 131 EE GE EEE EE 132 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT rrnnnnnnennnennnennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnre 134 IT EE 134 SEL EST re Pt cairia oirrn RERE TARR 134 MENT 135 n BN CEET 135 LTA eh eee EN REE A REE 136 SCENE ban ut EE eer Aere 136 AT EEE EEE EE NE ou 137 9 2 1 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT rmnnrunnennnnnnvnnnnenrnnnrnnnnnennnnnen 138 EET EE EEE EE eebe 138 9 3 1 Default Server IP Address A 138 9 3 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers 138 9 3 3 Configuring Servers Behind SUA Example rrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnennnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnn 139 9 4 General SE RE 140 NN NN NEE 141 SE GOUD OOO REE EE iaaa 142 9 6 moger Fon NN Sn 143 9 6 1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example eseu E ENER 143 9 6 2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports ceceseeeeseeeeeeeeees 144 Table of Contents P 335 Series User s Guide 9 7 POL PN SOTO Hae eatin 144 Chapter 10 FE E 146 10 1 Mtroduction to Firewall EEE EU re 146 LN e et I e EE 146 10 1 2 Stateful Inspection Firewall ccccccccseccseecsseeceeecseeeaeeecseeceesseeeeeeens 146 10 1 3 About the Prestige Firewall REENEN 146 10 1 4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 00 147 FEE EET EEN 147 10 3 TN NN eee 148 Chapter 11 ENE ee 152 11 1 Introduction to Content
32. SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Standard RR Toshiba RoadRunner Toshiba authentication method RR Manager RoadRunner Manager authentication method RR Telstra or Telia Login Choose a RoadRunner flavor if your ISP is Time Warner s RoadRunner otherwise choose Standard Note DSL users must choose the Standard option only The My Login My Password and Login Server fields are not applicable in this case The Prestige will find the RoadRunner Server IP if this field is left blank If it does not then you must enter the authentication server IP address Relogin Every min This field is available when you select Telia Login in the Service Type field The Telia server logs the Prestige out if the Prestige does not log in periodically Type the number of minutes from 1 to 59 30 recommended for the Prestige to wait between logins IP Address Assignment If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Dynamic otherwise select Static and enter the IP address and subnet mask in the following fields IP Address Enter the fixed IP address assigned to you by your ISP static IP address assignment is selected in the previous field IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask associated with your static IP 279 Chapter 27 Internet Access P 335 Series User s Guide Table 114 Internet Access Setup Ethernet Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address associated with your static IP
33. Trusted IP Setup To enable this feature type an IP address of any one of the computers in your network that you want to have as a trusted computer This allows the trusted computer to have full access to all features that are configured to be blocked by content filtering Leave this field blank to have no trusted computers Restrict Web Select the box es to restrict a feature When you download a page containing a Features restricted feature that part of the web page will appear blank or grayed out Activex A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object applications When you visit an ActiveX Web site ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser where they remain in case you visit the site again A programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds Cookies Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID Web Proxy A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security administrative control and caching service When a proxy server is located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server Enable URL The Prestige can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the Keyword Blocking domain name or IP address For example if the keyword bad was enabled all sites containing this key
34. User ID User ID Email HE Enter valid email address to activate your account immediately Password Minimum 8 characters ee Login Now Confirm password Forgot User ID Password Countryfregion Select DI Preferred language English D Password 6 After you submit the registration form you will receive an e mail with instructions for validating your e mail address Follow the instructions 7 Download TMSS to each computer behind the Prestige that you want TMSS to monitor TMSS is now active and can now monitor Prestige LAN computers with TMSS installed TMSS clients for security updates The following screen is an example of the Service Summary screen with TMSS activated Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services 192 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 103 Example TMSS Activated Service Summary Screen TREN Home Network Security Services Security Scan Parental Controls Service Summary My Account Name User Smith User ID user_smith yahoo com Login to Trend Micro Customer Account My Services Service Name Security Scan Activated Antivirus Protection 60 day trial Parental Controls 60 day trial Activated 16 days left Buy Renew Activated 16 days left My Router ZyXEL router model x41 Trend Micro Security Services version 1 0 build 102 Installation Date 03 1 2 04 Login to router Web console use your router Web console user name and p
35. the system is vulnerable to Denial of Detection Service DoS attacks The IPSec receiver can detect and reject old or duplicate packets to protect against replay attacks Select Yes from the drop down menu to enable replay detection or select No to disable it IPSec Protocol Select ESP if you want to use ESP Encapsulation Security Payload The ESP protocol RFC 2406 provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH If you select ESP here you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields described next Select AH if you want to use AH Authentication Header Protocol The AH protocol RFC 2402 was designed for integrity authentication sequence integrity replay resistance and non repudiation but not for confidentiality for which the ESP was designed If you select AH here you must select options from the Authentication Algorithm field described later Chapter 13 VPN Screens 184 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 74 Rule Setup with Manual Key LABEL DESCRIPTION Encryption Algorithm Select DES or 3DES from the drop down list box The Prestige s encryption algorithm should be identical to the secure remote gateway When DES is used for data communications both sender and receiver must know the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a
36. 0 65535 The range of this field is 0 to 65535 This field is ignored if it is 0 Port Comp Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the comparison None to apply to the destination port in the packet against the value Less given in Destination Port Greater Equal Not Equal 337 Chapter 34 Filter Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Table 136 TCP IP Filter Rule FIELD DESCRIPTION OPTIONS Source IP Address Enter the source IP Address of the packet you wish to filter This 0 0 0 0 field is ignored if it is 0 0 0 0 IP Mask Enter the IP mask to apply to the Source IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Port Enter the source port of the packets that you wish to filter The 0 65535 range of this field is 0 to 65535 This field is ignored if it is O Port Comp Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the comparison None to apply to the source port in the packet against the value given in Source Port Less TCP Estab This field is applicable only when the IP Protocol field is 6 TCP Yes Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes to have No the rule match packets that want to establish a TCP connection SYN 1 and ACK 0 if No it is ignored More Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes or No If Yes Yes a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an No action is taken if No the packet is disposed of according to the action fields If More is Yes then Action Matched and Action
37. 1 1 IPSec Setup Individual connections using the same VPN rule may be terminated without affecting other connections using the same rule This field displays Tunnel mode or Transport mode See previous for discussion IPSec This field displays the security protocols used for an SA ESP provides confidentiality and ALgorithm integrity of data by encrypting the data and encapsulating it into IP packets Encryption methods include 56 bit DES and 168 bit 3DES NULL denotes a tunnel without encryp tion An incoming SA may have an AH in addition to ESP The Authentication Header provides strong integrity and authentication by adding authentication information to IP packets This authentication information is calculated using header and payload data in the IP packet This provides an additional level of security AH choices are MD5 default 128 bits and SHA 1 160 bits Both AH and ESP increase Prestige processing requirements and communications latency delay 329 Chapter 33 SA Monitor P 335 Series User s Guide Table 133 Menu 27 2 SA Monitor FIELD DESCRIPTION Select Press SPACE BAR to choose from Refresh Disconnect None Next Page or Previ Command ous Page and then press ENTER You must select a connection in the next field when you choose the Disconnect command Refresh displays current active VPN connec tions None allows you to jump to the Press ENTER to Confirm prompt Select Next Page or P
38. 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or have it assigned by a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 70 P 335 Series User s Guide 3 4 6 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established The Internet Assig
39. 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput Authentication Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop down list box MD5 Message Digest 5 Algorithm and SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA 1 for maximum security Encryption Key Only With DES type a unique key 8 characters long With 3DES type a unique with ESP key 24 characters long Any characters may be used including spaces but trailing spaces are truncated Authentication Key Type a unique authentication key to be used by IPSec if applicable Enter 16 characters for MD5 authentication or 20 characters for SHA 1 authentication Any characters may be used including spaces but trailing spaces are truncated Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 15 SA Monitor Screen In the web configurator click the VPN link under Security and the SA Monitor tab Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections A Security SA is the group of security settings related to a specific VPN tunnel This screen displays active VPN connections Use Refresh to display active VPN connections This screen 1s read only The following table describes
40. 2236 Any IP Setup Chapter 7 LAN 128 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 51 Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to activate the Any IP feature This allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer even when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet When you disable the Any IP feature only computers with dynamic IP addresses or static IP addresses in the same subnet as the Prestige s LAN IP address can connect to the Prestige or access the Internet through the Prestige Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN Allow between LAN Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and WAN and from the WAN to the LAN If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN Apply Click Apply
41. 256 bit WEP to enable data encryption Encryption Authentication This field is activated when you select 64 bit WEP 128 bit WEP or 256 bit WEP in Method the WEP Encryption field Select Auto Open System or Shared Key from the drop down list box ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key Hex Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key The preceding 0x that identifies a hexadecimal key is entered automatically Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the Prestige and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 256 bit WEP then enter 29 ASCII characters or 58 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 87 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide 5 4 4 Introduction to WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 111 standard WPA is preferred to WEP as WPA has user authentication and improved data encryption See the appendix for mor
42. 27 1 IPSec Summary This is a summary read only menu of your IPSec rules tunnels Edit or create an IPSec rule by selecting an index number and then configuring the associated submenus Figure 191 Menu 27 Name Local Addr Start Local Addr End IPSec Algorithm Key Mgt Remote Addr Start Remote Addr End Secure GW Addr Looy La 162 40 ESP DES MDS ket Pi by oho FS Tunnel EEE E A A dh EE Tunnel AH SHAL L684 1640 det Tunnel zw gt Otest zyxel nese Aes PaO eae ESP DES Miz Lee Loos Lv GO N A NoneSelect Rule N A Table 128 Menu 27 1 IPSec Summary FIELD DESCRIPTION This is the VPN policy index number Name This field displays the unique identification name for this VPN rule The name may be up to 32 characters long but only 10 characters will be displayed here Y signifies that this VPN rule is active 317 Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup P 335 Series User s Guide Table 128 Menu 27 1 IPSec Summary FIELD DESCRIPTION Local Addr When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to Single this is a Start static IP address on the LAN behind your Prestige When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to Range this is the beginning static IP address in a range of computers on the LAN behind your Pres tige When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to SUBNET this is a static IP address on the LAN behind your Prestige Local Addr When the Addr Type fie
43. 5 Bandwidth Management Wizard Priority Use the following wizard screen to select the priorities that you want to apply to the services listed Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard 78 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 35 Bandwidth Management Wizard Priority STEPS STEP STER SS f Priority Setup Set bandwidth priorities for the services listed Select High Mid or Low to prioritize the bandwidth for each service If the rules set up in this Wizard are changed in the ADVANCED setup then the service priority will be set to Other Servi Zi XBox Live i Low other VoIP SIP i Low other FTF Other E Mail other e e eMuleeDonkey other WWW other The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 27 Bandwidth Management Wizard Priority LABELS DESCRIPTION These fields display the services selected in the previous screen Priority Select High Mid or Low priority for each service to have your Prestige use a priority for traffic that matches that service If the rules set up in this wizard are changed in Management Bandwidth MGMT Configuration Modify then the service priority radio button will be set to Others The Management Bandwidth MGMT Configuration Modify screen allows you to edit these rule configurations Click Back to return to the previous screen Finish Click Finish to complete and save the bandwidth management setup 4 6 Bandwidth Manag
44. 91 7810 2179 TCR 18 5 2 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the ZyXEL device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL device first This is helpful if you do not know the IP address of the ZyXEL device Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 235 Chapter 18 UPnP 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click the icon for your ZyXEL device and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays 6 Right click the icon for your ZyXEL device and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the ZyXEL device 18 5 3 Web Configurator Easy Access P 335 Series User s Guide Service Settings Description of service Test Name or IF address for example 192 168 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on Your network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 Grp UDP Internal Port number for this service 143 4 Internet Connection is now connected gt Click here For more information Upnpe Paint Y Internet Connection Status General Internet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway M
45. AH and ESP increase Prestige processing requirements and communications latency delay Gateway This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router This field displays 0 0 0 0 when you configure the Secure Gateway Addr field in the Rule Setup IKE screen to 0 0 0 0 Modify Click the Edit icon to open the rule setup screen Modify a VPN policy or create a new VPN policy in the Rule Setup screen Click the edit icon next to an empty VPN policy index number to add a new VPN policy Click the Remove icon to delete a VPN policy When a VPN policy is deleted subsequent policies do not move up in the list 167 Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide 13 6 Keep Alive When you initiate an IPSec tunnel with keep alive enabled the Prestige automatically renegotiates the tunnel when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires the IPSec Algorithms section for more on the IPSec SA lifetime In effect the IPSec tunnel becomes an always on connection after you initiate it Both IPSec routers must have a Prestige compatible keep alive feature enabled in order for this feature to work If the Prestige has its maximum number of simultaneous IPSec tunnels connected to it and they all have keep alive enabled then no other tunnels can take a turn connecting to the Prestige because the Prestige never drops the tunnels that are already connected Note When there is outbound traffic with no inbound traffic the Prestige au
46. Access 282 P 335 Series User s Guide 283 Chapter 27 Internet Access P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 28 Remote Node Configuration This chapter covers remote node configuration 28 1 Introduction to Remote Node Setup A remote node is required for placing calls to a remote gateway A remote node represents both the remote gateway and the network behind it across a WAN connection Note that when you use menu 4 to set up Internet access you are actually configuring a remote node The following describes how to configure Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter and Menu 11 6 Traffic Redirect Setup 28 2 Remote Node Profile Setup From the main menu select menu option 11 to open Menu 11 Remote Node Profile shown below The following explains how to configure the remote node profile menu 28 2 1 Ethernet Encapsulation There are two variations of menu 11 depending on whether you choose Ethernet Encapsulation or PPPoE Encapsulation You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet The first menu 11 1 screen you see is for Ethernet encapsulation shown next Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration 284 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 157 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for Ethernet Encapsulation Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name MyISP Route IP Active Yes Encapsulation Ethernet Edit IP No Servic
47. Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Screen Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard G Welcome to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Tou use this wizard to add port for a network printer Before continuing be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Nest lt Back Cancel 10 Type the IP Address of your Prestige A default Port Name displays as you type the IP Address Alternatively type a different name to change the Port Name 11 Click Next to continue 423 Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide Add Port For which device do you want to add port Enter the Printer Name or IP address and port name for the desired device Printer Mame or IP Address fi 32 168 1 1 Port Name fr 92 168 1 1 g Back Mest gt Cancel 12 Select the Custom radio button and click the Settings button Fill in additional print server port information in the following screen Figure 271 Additional Port Information Screen Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Additional Port Information Required The device could not be identified The detected device is of unknown type Be sure that 1 The device iz properly configured 2 The address on the previous page Is correct Either correct the address and perform another search on the network by returning to the previous wizard page or select the device type if you are sure the addres
48. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 102 P 335 Series User s Guide 5 8 WMM QoS WMM Wi Fi MultiMedia QoS Quality of Service ensures quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications WMM allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of the individual and applications WMM is a part of the IEEE 802 11e QoS enhancement to certified Wi Fi wireless networks 5 8 1 WMM QoS Example When WMM QoS 1s not enabled all traffic streams are given the same access throughput to the wireless network If the introduction of another traffic stream creates a data transmission demand that exceeds the current network capacity then the new traffic stream reduces the throughput of the other traffic streams When WMM QoS 1s enabled the streams are prioritized according to the needs of the application You can assign different priorities to different applications This prevents reductions in data transmission for applications that are sensitive 5 8 2 WMM QoS Priorities The following table describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the Prestige sends to the wireless network Table 40 WMM QoS Priorities PRIORITY LEVELS Highest Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter variations in delay Use the highest priority to reduce latency for improved voice quality High Typ
49. Click a column heading to sort the entries A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order Chapter 21 Logs 248 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 132 View Log View Log Logs Display fan Logs DN Email Log Now Refresh Clear Log EE ET Source Destination Note Packet Trigger Protocol 1 Data Packet Trigger Protocol 1 Dat 01 01 2000 02 59 01 01 01 2000 02 59 01 01 01 2000 02 58 15 01 01 2000 02 57 44 01 01 2000 02 57 44 01 01 2000 02 56 58 01 01 2000 02 56 27 01 01 2000 02 56 27 01 01 2000 02 55 10 board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 209 CO1 Outgoing Call dev 6 ch 0 board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 208 CO1 Outgoing Call dey 6 ch 0 Packet Trigger Protocol 1 Data Packet Trigger Protocol 1 Dat board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 207 CO1 Outgoing Call dev 6 ch 0 board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 206 C01 Outgoing Call dev 6 ch 0 Packet Trigger Protocol 1 Data Packet Trigger Protocol 1 Dat board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 205 C01 Outgoing Call dev 6 ch 0 Packet Trigger Protocol 1 Data Packet Trigger Protocol 1 Dat PACKET TRIGGER CALL DETAIL RECORD CALL DETAIL RECORD PACKET TRIGGER CALL DETAIL RECORD CALL DETAIL RECORD PACKET TRIGGER CALL DETAIL RECORD PACKET TRIGGER The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 101 View Logs LABEL DESCRIPTION Display The categories that you select in the Log Settings page see
50. Corrosive Liquids 4 Cost Of Transmission 295 Covers 4 CTS Clear to Send 459 Customer Support 6 D Damage 4 Dampness 4 Danger 4 Dealer 3 Default 257 Defective 5 Denial of Service 314 Denmark Contact Information 6 DHCP 55 122 130 243 353 DHCP Table Summary 55 DHCP client list 132 Disclaimer 2 Discretion 5 DNS 226 DNS Server For VPN Host 169 Domain Name 139 Dust 4 Dynamic DNS 243 267 Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 465 DYNDNS Wildcard 243 E EAP 82 EAP Authentication 462 463 ECHO 139 Edit IP 286 Electric Shock 4 Electrical Pipes 4 479 Electrocution 4 E Mail 108 Encapsulation 285 288 Equal Value 5 ESS 457 Ethernet 404 Ethernet Encapsulation 138 284 285 Europe 4 Exposure 4 Extended Service Set 457 Extended Service Set IDentification 85 Extended wireless security 65 F Factory LAN Defaults 122 Fail Tolerance 292 Failure 5 FCC 3 Compliance 3 Rules Part 15 3 FCC Rules 3 Federal Communications Commission 3 Filename Conventions 362 Filter 272 290 Applying 344 Example 341 Generic Filter Rule 339 Generic Rule 340 NAT 343 Remote Node 345 Structure 333 Finger 139 Finland Contact Information 6 Firewall 146 147 Access Methods 314 Remote Management 314 SMT Menus 314 Firmware File Maintenance 254 255 Fitness 5 Fragmentation Threshold 459 Fragmentation threshold 459 France Contact Information 6 FTP 122 138 139 218 221 243 383 FTP File Transf
51. DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in DHCP Setup 2 If the ISP did not give you DNS server information leave the DNS Server fields in DHCP Setup set to 0 0 0 0 for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP addresses 3 4 8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the Prestige an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP 71 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 29 IP and DNS Server Address Assignment STEP 1 STEP STEPRS f Internet Configuration My WAN IP Address My WAN IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address First ONS Server Second DNS Server Third GNS Server The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 IP and DNS Server Address Assignment WAN IP Address Assignment My WAN IP Address Enter a WAN IP address and WAN IP Subnet Mask of the neighboring device if you know it If you do not leave the default settings The WAN IP address should be in the same subnet as your DSL Cable modem or router If you were given IP address and or DNS server settings enter them in the fields Otherwise leave the default settings and just click Next System DNS Server Address Assignment if applicable DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it yo
52. Dynamic IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A Gateway IP Address N A Network Address Translation SUA Only Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table contains instructions about the new fields when you choose PPPoE in the Encapsulation field in menu 4 Table 116 New Fields in Menu 4 PPPoE screen FIELD DESCRIPTION Encapsulation Press SPACE BAR and then press ENTER to choose PPPoE The encapsulation method influences your choices in the IP Address field Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the Prestige automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server If you need a PPPoE service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server please go to menu 11 and enter the PPPoE service name provided to you in the Service Name field 27 5 Basic Setup Complete Well done You have successfully connected installed and set up your Prestige to operate on your network as well as access the Internet Note When the firewall is activated the default policy allows all communications to the Internet that originate from the LAN and blocks all traffic to the LAN that originates from the Internet You may deactivate the firewall in menu 21 2 or via the Prestige embedded web configurator You may also define additional firewall rules or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so See the chapters on firewall for more information on the firewall Chapter 27 Internet
53. Figure 81 Encryption and Decryption Plain text gt E cription Gphertext be ay 12 1 3 2 Data Confidentiality The IPSec sender can encrypt packets before transmitting them across a network 12 1 3 3 Data Integrity The IPSec receiver can validate packets sent by the IPSec sender to ensure that the data has not been altered during transmission 12 1 3 4 Data Origin Authentication The IPSec receiver can verify the source of IPSec packets This service depends on the data integrity service 12 1 4 VPN Applications The Prestige supports the following VPN applications e Linking Two or More Private Networks Together Connect branch offices and business partners over the Internet with significant cost savings and improved performance when compared to leased lines between sites Accessing Network Resources When NAT Is Enabled When NAT is enabled remote users are not able to access hosts on the LAN unless the host is designated a public LAN server for that specific protocol Since the VPN tunnel terminates inside the LAN remote users will be able to access all computers that use private IP addresses on the LAN e Unsupported IP Applications A VPN tunnel may be created to add support for unsupported emerging IP applications See the chapter on Getting to Know Your Prestige for an example of a VPN application 12 2 IPSec Architecture The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows 159 Chapter 12 Introduction to IPSec
54. Filter Rule Menu Fields 340 Table 138 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration 348 FT NN re 348 Table 140 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits rrrrrrrnnernnnnnnnnnnnrvanennnennnennnennernnnnnnnennnsen 349 Table 141 System Maintenance Status Menu Fields rrarrnnennnnnnrnnnrnanennrnnnennnnnernanenennnnnn 351 Table 142 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information 353 Table 143 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting 354 Table 144 System Maintenance Menu Diagnostic 359 Table 145 Filename Conventions EE 363 Table 146 General Commands for GUl based FTP Clients rrrrrrnnennnrnnnennnnnranennnnnnnennnnnn 365 Table 147 General Commands for GUl based TFTP Clients ccc eccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 367 Table 148 Menu 24 9 1 Budget Management REENEN 376 Table 149 Call History Fields sea S Table 150 Time and Date Setting Fields ccvesdeescinntdcavncssaidacsscianeiaadscsicuddmssesahsansetienddiannennane 379 Table 151 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control rrurnrnnnnurnrnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 383 Table 152 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup sisiisenteesssiiincsaiansensedauaresinnsalasaiausssuanstacimsarserouars 387 Table 153 Troubleshooting Starting Up Your Prestige rrarrrararananrannranennnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnn 390 Table 154 Troubleshooting the LAN smuyuasmtnameasmitseemnrmesmidmaejmdmdtund ene 390 Table 159 Troubleshooting the WAN seres aiaa 391 Table 156 Troubleshooting Accessing the
55. Filtering EE 152 11 2 Restrict PN LESA aan 152 TINN 152 NETT LGG 152 KEE 154 11 6 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking ccccssecenseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 11 6 1 Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking rrrrarenanennarnvnnnrnnrnnnnnnnnnn 155 ETER EE RR 156 11 6 3 File Name URL Checking EE 156 Chapter 12 introduction EE EE 158 PAGE PR NE 158 FIT 158 EE ENE EN 158 be E TN EE 158 Pegg EE EEE EE 158 12 1 3 2 Data Confidentiality EE 159 UC e IE EE 159 12 1 3 4 Data Origin Authentication E 159 NTN 159 VPN NNN eebe 159 12 2 1 NNN ent 160 VET 160 FE SE RO 160 TnT annon RNET eae nis 161 LT 161 VET NE EE 161 Table of Contents 12 P 335 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Uu KT EEEIEI E E A E E PE EEE A EAA I E E T 164 131 PAST e TEE 164 Te 5 EEE 164 13 2 1 AH Authentication Header Protocol rrrnnnernnnrrnnnrnvnnennnnnnnnnnennnnennnne 164 13 2 2 ESP Encapsulating Security Payload Protocol 164 NNN 165 13 4 Secure Gateway Address Jed 165 13 4 1 Dynamic Secure Gateway Address rrrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnenanennnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnne 166 TRS AFN Re EE 166 EEE ENE Oaa a iE a 168 NTT Ne 168 13 7 1 NAT Traversal Configuration anrrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnenanrnnnnnnnnen 168 13 7 2 Remote DNS Server Leie misdndt 169 TET EE a a i 169 13 8 1 ID Type and Content Examples ranrrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnanenanrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnen 170 NE ERE Eaa andi ee ee ER 171 DN PAU AN 171 TE
56. Gateway Manufacturer ZW EL Model Hame ZW EL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number Prestige 314 Plus Description AWEL Prestige 314 Plus Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 10 17 237 Chapter 18 UPnP P 335 Series User s Guide Chapter 18 UPnP 238 P 335 Series User s Guide 239 Chapter 18 UPnP P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 19 Print Server This chapter discusses how to configure the print server on the Prestige 19 1 Print Server Overview A print server is a device or software that provides users on a network with shared access to one or more printers The print server acts as a buffer holding the information to be printed out in memory until the printer becomes free Print servers can be programmed to print jobs in the order that they arrive or to give priority to particular users who in effect can jump the print queue The advantages of a print server include efficient use of expensive resources for example laser printers This avoids having to retry to print if the printer is initially busy 19 2 Prestige Print Server The Prestige has a built in print server that allows the LAN to share a printer There is no need to assign a dedicated computer as a print server or have a standalone print server device The print server supports Line Printer Remote LPR protocol LPR is a cross platform printing protocol that uses TCP IP to establish connections between printers and computers
57. IP Static Route Setup Table 122 Menu12 1 Edit IP Static Route Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for this destination Follow the discussion on P Subnet Mask in this manual Gateway IP Address Type the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Prestige that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Prestige over WAN the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes Metric Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Type a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Private This parameter determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts If set to Yes this route is kept private and is not included in RIP broadcasts If No the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts When you have comple
58. IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the Prestige to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet through the Prestige In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network you may need to manually configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the Internet via the Prestige With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled the Prestige allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static fixed IP address you can simply connect the computer to the Prestige and access the Internet The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment In a residential house where a Prestige is installed you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings even when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet Figure 61 Any IP Example Application Y GC ga Internet f er The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the Prestige s IP address Note You must enable NAT to use the Any IP feature on the Prestige
59. IPSec This chapter introduces the basics of IPSec VPNs 12 1 VPN Overview A VPN Virtual Private Network provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site to site lines secure VPN is a combination of tunneling encryption authentication access control and auditing technologies services used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses the TCP IP protocol suite for communication 12 1 1 IPSec Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a standards based VPN that offers flexible solutions for secure data communications across a public network like the Internet IPSec is built around a number of standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality data integrity and authentication at the IP layer 12 1 2 Security A Security SA is a contract between two parties indicating what security parameters such as keys and algorithms they will use 12 1 3 Other Terminology 12 1 3 1 Encryption Encryption is a mathematical operation that transforms data from plaintext readable to ciphertext scrambled text using a key The key and clear text are processed by the encryption operation which leads to the data scrambling that makes encryption secure Decryption is the opposite of encryption it is a mathematical operation that transforms ciphertext to plaintext Decryption also requires a key Chapter 12 Introduction to IPSec 158 P 335 Series User s Guide
60. ISP This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your ISP Click Back to return to the previous screen Click Next to continue 3 4 4 Your IP Address 69 The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the Prestige an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP Chapter 3 Connection Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 28 Your IP Address SPER STEP 2 ES Internet Configuration Get automatically from your ISP Used fixed IP address provided by your I SP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Your IP Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Get automatically from Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is ISP the default selection Use fixed IP address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address The fixed IP address should be in the same subnet as your broadband modem or router Click Back to return to the previous screen Click Next to continue 3 4 5 WAN IP Address Assignment Every computer on the Internet must have a unique IP address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for instance only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks Table 20 Private IP Address Ranges
61. Monitoring Tools Networking Services 0 3 MB 85 Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a variety of specialized network related services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 9 MB Networking Services To add or remove component click the check box 4 shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in component click Details Subcomponents of Networking Services C RIP Listener 0 0 MB O A Simple TCP IP Services 0 0 MB amp Universal Plug and Play 0 2 MB Description Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 8 MB 18 5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the ZyXEL device Chapter 18 UPnP 232 P 335 Series User s Guide Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the ZyXEL device Turn on your computer and the ZyXEL device 233 Chapter 18 UPnP P 335 Series User s Guide 18 5 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays a E under Internet Gateway File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q Back 2 3 Search m Folders fi 2 Right click the ic
62. Notebook computer __ Ka Firewall Router 37 Preface P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Prestige 1 1 Prestige Overview The Prestige is the ideal secure firewall router for all data passing between the Internet and LAN s or WLAN s P 335 WT By integrating NAT firewall media bandwidth management and VPN capability ZyXEL s Prestige is a complete security solution that protects your Intranet and efficiently manages data traffic on your network The embedded web configurator is easy to operate In the Prestige product name W denotes wireless functionality The P 335WT has an embedded mini PCI module for 802 11g Wireless LAN connectivity Note Only use firmware for your Prestige s specific model 1 2 Prestige Features The following sections describe Prestige features 1 2 1 Physical Features USB Port The Prestige uses a USB 1 1 port to connect to a printer with a USB interface Printers that use USB 1 0 are also compatible Computers on the LAN use the printer by sending print requests to the print server in the Prestige OTIST Button P 335WT Use this button to activate OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology OTIST allows your Prestige to assign wireless clients the Prestige s SSID and static WEP or WPA PSK encryption settings The wireless client must also support OTIST a
63. PPTP Pass Through feature the PPTP tunneling is created from Windows 95 98 and NT clients to an NT server in a remote location The pass through feature allows users on the network to access a different remote server using the Prestige s Internet connection In SUA NAT mode the Prestige is able to pass the PPTP packets to the internal PPTP server 1 e NT server behind the NAT You need to configure port forwarding for port 1723 to have the Prestige forward PPTP packets to the server In the case above as the remote PPTP Client initializes the PPTP connection the user must configure the PPTP clients The Prestige initializes the PPTP connection hence there is no need to configure the remote PPTP clients Appendix C PPTP 408 P 335 Series User s Guide PPTP Protocol Overview PPTP is very similar to L2TP since L2TP is based on both PPTP and L2F Cisco s Layer 2 Forwarding Conceptually there are three parties in PPTP namely the PNS PPTP Network Server the PAC PPTP Access Concentrator and the PPTP user The PNS is the box that hosts both the PPP and the PPTP stacks and forms one end of the PPTP tunnel The PAC is the box that dials answers the phone calls and relays the PPP frames to the PNS The PPTP user is not necessarily a PPP client can be a PPP server too Both the PNS and the PAC must have IP connectivity however the PAC must in addition have dial up capability The phone call is between the user and the PAC and the PAC tun
64. Prestige rrrrrrnrannnnnnnnrvnnrvanevnnrnnnennernnnnnnnennnsne 392 Table 157 Troubleshooting Restricted Web Pages and Keyword Blocking 392 Table 158 Troubleshooting the Password REE EE 393 Table 159 Troubleshooting Telnet AA 393 TNT NN pa 404 TT ee 404 Table 162 Print Server Interface RENE SE 434 Table 163 Print Server Requirements and Specifications 434 Table 164 Compatible USB Printers sccicieniacnananeicnestadsertuhiavaiatnanetideaatadienansasmannisactaanavanentuans 434 Table 165 NetBIOS Filter Default Settings 441 List of Tables P 335 Series User s Guide Be SE eo LE 442 Table 167 System Maintenance LogS ciccssesadarctinaihcasacvansedassesasisacanaspansanensaesicecaitenacasnanecnnens 442 TEE Belk ee UFF LOOS E EE 443 Table 169 ICMP Type and Code Explanations eerste Ee eege dee Geen kee ndvk tr 443 Tabe NERE TN 460 Table 171 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types rrrrrrennreranernnrnnnnrranennnnnnanennernnnennnne 465 Table 172 Wireless Security Relational Matrix 467 Table 173 Brute Force Password Guessing Protection Commands rrrrrrnnrnannnnnnanennnnnnnn 472 List of Tables 34 P 335 Series User s Guide 35 List of Tables P 335 Series User s Guide Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the P 335 Firewall Router with Print Server or the P 335WT 802 11g Wireless Firewall Router with Print Server This manual is designed to guide you through the configuration of your Prestige for
65. RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Next to the name of the service two fields appear in brackets The first field indicates the IP protocol type TCP UDP or ICMP The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type For example look at the DNS service UDP TCP 53 means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53 Table 86 Commonly Used Services mmer see CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software 24032 DNS UDP TCP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 21 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management 211 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management P 335 Series User s Guide Table 86 Commonly Used Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION IPSEC_TUNNEL AH 0 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling pro
66. Resetting the Prestige If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the Prestige to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234 2 3 1 Procedure To Use The Reset Button 1 Make sure the PWR LED is on not blinking 2 Press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the PWR LED begins to blink and then release it When the PWR LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the Prestige restarts 2 4 Navigating the Prestige Web Configurator The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Status screen 49 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 8 Web Configurator Status Screen ZyXEL Language English Status x gt r Status Device Information System Status f System Name P 335 P 335WT System Up Time 1 19 12 Firmware Version V3 60 J0 3 b1 08 13 2005 Current Date Time 2000 1 1 1 19 9 WAN Information System Resource IP Address CPU Usage IF Subnet Mask Mernory Usage DHCP LAN Information IF Address 192 168 1 1 IF Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server WLAN Information Name SSID ZyXEL Channel 6 Security Mode WPA PSK Interface Status Interface L00M Full G Summary Any IP Table Details
67. Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered it correctly Server This field is valid only when RoadRunner is selected in the Service Type field The Prestige will find the RoadRunner Server IP automatically if this field is left blank If it does not then you must enter the authentication server IP address here Relogin Every This field is available when you select Telia Login in the Service Type field min The Telia server logs the Prestige out if the Prestige does not log in periodically Type the number of minutes from 1 to 59 30 recommended for the Prestige to wait between logins Route This field refers to the protocol that will be routed by your Prestige IP is the only option for the Prestige 285 Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Table 117 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for Ethernet Encapsulation FIELD DESCRIPTION Edit IP This field leads to a hidden menu Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to go to Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Session Options Edit Filter Sets This field leads to another hidden menu Use SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to open menu 11 5 to edit the filter sets See the Remote Node Filter section for more details Edit Traffic Press SPACE BAR to select Yes or No Redirect Select Yes and press ENTER to configure Menu 11 6 Traffic Redirect Setup Select No default
68. S T ROLNE Mar 03 11559 20 202s132 155491 ZyXEL GEN O00aO0c5Sf502fnord010080 S05 gt ROImF Mar 03 1002 202 sz oa ST AYA EL GEN FEFFFTTEFFFLONSD 1SOS gt ROLMF Mar Uo E EE 20Z oslo LT ZELL GEN 00a0c5f 502010080 SO5 gt RO1mF Mar 03 12401106 202 SZ aS ZyXEL TP Sr gt 192 4168 2433 Dst 202 132 155 93 TEP po 01170 lt dpo 00021 S04eR01mE 36 3 1 4 PPP log PPP Log Message Format Socmdsyslogsend SYTSLUG PPPLOG SYSLOG NOTICE String J7 String gt pppiProto Starting ppp rProto Opening PE Proto Closing 7 pppiPr t Shutdown Proto LCP ATCP 7 BACP BOP CBOR oY SOP 7 CHAPS FAP TPCP 7 IPXCP JUL 198 11542242 192 66 LOZ 2 ZyXE hs ppo LCP Closing Jul 19 11 92 19 192 165 102 2 ZyXEL ppp LPP Closing JUL 19 11392054 197 168 102 2 By xs ppp CCP Clos img Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis 356 P 335 Series User s Guide 36 3 1 5 Firewall log Firewall Log Message Format sdcmdSyslogSend SYSLOG FIREWALL SYSLOG NOTICE buf bur IP Sre xx 2 XxX XX DEE E DSTH Xe KK E I dpo xxx x prot Ful action Src Source Address spo Source port empty means no source port information Dst Destination Address dpo Destination port empty means no destination port information prot Protocol TE STUP STP eMac GRE YG Pe rule lt a b gt where a means set number b means rule number Action nothing N block B forward F 08 01 2000 11 48 41 Locall Notice
69. Series User s Guide 484
70. System Maintenance 380 P 335 Series User s Guide 381 Chapter 38 System Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 39 Remote Management This chapter covers remote management SMT menu 24 11 39 1 Remote Management Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which Prestige interface if any from which computers You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via e ALL LAN and WAN e LAN only e Neither Disable o gt To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field Enter 11 from menu 24 to bring up Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control Chapter 39 Remote Management 382 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 234 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control TELNET Server Port 23 Access ALL Secure Client IP 0 0 0 FTP Server Port 21 Access ALL Secure Client IP 0 0 0 Web Server Port 80 Access ALL Secure Client IP 0 0 0 SNMP Service Port 161 Access LAN only Secure Client IP 0 0 0 DNS Service Port 53 Access LAN only Secure Client IP 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 151 FIELD DESCRIPTION Telnet Server Each of these read only labels denotes a service or protocol FTP Server Web Server SNMP Service DNS Service Port Menu 24 11 Remote Mana
71. There are two commands in Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status Entering 1 resets the counters ESC takes you back to the previous screen The following table describes the fields present in Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status which are read only and meant for diagnostic purposes Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis 350 P 335 Series User s Guide 351 Figure 212 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status ES Sat Jan 01 2000 Port Status TxPkts RxPkts Cols Tx B s Rx B s Up Time WAN Down O O O O O 0 00 00 LAN 1000M Full 0 0 0 0 0 142123 Port Ethernet Address IP Address IP Mask DHCP WAN 00 20 05 01121481 LO 000 Client LAN 00 A0 C5 01 21 80 192 168 1 1 255725572550 Server WLAN O03 A0TC5S 201321280 System up Time 182182 Name P 335 P 335WT zyxel com tw Routing IP ZyNOS F W Versions V3560 00 38 08 13 2005 Press Command COMMANDS 1 Drop WAN 9 Reset Counters ESC Ex1it The following table describes the fields present in Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status These fields are READ ONLY and meant for diagnostic purposes The upper right corner of the screen shows the time and date according to the format you set in menu 24 10 Table 141 System Maintenance Status Menu Fields DESCRIPTION Identifies a port WAN LAN on the Prestige Shows the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet Encapsulation and Down line is down idle line
72. Trend Micro Home Network Security Services Computer s that will This box displays the Prestige LAN computers with TMSS installed TMSS display Trend Micro clients that can be monitored by TMSS Home Network Security Services Computer s to This box displays the Prestige LAN computers that are exempted from TMSS exclude monitoring Select a computer IP address from the previous list box and then click Add gt gt to omit it from TMSS monitoring Select a computer IP address from this list box and then click lt lt Remove to have TMSS monitor it Exception List Use the Exception List to specify which computers are not to be restricted by Parental Controls All TMSS clients are displayed in the Available IP Addresses list box Use the Add gt gt or lt lt Remove buttons to move computer IP addresses to the Selected IP Addresses list box and then select one of the following radio buttons to apply an action Enforce Parental Select the radio button to have Parental Controls enabled on computers with Control policies for all IP addresses listed in the Available IP Addresses list box This is the default computers setting Include specified Select the radio button to apply Parental Controls only to the computers with address ranges in the IP addresses listed in the Selected IP Addresses list box Parental Control enforcement Exclude specified Select the radio button to exempt computers with IP addresses displayed in ad
73. User s Guide Figure 80 Schedule Schedule Schedule to Block Day to Block Iv Everyday C sun O mon C Tue C Wed mu C fri O Sat Time of Day to Block 24 Hour Format all day C From Start fo hour lo min End lo hour lo min Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Schedule LABEL DESCRIPTION Day to Block Select check boxes for the days that you want the Prestige to perform content filtering Select the Everyday check box to have content filtering turned on all days of the week Time of Day to Block allows the administrator to define during which time Time of Day to Block periods content filtering is enabled Time of Day to Block restrictions only 24 Hour Format apply to the keywords see above Restrict web server data such as ActiveX Java Cookies and Web Proxy are not affected Enter the time period in 24 hour format during which content filtering will be enforced Select the All Day check box to have content filtering always active on the days selected in Day to Block with time of day limitations not enforced Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 6 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking You can use commands to set how much of a website s URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking See the appendices for information on how to access and use t
74. address es users can use HTTP to manage the Prestige TELNET Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use Telnet to manage the Prestige FTP Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use FTP to access the Prestige es SNMP Use this screen to configure your Prestige s settings for Simple Network Management Protocol management DNS Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can send DNS queries to the Prestige Use this screen to change your anti probing settings 53 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 335 Series User s Guide Table 4 Screens Summary LINK FUNCTION UPnP General Print Server Use this screen to enable UPnP on the Prestige Print Server Use this screen to view the printer and printer port name and to monitor the printer status Maintenance General This screen contains administrative Dynamic DNS Time Setting System Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS Use this screen to change your Prestige s time and date Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected Logs View Log Log Settings Use this screen to change your Prestige s log settings aat a D Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your Prestige Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the
75. addressing information in the data stream These applications won t work through NAT even when using One to One and Many to Many No Overload mapping types Follow the steps outlined in example 3 to configure these two menus as follows Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT 310 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 185 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Type Many One to One EOGAL IP Start 192 168 1 10 End 192 s1L68sl14 12 Global TIP Start 10 132 502 1 Bnd 102 132 5043 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel After you ve configured your rule you should be able to check the settings in menu 15 1 1 as shown next Figure 186 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Set Name Example4 Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP LY JOS LNG 197 NES ud EOS Se LiL Aa iS M M NO OV 1 S 3 4 oe 6 7 8 9 O Action Edit Select Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 30 6 Configuring Trigger Port Forwarding Note Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port range at a time Enter 3 in menu 15 to display Menu 15 3 Trigger Port Setup shown next 311 Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 187 Menu 15 3 Trigger Port Setup Menu 15 3 Trigger Port Setup Incoming Trigger Start POTE ENG Port Start Port Kor Port Real Audio
76. and password The RADIUS server checks the user information against its user profile database and determines whether or not to authenticate the wireless station Types of Authentication 463 This appendix discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP Consult your network administrator for more information EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless station The wireless station proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless stations for mutual authentication The server
77. can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP 9 3 1 Default Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen Note If you do not assign a Default Server IP Address the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management 9 3 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers A SUA server set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world Use the Port Forwarding page to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example
78. case you should contact your vendor 41 2 Problems with the LAN Table 154 Troubleshooting the LAN PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION The LAN LEDs Check your Ethernet cable connections refer to the Quick Start Guide for details do not turn on Check for faulty Ethernet cables Make sure your computer s Ethernet Card is working properly cannot access An IP is disabled make sure that the IP address and the subnet mask of the the Prestige from Prestige and your computer s are on the same subnet the LAN Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 390 P 335 Series User s Guide 41 3 Problems with the WAN Table 155 Troubleshooting the WAN PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION The WAN LED is off Check the connections between the Prestige WAN port and the cable DSL modem or ethernet jack Check whether your cable DSL device requires a crossover or straight through cable cannot geta Click WAN to verify your settings WAN IP fromthe o The username and password apply to PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation only Make sure that you have entered the correct Service Type User Name and Password be sure to use the correct casing Refer to the WAN Setup chapter web configurator or SMT cannot access Make sure the Prestige is turned on and connected to the network the Internet Verify your WAN settings Refer to the chapter on WAN setup web configurator or the section on Internet Access SMT Make sure you entered the correct u
79. check box You can also configure specific times by entering the start time in the Start hr and Start min fields and the end time in the End hr and End min fields Enter times in 24 hour format for example 3 00pm should be entered as 15 00 Select Categories Pornography Selecting this category excludes pages that contain sexually explicit material for the purpose of arousing a sexual or prurient interest Illegal Questionable Selecting this category excludes pages that advocate or give advice on performing illegal acts such as service theft evading law enforcement fraud burglary techniques and plagiarism It also includes pages that provide or sell questionable educational materials such as term papers This category includes sites identified as being malicious in any way such as web pages that may contain viruses spyware etc Violence Hate Racism Selecting this category excludes pages that depict extreme physical harm to people or property or that advocate or provide instructions on how to cause such harm It also includes pages that advocate depict hostility or aggression toward or denigrate an individual or group on the basis of race religion gender nationality ethnic origin or other characteristics Illegal Drugs Selecting this category excludes pages that promote offer sell supply encourage or otherwise advocate the illegal use cultivation manufacture or distribution of drugs pharmace
80. choose PPTP as your encapsulation option This brings up the following screen Chapter 27 Internet Access 280 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 155 Internet Access Setup PPTP Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation PPTP Service Type N A My Login My Password Retype to Confirm 7A keke Idle Timeout 100 IP Address Assignment Dynamic IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A Gateway IP Address N A Network Address Translation SUA Only Press ENTER to Confirm of ESC to Cancel The following table contains instructions about the new fields when you choose PPTP in the Encapsulation field in menu 4 Table 115 New Fields in Menu 4 PPTP Screen FIELD DESCRIPTION Encapsulation Press SPACE BAR and then press ENTER to choose PPTP The encapsulation method influences your choices for the IP Address field Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the Prestige automatically disconnects from the PPTP server 27 4 Configuring the PPPoE Client If you enable PPPoE in menu 4 you will see the next screen For more information on PPPoE please see the appendix 281 Chapter 27 Internet Access P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 156 Internet Access Setup PPPoE Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation PPPoE Service Type N A My Login My Password Retype to Confrirn A ree Idle Timeout 100 IP Address Assignment
81. communication 3 3 1 Basic WEP Security Choose Basic WEP to setup WEP Encryption parameters 63 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 21 Basic WEP Security STEP STEP 23 STEP 3 ES wireless LAN Use Passphrase to automatically generates a WEP key The higher the WEP Encryption the higher the security but the slower the throughput Select 64 bit WEP 128 bit WEP or 256 bit WEP to enable data encryption and select one of the Key radio buttons to use as the WEP key Entering manual key in Key field and selecting ASCII or Hex WEP key input method WEP Encryption Bd bit WEP e 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASEH characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 176 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCH characters or 36 hexadecimal characters 0 97 A F for each Keyf 1 4 2 56 bit WEP enter 79 ASCH characters or 56 hexadecinval characters 0 9 A F 3 for each Key 1 41 Seleclone WEP key s an active key to enceyptwireless data transmission ASCH S Hex ry EE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic WEP Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Passphrase Type a Passphrase up to 32 printable characters and click Generate The Prestige automatically generates a WEP key WEP Select 64 bit WEP 128 bit WEP or 256 bit WEP to allow data encryption Encryption ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as the
82. configured to 0 0 0 0 In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Enter a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router Remote Address End When the remote IP address is a single address type it a second time here When the remote IP address is a range enter the end static IP address ina range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the remote IP address is a subnet address enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Table 73 Advanced Rule Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote Port Start 0 is the default and signifies any port Type a port number from 0 to 65535 Some of the most common IP ports are 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POP3 Remote Port End Enter a port number in this field to define a port range This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field or equal to it for configuring an individual port My IP Address Enter the WAN IP address of your Prestige The Prestige uses its current WAN IP address static or dynamic in setting up the VPN t
83. est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Certifications Go to www zyxel com 1 Select your product from the drop down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 2 Select the certification you wish to view from this page 3 Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement P 335 Series User s Guide Safety Warnings For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions e To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord e Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel can service the device Please contact your vendor for further information e Use ONLY the dedicated power supply for your device Connect the power cord or power adaptor to the right supply voltage 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe e Do NOT use the device if the power supply is damaged as it might cause electrocution e Ifthe power supply is damaged remove it from the power outlet e Do NOT attempt to repair the power supply Contact your local vendor to order a new power supply e Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord and do NOT locate the product where anyone can walk on the power cord e If you wall mount your device
84. factory defaults to your Prestige Restart This screen allows you to reboot the Prestige without turning the power off 2 4 2 Summary Any IP Table Click the Any IP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen The Any IP table shows current read only information including the IP address and the MAC address of all network devices that use the Any IP feature to communicate with the Prestige Figure 9 Summary Any IP Table Any IP TABLE Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Summary Any IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays the index number IP Address This field displays the IP address of the network device MAC Address This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of the computer with the displayed IP address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Click Refresh to update this screen Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 54 P 335 Series User s Guide 2 4 3 Summary DHCP Table DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the Prestige provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disable
85. figure illustrates the logic flow when executing a filter rule See also Figure 201 for the logic flow when executing an IP filter 333 Chapter 34 Filter Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 197 Filter Rule Process Packet into Fetch First i EE Filter Set Fetch Hext Fetch First Fitter Set i Filter Rule i Fetch Next Fitter Rule ext Filter Ge a Available Available Execute Filter Rule Forward Drop Packet Accept Packet You can apply up to four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for a single port 34 2 Configuring a Filter Set The Prestige includes filtering for NetBIOS over TCP IP packets by default To configure another filter set follow the procedure below 1 Enter 21 in the main menu to open menu 21 Chapter 34 Filter Configuration 334 P 335 Series User s Guide 335 Figure 198 Menu 21 Filter and Firewall Setup Menu 21 Filter and Firewall Setup Le Fidter Setup 2 Firewall Setup Enter Menu Selection Number 2 Enter 1 to bring up the following menu Figure 199 Menu 21 1 Filter Set Configuration Menu 21L FILter Set Configuration Filter Filter Comments Comments Enter Filter Set Number to Configure 0 Edit Comments N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 3 Select the filter set you wish to configure 1 12 and press ENTER 4 E
86. for recognition of the associated printer on the print server network This name is displayed on a computer on the print server network when a print job is executed Print Model Name This displays the model name of the printer currently associated to the Prestige print server Print Port Status This field displays the print server status on the Prestige Ready The print server has established a TCP IP connection with a printer is online and ready to print Printing A computer on the print server network is executed a print job PaperOut The printer loading tray has no paper to perform the printing job Offline The computers in the print server network cannot use the print server See the Appendix for troubleshooting the Print Port Status Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to configure the Print Device Name afresh Chapter 19 Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 20 System This chapter provides information on the System screens 20 1 System Overview See the Wizard Setup chapter for more information on the next few screens 20 2 General Screen Click the System link under Maintenance and the General tab The following screen displays Figure 129 General System Setup System Name p 335P 335WT Domain Name fzyxel com tw Administrator Inactivity Timer minutes 0 means no timeout Password Setup Old Password ken New Password ken Retype to Confirm rae
87. how to configure your wired Local Area Network LAN settings 26 1 LAN Setup This section describes how to configure the Ethernet using Menu 3 LAN Setup From the main menu enter 3 to display menu 3 Figure 149 Menu 3 LAN Setup Menu 3 LAN Setup 1 LAN Port Filter Setup 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup Enter Menu Selection Number 26 1 1 General Ethernet Setup This menu allows you to specify filter set s that you wish to apply to the Ethernet traffic You seldom need to filter Ethernet traffic however the filter sets may be useful to block certain packets reduce traffic and prevent security breaches Figure 150 Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup Input Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel If you need to define filters please read the Filter Set Configuration chapter first then return to this menu to define the filter sets Chapter 26 Menu 3 LAN Setup 2 2 P 335 Series User s Guide 26 2 Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup Depending on the protocols for your applications you need to configure the respective Ethernet Setup as outlined below e For TCP IP Ethernet setup refer to the Internet Access Application chapter e For bridging Ethernet setup refer to the Bridging Setup chapter 26 3 TCP IP Ethernet Setup and DHCP Use menu 3 2 to configure your Prestige fo
88. its various applications Note Use the web configurator System Management Terminal SMT or command interpreter interface to configure your Prestige Not all features can be configured through all interfaces Some parts of this manual relate to the Wireless Firewall Router This manual may refer to the P 335 P 335WT Firewall Router with Print Server or 802 11g Wireless Firewall Router with Print Server as the Prestige Note Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products About This User s Guide This User s Guide is designed to guide you through the configuration of your Prestige using the web configurator or the SMT The web configurator parts of this guide contain background information on features configurable by web configurator The SMT parts of this guide contain background information solely on features not configurable by web configurator Note Use the web configurator System Management Terminal SMT or command interpreter interface to configure your Prestige Not all features can be configured through all interfaces Related Documentation Preface e Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents e Compact Guide The Compact Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away They contain connection information and instructions on getting started e Web Conf
89. network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main difference between them is the format Daytime RFC 867 format is day month year time zone of the server Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 The default NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 Select None to enter the time and date manually Enter the IP address or URL up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Current Time This field displays the time of your Prestige Each time you reload this page the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server When you select None in the Time Protocol field enter the new time in this field and then click Apply Current Date This field displays the date of your Prestige Each time you reload this page the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server New Date This field displays the last updated date from the time server When you select None in the Time Protocol field enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Savi
90. next Chapter 13 VPN Screens 182 P 335 Series User s Guide 183 Figure 92 Rule Setup Rule Setup Property Active IPSec Keying Mode Protocol Number DNS Server for IPSec VPN Local Policy Local Address Local Port Start Local Port End Remote Policy Remote Address Start Remote Address End Mask Remote Port Start Remote Port End Gateway Address My IP Address Secure Gateway IP Address IPSec Property SPI Encapsulation Mode Enable Replay Detection IPSec Protocol Encryption Algorithm Encryption Key Authentication Algorithm Authentication Key with Manual Key Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Rule Setup with Manual Key LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate this VPN policy Select IKE or Manual from the drop down list box Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using IKE key management Enter 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP 17 for UDP etc 0 is the default and signifies any protocol The Local IP address must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec IPSec Keying Mode Protocol Number Local Address Local Port Start Local Port End router s configured remote IP addresses Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time
91. of Printers you can insert the printer driver disk click Have Disk and install the new printer driver 20 Click Next to continue 425 Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 274 Add Printer Screen Add Printer Wizard Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer to use Select the manufacturer and model of your printer Ir your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk Ir your printer is not listed consult pour printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers Colonage Epson Stylus Pro ESC F 2 Compaq Epson Stylus Pro XL ESC P 2 Dataproducts Epson Stylus Pro al ESC P 2 Don Epson T 1000 Digital Epson T 750 Epson EPSON Stylus E Emke Windows Update Have Disk lt Back Cancel 21 If the following screen displays select Keep existing driver radio button if you already have a printer driver installed on your computer and you do not want to change it 22 Click Next to continue Figure 275 Use Existing Driver Screen Add Printer Wizard Use Existing Driver driver is already installed for this printer Tou can use or replace the existing driver EPSON Stylus CDU Do vou want to keep the existing diver or use the new one Ce Keep existing driver recommended C Replace existing driver z Back Cancel 23 Type a name to identify the printer and then click Next to continue Appendix D Prin
92. or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 21 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IPSEC_TUNNEL AH 0 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service IPSEC TUNNEL ESP 0 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol MULTICAST IGMP 0 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 104 P 335 Series User s
93. or Server End This is the ending inside global IP address IGA This field is N A for One to One Many to One and Server types When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel and go back to the previous screen Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT 302 P 335 Series User s Guide 30 4 Configuring a Server behind NAT Follow these steps to configure a server behind NAT 1 Enter 15 in the main menu to go to Menu 15 NAT Setup 2 Enter 2 to display Menu 15 2 NAT Server Setup as shown next Figure 173 Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup Menu 15 2 NAT Server Setup Rule Start Port No End Port No IP Address EN Default Default Ors 000 2 21 25 192 168 1 33 3 O O LG 4 O O 0 0 0 0 J O O 0 0 0 0 6 O O 0 0 0 0 7 O O 0 0 0 0 8 O O Oe Os ESA Ds O O 0 0 0 0 LOS O O 0 0 0 0 11 O O eee Onn 12 O O 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 3 Enter a port number in an unused Start Port No field To forward only one port enter it again in the End Port No field To specify a range of ports enter the last port to be forwarded in the End Port No field 4 Enter the inside IP address of the server in the IP Address field In the following figure you have a computer acting as an FTP Telnet and SMTP server ports 21 23 and 25 at 192 168 1 33 5 Press ENTER at the Press ENTER to confirm p
94. over Ethernet choice is for a dial up connection using PPPoE The Prestige supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem i e xDSL cable wireless etc connection Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both the end user and ISP carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the router rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the router does that part of the task Further with NAT all of the LAN s computers will have access Service Name Type the PPPoE service name provided to you PPPoE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server User Name Type the User Name given to you by your ISP Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered it correctly Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out Connection Password Type the password associated with the User Name above Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the from ISP default selection 113 Chapter 6 WAN
95. policy index number This field displays whether the VPN policy is active or not The icon is turned on when this VPN policy is active Click the edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the Rule Setup screen to activate the VPN policy Clear the checkbox to dieactivate this VPN policy without having to delete the entry Local Addr This is the IP address of the computer on your local network behind your Prestige Remote Addr This is the IP address es of computer s on the remote network behind the remote IPSec router A single static IP address is displayed when the Remote Address Start and Remote Address End Mask fields in the Rule Setup IKE or Manual screen are both configured to the same IP address The beginning and ending static IP addresses in a range of computers are displayed when the Remote Address Start and Remote Address End Mask fields in the Rule Setup IKE or Manual screen are configured for a range of IP addresses A static IP address and a subnet mask are displayed when the Remote Address Start and Remote Address End Mask fields in the Rule Setup IKE or Manual screen are configured for a subnet This field displays 0 0 0 0 when the Secure Gateway Address field is set to 0 0 0 0 In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode Tunnel is the default selection Algorithm This field displays the security protocols used for an SA Both
96. ppp idle dial starting to trigger a call and drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE Encapsulation IP Address The IP address of the port listed on the left IP Mask The IP mask of the port listed on the left DHCP The DHCP setting of the port listed on the left System up Time The total time the Prestige has been on Ethernet Address The Ethernet address of the port listed on the left Name This is the Prestige s system name domain name assigned in menu 1 For example System Name xxx Domain Name baboo mickey com Name xxx baboo mickey com Routing Refers to the routing protocol used Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis P 335 Series User s Guide Table 141 System Maintenance Status Menu Fields DESCRIPTION ZyNOS F W Version The ZyNOS Firmware version and the date created You may enter 1 to drop the WAN connection 9 to reset the counters or ESC to return to menu 24 36 2 System Information To get to the System Information 1 Enter 24 to display Menu 24 System Information and Console Port Speed 2 Enter 2 to display Menu 24 2 System Information 3 From this menu you have two choices as shown in the next figure Figure 213 Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed System Information Console Port Speed Please enter selection 36 2 1 System Information Enter 1 in menu 24 2 to display the screen shown ne
97. presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 Appendix Wireless LANs P 335 Series User s Guide PEAP Protected EAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP LEAP Lightw
98. remote router Network Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet protocol Address address used within one network for example a private IP address used in a local Translation network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Internet Choose None to disable NAT Choose SUA Only if you have a single public IP address SUA Single User Account is a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public IP addresses Full Feature mapping types include One to One Many to One SUA PAT Many to Many Overload Many One to One and Server When you select Full Feature you must configure at least one address mapping set See the NAT chapter for a full discussion on this feature Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Table 120 Remote Node Network Layer Options FIELD DESCRIPTION Metric Enter a number from 1 to 15 to set this route s priority among the Prestige s routes see the Metric section in the WAN and Dial Backup Setup chapter The smaller the number the higher priority the route has Private This field is valid only for PPTP PPPoE encapsulation This parameter determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts If set to Yes this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast If No the route t
99. router uses multicasting then all routers on your network must use multicasting also By default RIP RIP Direction RIP Routing Information Protocol RFC1058 and RFC 1389 allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets Select the RIP direction from Both In Only Out Only None When set to Both or Out Only the Prestige will broadcast its routing table periodically When set to Both or In Only it will incorporate the RIP information that it receives when set to None it will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received direction is set to Both and the Version set to RIP 1 117 Chapter 6 WAN P 335 Series User s Guide Table 47 Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select IGMP V 1 or IGMP V 2 or None IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up servi
100. rules are used to filter IP packets while generic filter rules allow TCP IP Filter filtering of non IP packets Rule Select Yes to turn on the filter rule or No to turn it off Offset Enter the starting byte of the data portion in the packet that you wish 0 255 to compare The range for this field is from 0 to 255 Length Enter the byte count of the data portion in the packet that you wish to compare The range for this field is 0 to 8 Mask Enter the mask in Hexadecimal notation to apply to the data portion before comparison Enter the value in Hexadecimal notation to compare with the data NE portion More If Yes a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an action is taken else the packet is disposed of according to the action fields If More is Yes then Action Matched and Action Not Matched will be No Log Select the logging option from the following None No packets will be logged Action Matched Action Matched Only packets that match the rule parameters will Action Not be logged Matched Action Not Matched Only packets that do not match the rule Both parameters will be logged Both All packets will be logged Chapter 34 Filter Configuration 340 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 137 Generic Filter Rule Menu Fields DESCRIPTION Action Select the action for a packet matching the rule Check Next Rule Matched Forward Drop Action Not Select the action for a packet not matching the
101. s Guide Figure 254 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Welcome Network Print Server Setup Wizard LyX Ei Welcome to the Network Print Server Setup Wizard Welcome This Wizard guides you through the installation of the network print server that is connected to the local area network on this computer elect Print Server Change Settings Contigure Wireless Before you proceed make sure the print server and the printer are Configure TOPP properly connected and turned on Save Settings Select Printer z To continue click Next Summary complete Version 0 94 12 lt Back Cancel 4 The Select A Print Server screen displays The wizard automatically detects whether or not a print server is connected to your computer Make sure that your Prestige is correctly connected and a compatible USB printer is connected to the Prestige Highlight the print server and click Next to continue Appendix D Print Server 414 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 255 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Select A Print Server Network Print Server Setup Wizard T welkome This Wizard has found the following print servers on the network Select a print server that you want to set up from the list Select Print Server Detected print servers on your local network Ed ess IP Address MAC Address Fart Status Contigure TOR IP PrintServer 192 168 1 1 OOADCS 01 23 1 Off Line Save Settngs Seleet Potter Sum
102. s port triggering settings Security Firewall General Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall Services This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules and allows you to edit add a firewall rule Content Filter Filter Use this screen to block sites containing certain keywords in the URL and set the days and times for the Prestige to perform content filtering VPN Summary Use this screen to view the rule summary Rule Setup SA Monitor Global Setting Use this screen to configure VPN connections Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections Use this screen to allow NetBIOS through an IPSec tunnel TMSS General Use this screen to enable or disable TMSS Exception List Use this screen to decide which computers in the network you can apply TMSS Use this screen to check the computers in the network for Trend Micro Internet Security Virus Protection Parental Control Use this screen to allow a parent LAN administrator to control a LAN user s Internet access privileges by blocking specified website categories egenen Static Route Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes Rules Bandwidth Configuration Use this screen to enable bandwidth management on an interface and edit MGMT a corresponding rule Use this screen to view the Prestige s bandwidth usage and allotments Remote MGMT WWW Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP
103. section display in the drop down list box Select a category of logs to view select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page Time This field displays the time the log was recorded See the chapter on system maintenance and information to configure the Prestige s time and date This field states the reason for the log This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet This field displays additional information about the log entry Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e mail address specified in the Log Settings page make sure that you have first filled in the Address Info fields in Log Settings Click Refresh to renew the log screen Clear Log Click Clear Log to delete all the logs 21 2 Log Settings You can configure the Prestige s general log settings in one location Click the Logs link under Maintenance in the navigation panel and the Log Settings tab to open the Log Settings screen 249 Chapter 21 Logs P 335 Series User s Guide Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the Prestige 1s to send logs the schedule for when the Prestige is to send the logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the Prestige to send An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system e
104. software restart The SYS or PWR LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful Wait a minute before logging into the device again Restart Chapter 22 Tools 258 P 335 Series User s Guide 259 Chapter 22 Tools P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 23 Introducing the SMT This chapter explains how to access and navigate the System Management Terminal and gives an overview of its menus 23 1 SMT Introduction The Prestige s SMT System Management Terminal is a menu driven interface that you can access from a terminal emulator through the console port or over a telnet connection This chapter shows you how to access the SMT System Management Terminal menus via console port how to navigate the SMT and how to configure SMT menus 23 1 1 Procedure for SMT Configuration via Telnet The following procedure details how to telnet into your Prestige 1 In Windows click Start usually in the bottom left corner Run and then type telnet 192 168 1 1 the default IP address and click OK 2 Enter 1234 in the Password field 3 After entering the password you will see the main menu Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes default timeout period after you log in your Prestige will automatically log you out You will then have to telnet into the Prestige again 23 1 2 Entering Password The login screen appears after you press ENTER prompting
105. static route is active Click the Edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the Static Route Setup screen to enable the static route Clear the checkbox to disable this static route without having to delete the entry Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Prestige that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Prestige over the WAN the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes Modify Click the Edit icon to open the static route setup screen Modify a static route or create a new static route in the Static Route Setup screen Click the Remove icon to delete a static route 15 2 1 Static Route Setup Screen To edit a static route click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Fill in the required information for each static route 203 Chapter 15 Static Route Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 111 Static Route Setup Static Route Setup Route Name I Active l Private Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Metric Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Static Route Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the name of the IP stat
106. syslog program for more details When finished configuring this screen press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel Your Prestige sends five types of syslog messages Some examples not all Prestige specific of these syslog messages with their message formats are shown next Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis 354 P 335 Series User s Guide 36 3 1 1 CDR CDR Message Format pdemdsys logsend SYSLOG CDR oY SLOG INFO String String board xx line xx channel xx Call Xx Str board the hardware board ID line the WAN ID in a board Channel channel ID within the WAN call the call reference number which starts from 1 and increments by 1 for each new call str CO1 Outgoing Call dev xx ch xx dev device No ch channel No CO1 Incoming Call xxxxBps xxxxx L2TP xxxxx Remote Call ID COL Incoming Call Xxxx Connected speed Xxxxx Remote Call ID LO2 Tunnel Connected L2TP C02 OutCall Connected xxxx connected speed xxxxx Remote Call ID C02 GLID call refused LO2 Call Terminated C02 Call Terminated Jul 19 11 19 27 192 168 102 2 AXEL board 0 Lines 0 Gh nnel 0 call 1 COl Outgoing Call dev 2 ch 0 40002 Jul 19 11 19 32 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 1 C02 OutCall Connected 64000 40002 Jul 19 11 20 06 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 1 C02 Call Terminated 36 3 1 2 Packet triggered Packet triggered Message Format sdemdsystogsend SYSL
107. that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the IP Address field If you select User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you save your changes If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you save your changes Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a system DNS server you must use IP addresses when configuring VPN DDNS and the time server Edit Dynamic DNS Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes or No default Select Yes to configure Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS discussed next When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 267 Chapter 24 Menu 1 General Setup P 335 Series User s Guide 24 2 1 Procedure to Configure Dynamic DNS Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS To configure Dynamic DNS go to Menu 1 General Setup and select Yes in the Edit Dynamic DNS field Press ENTER to display Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS as shown next Figure 147 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS Service Provider WWW DynDNS ORG Active Yes DDNSType DynamicDNS Hostl Host2 Host3 USE
108. the User s Guide for details about the firewall default policies You may define additional Policy rules or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so Active No You can use the Web Configurator to configure the firewall Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Note Use the web configurator or the command interpreter to configure the firewall rules 315 Chapter 31 Enabling the Firewall P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 32 VPN IPSec Setup This chapter introduces the VPN SMT menus 32 1 VPN IPSec Overview The VPN IPSec main SMT menu has these main submenus 1 Define VPN policies in menu 27 1 submenus including security policies endpoint IP addresses peer IPSec router IP address and key management 2 Menu 27 2 SA Monitor allows you to manage refresh or disconnect your SA connections This is an overview of the VPN menu tree Figure 189 VPN SMT Menu Tree Menu 27 VPN IPSec Setup gt Wi _ 1 Menu 27 1 Menu 27 1 1 Menu 27 1 1 2 IPSec IPSec Setup Manual Setup Summary Key Management Manage Menu 27 2 VPN SAS SA Monitor From the main menu enter 27 to display the first VPN menu shown next Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup 316 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 190 Menu 27 VPN IPSec Setup Menu 27 VPN IPSec Setup 1 IPSec Summary 2 SA Monitor Enter Menu Selection Number 32 2 IPSec Summary Screen Type 1 in menu 27 and then press ENTER to display Menu
109. the labels in this tab Note When there is outbound traffic but no inbound traffic the SA times out automatically after two minutes A tunnel with no outbound or inbound traffic is idle and does not timeout until the SA lifetime period expires See the Keep Alive section to have the Prestige renegotiate an IPSec SA when the SA lifetime expires even if there is no traffic 185 Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 93 SA Monitor SA Monitor Security Associations Table Current IPSec Security Associations Encapsulation Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 SA Monitor IPSec Algorithm This field displays the security protocols used for an SA Both AH and ESP increase Prestige processing requirements and communications latency delay Previous Page Click Previous Page to view more items in the summary If applicable Refresh Click Refresh to display the current active VPN connection s Next Page Click Next Page to view more items in the summary If applicable 13 16 Global Setting Screen To change your Prestige s global settings click the VPN link under Security and the Global Setting tab The screen appears as shown Chapter 13 VPN Screens 186 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 94 Global Setting Global Setting Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP IV Allow Through IPSec Tunnel Apply Reset The following table des
110. the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses When you select DNS or E mail in the Local ID Type field type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify this Prestige in the local Content field Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Type the WAN IP address or the URL up to 31 characters of the IPSec router with which you re making the VPN connection Set this field to 0 0 0 0 if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic WAN IP address the IPSec Keying Mode field must be set to IKE The remote address fields do not apply when the Secure Gateway Address field is configured to 0 0 0 0 In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Table 72 Rule Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Peer ID Type Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name Select E mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e mail address Peer Content The configuration of the peer content depends on the peer ID type For IP type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection If you configure this field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank the Presti
111. the server side With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service coming in from the server on the WAN to the IP address of a computer on the client side LAN The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer you have to manually replace the LAN computer s IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer s IP address Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service The Prestige records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol a trigger port When the Prestige s WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol incoming port the Prestige forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request After that computer s connection for that service closes another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application 9 6 1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example The following is an example of trigger port forwarding Figure 74 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example EG Jane s computer Internet mA Real Audio server 1 Jane requests a file from the Real Au
112. the timeout period in the System screen 17 2 WWW Screen To change your Prestige s World Wide Web settings click the Remote MGMT link under Management to display the WWW screen Figure 119 WWW Remote Management Server Port Server Access Secured Client IP Address all C Selected 0 0 0 0 Si Note 1 For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 WWW Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the Prestige using this service 219 Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Table 89 WWW Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Prestige using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the Prestige using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the Prestige using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 3 Telnet You can configure yo
113. the wireless stations must have the same SSID to allow roaming Port Enter the port number to communicate roaming information between APs The port number must be the same on all APs The default is 3517 Make sure this port is not used by other services Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Enter a value between 0 and 2432 If you select the G Enhanced checkbox a value Threshold of 4096 is displayed Fragmentation It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter a value between 256 and 2432 If you select the G Enhanced checkbox a value of 4096 is displayed Threshold Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop down list menu Choices are Long Short or Dynamic The default setting is Long See the section on preamble for more information 802 11 Mode Select 802 11b Only to allow only IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Prestige Select 802 119 Only to allow only IEEE 802 119 compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Prestige Select Mixed to allow either IEEE802 11b or IEEE802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Prestige The transmission rate of your Prestige might be reduced G Enhanced Select G Enhanced checkbox to allow any ZyXEL WLAN devices that support this feature to associate with the Prestige at higher transmission speeds This permits the Prestige to transmit at a higher speed than the 802 11g Only mode Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige
114. this case suppose that all of the rules except for the administration rule need more bandwidth e Each rule gets up to its budgeted bandwidth The administration rule only uses 32 Kbps of its budgeted 64 Kbps e Sales and Marketing are first to get extra bandwidth because they have the highest priority If they each require 48 Kbps or more of extra bandwidth the Prestige divides the total 96 Kbps total of unbudgeted and unused bandwidth equally between the sales and marketing departments 48 Kbps extra to each for a total of 112 Kbps for each because they both have the highest priority level e R amp D requires more bandwidth but only gets its budgeted 64 Kbps because all of the unbudgeted and unused bandwidth goes to the higher priority sales and marketing rules e The Prestige does not send any traffic that is not defined in the bandwidth filters because all of the unbudgeted bandwidth goes to the rules that need it 209 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 116 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example Bandwidth Budget 320 Kbps Administration 32 Kbps Priority Low Sales 112 Kbps Priority High Marketing 112 Kbps Priority High R amp D 64 Kbps Priority Mid 16 1 5 Bandwidth Management Priorities The following table describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the Prestige forwards out through an interface Table 85 Bandwidth Management Priorities PRIORITY LEVELS TRAFFIC WI
115. time interval is 3600 seconds or 1 hour The WPA Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA key management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN ona periodic basis Setting of the WPA Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK mode The Prestige default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 4 7 Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide The Funk Software s Odyssey client is bundled free at the time of writing with the Prestige client adaptor s This adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client 5 4 8 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example You need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distr
116. to an IP or IPX packet You specify the portion of the packet to check with the Offset from 0 and the Length fields both in bytes The Prestige applies the Mask bit wise ANDing to the data portion before comparing the result against the Value to determine a match The Mask and Value are specified in hexadecimal numbers Note that it takes two hexadecimal digits to represent a byte so if the length is 4 the value in either field will take 8 digits for example FFFFFFFF To configure a generic rule select Generic Filter Rule in the Filter Type field in menu 21 1 4 1 and press ENTER to open Generic Filter Rule as shown below 339 Chapter 34 Filter Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 202 Menu 21 1 4 1 Generic Filter Rule Menu 21 1 4 1 Generic Filter Rule Filter 4 1 Filter Type Generic Filter Rule Active No Offset 0 Length 0 Mask N A Value N A More No Log None Action Matched Check Next Rule Action Not Matched Check Next Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in the Generic Filter Rule menu Table 137 Generic Filter Rule Menu Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION OPTIONS Filter This is the filter set filter rule co ordinates i e 2 3 refers to the second filter set and the third rule of that set Filter Type Use SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select a rule type Generic Filter Parameters displayed below each type will be different TCP IP filter Rule
117. to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 129 Chapter 7 LAN P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 8 DHCP Server 8 1 DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the Prestige provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 8 2 DHCP Screen Click the DHCP Server link under Network and the General tab The following screen displays Figure 65 General General DHCP Setup IV Enable DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Pool Sizef32 DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server First DNS Server From ISP wooo o Second DNS Server From ISP v 10 0 0 Third DNS Server From ISP sl 000 Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DHCP Server DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at startup from a server Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise Clear it to disable the Prestige acting as a DHCP server When config
118. users access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users 67 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber s site By implementing PPPoE directly on the Prestige rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the Prestige does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LAN s computers will have Internet access Refer to the appendix for more information on PPPoE Figure 26 PPPoE Connection Type Es Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type PPP over Ethernet Service Name optional User Name Password The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 PPPoE Connection Type LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameter for Internet Access Service Name Type the name of your service provider 3 4 3 PPTP Connection Type Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtu
119. users to configure the WAN port s MAC Address address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Clear the check box to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the Click Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP computer s MAC address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is address successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file Z NOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 5 Advanced WAN Screen To change your Prestige s advanced WAN settings click the WAN link under Network and the Advanced tab The screen appears as shown Chapter 6 WAN 116 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 57 Advanced Advanced DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP sl 10 0 0 Second DNS Server From ISP ll 10 0 0 Third DNS Server From ISP si 10 0 0 RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction None D RIP Version RIP 1 Multicast None v Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP Allow between LAN and WAN You also need to create a firewall rule Allow Trigger Dial Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION DNS Servers First DNS Server Select From ISP
120. web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 138 P 335 Series User s Guide In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server If the default is not defined the service request is simply discarded Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FIP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on SUA NAT Table 57 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER HTTP Hyper Tot Transter protocol or www web e0 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 9 3 3 Configuring Servers Behind SUA Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a defa
121. with other wireless stations on the network and vice versa Appendix Wireless LANs P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 308 Roaming Example A i i A LU LU LU U 1 I F 8 I Fi The steps below describe the roaming process 1 As wireless station Y moves from the coverage area of access point P1 to that of access point 2 P2 it scans and uses the signal of access point P2 3 Access point P2 acknowledges the presence of wireless station Y and relays this information to access point P1 through the wired LAN 4 Access point P1 updates the new position of wireless station 5 Wireless station Y sends a request to access point P2 for re authentication Requirements for Roaming The following requirements must be met in order for wireless stations to roam between the coverage areas 1 All the access points must be on the same subnet and configured with the same ESSID 2 If IEEE 802 1x user authentication is enabled and to be done locally on the access point the new access point must have the user profile for the wireless station 3 The adjacent access points should use different radio channels when their coverage areas overlap 4 All access points must use the same port number to relay roaming information The access points must be connected to the Ethernet and be able to get IP addresses from a DHCP server if using dynamic IP address assignment Appendix Wireless LANs 468 P 335 Series User s Gui
122. you to enter the password as shown next For your first login enter the default password 1234 As you type the password the screen displays an asterisk for each character you type Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes after you log in your Prestige will automatically log you out Chapter 23 Introducing the SMT 260 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 143 Login Screen 23 1 3 Prestige SMT Menu Overview The following figure gives you an overview of the various SMT menu screens of your Prestige The following table gives you an overview of your Prestige s various SMT menus Table 105 SMT Menus Overview MENUS SUB MENUS Toese V1 Conigure DynamicONS J Bwanescupseup pp 82 TCPIP and DHCP Seup 3211P AlasSeup a 3 5 Wireless LAN Setup 3 5 1 WLAN MAC Address yy Filter 11 Remote Node Setup 11 1 Remote Node Profile HE es 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options 12 Static Routing Setup 12 1 Edit Static Route Setup 15 NAT Setup 15 1 Address Mapping Sets ER 1 1 Address Mapping Rules AU 1 1 x Address Rule 15 2 NAT Server Sets 15 2 x NAT Server Setup 15 3 Trigger Port Sets 15 3 x Trigger Port Setup 21 1 x 1 Generic Filter Rule 21 1 x 1 TCP IP Filter Rule DEER am eer EE E mace OO 21 Filter and Firewall Rule Setup 21 1 Filter Setup 21 1 1 Filter Rules Summary 261 Chapter 23 Introducing the SMT P 335 Series User s Guide T
123. you want to setup from menu 26 1 12 and press ENTER to see Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup as shown next Figure 236 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup Active Yes Start Date yyyy mm dd 2000 01 O1 How Often Once Once Date yyyy mm dd 2000 01 01 Weekdays Sunday N A Monday N A Tuesday N A Wednesday N A Thursday N A Friday N A Saturday N A Start Time hh mm 00 00 Duration hh mm 00 OO Action Forced On Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel If a connection has been already established your Prestige will not drop it Once the connection is dropped manually or it times out then that remote node can t be triggered up until the end of the Duration Table 152 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Active Press SPACE BAR to select Yes or No Choose Yes and press ENTER to activate the schedule set Start Date Enter the start date when you wish the set to take effect in year month date format Valid dates are from the present to 2036 February 5 How Often Should this schedule set recur weekly or be used just once only Press the SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Once or Weekly Both these options are mutually exclusive If Once is selected then all weekday settings are N A When Once is selected the schedule rule deletes automatically after the scheduled time elapses Once If you selected Once in the How Often field above then ente
124. 0 Outgoing Period hr 0 My Login Schedules My Password EE Nailed Up Connection No Retype to Confirn Sr Authen CHAP PAP PPTP Session Options My IP Addr Edit Filter Sets No My IP Mask Idle Timeout sec 100 Server IP Addr Connection ID Name Edit Traffic Redirect No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The next table shows how to configure fields in menu 11 1 not previously discussed Table 119 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for PPTP Encapsulation Encapsulation Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select PPTP You must also go to menu 11 3 to check the IP Address setting once you have selected the encapsulation method My IP Addr Enter the IP address of the WAN Ethernet port My IP Mask Enter the subnet mask of the WAN Ethernet port Server IP Addr Enter the IP address of the ANT modem Connection ID Enter the connection ID or connection name in the ANT It must follow the c id and Name n name format This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your DSL modem 28 3 Edit IP Move the cursor to the Edit IP field in menu 11 1 then press SPACE BAR to select Yes Press ENTER to open Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration 288 P 335 Series User s Guide 289 Figure 160 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options for Ethernet Encapsulation Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Address Assignment Dynamic IP
125. 02 111 standard WPA 2 IEEE 802 111 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA 2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication Antenna The Prestige is equipped with a 2dBi fixed antenna to provide clear radio signal between the wireless stations and the access points Wireless LAN MAC Address Filtering Your Prestige can check the MAC addresses of wireless stations against a list of allowed or denied MAC addresses WEP Encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encrypts data frames before transmitting over the wireless network to help keep network communications private OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology OTIST allows your Prestige to assign its ESSID and security settings WEP or WPA PSK to the ZyXEL wireless adapters that support OTIST and are within transmission range The ZyXEL wireless adapters must also have OTIST enabled 43 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige P 335 Series User s Guide G Plus G plus is an enhancement to the IEEE 802 11g wireless standard It increases wireless transmission speeds by allowing larger frames to be sent Wireless List With the Wireless List you can see the list of the wireless stations that are currently using the Prestige to access your wired network Wireless LAN Channel Usage The Wireless Channel Usage displays whether the radio channels are
126. 37 Many to One 137 Materials 5 Merchantability 5 Message Logging 354 Metric 110 204 290 295 Modifications 3 Multicast 118 123 128 274 290 My IP Addr 288 My Login 285 My Login Name 279 480 P 335 Series User s Guide My Password 279 285 My Server IP Addr 288 N Nailed Up Connection 287 Nailed up Connection 287 NAT 138 139 289 343 Applying NAT in the SMT Menus 296 Configuring 298 Definitions 134 Examples 304 How NAT Works 135 Mapping Types 136 Non NAT Friendly Application Programs 310 Ordering Rules 301 Server Sets 138 What NAT does 135 Navigation Panel 52 Network Address Translation NAT 296 Network Management 139 New 5 NNTP 139 North America 4 North America Contact Information 6 Norway Contact Information 6 O One to One 137 Opening 4 Operating Condition 5 OTIST 98 OTIST Wizard 65 Out dated Warranty 5 Outlet 3 Outside 134 P Packet statistics 57 Parental Control Statistics Summary 55 Parts 5 Password 260 265 279 347 Patent 2 Period hr 287 481 Permission 2 Photocopying 2 Ping 359 Pipes 4 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 114 139 Pool 4 POP3 139 Port Numbers 139 Postage Prepaid 5 Power Adaptor 4 Power Cord 4 Power Outlet 4 Power Supply 4 Power Supply repair 4 PPPoE 406 PPPoE Encapsulation 282 284 287 PPTP 139 Preamble Mode 460 Priorities 103 210 Private 204 290 295 Product Model 6 Product Page 3 Product Serial Number 6
127. 39 Appendix E Print Server Specifications P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix F NetBIOS Filter Commands The following describes the NetBIOS packet filter commands Introduction NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls You can configure NetBIOS filters to do the following e Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN e Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets through VPN connections e Allow or disallow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls Display NetBIOS Filter Settings sys filter netbios disp This command gives a read only list of the current NetBIOS filter modes for The Prestige NetBIOS Display Filter Settings Command Example NetBIOS Filter Status Between LAN and WAN Block Between LAN and DMZ Block Between WAN and DMZ Block IPSec Packets Forward Trigger Dial Disabled Appendix F Print Server Specifications 440 P 335 Series User s Guide The filter types and their default settings are as follows Table 165 NetBIOS Filter Default Settings NAME DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE Between LAN This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are blocked or forwarded Block and WAN between the LAN and the WAN IPSec This field displays whether NetBIOS packets sent thro
128. 4 5 Service Name 287 Service Personnel 4 Service Set 85 Service Type 279 285 391 Services 138 139 148 Session Initated Protocol 211 setup a schedule 387 Shipping 5 Shock Electric 4 SIP 211 SMT Menu Overview 261 SMTP 139 SNMP 139 147 222 Community 348 Configuration 347 Get 347 Manager 223 346 MIBs 224 347 Trap 347 Trusted Host 348 Spain Contact Information 6 Stateful Inspection 146 Static DHCP 131 Static Route 202 SUA 138 139 SUA Single User Account 138 Subnet Mask 123 126 274 279 289 295 353 Supply Voltage 4 Support E mail 6 Sweden Contact Information 6 Swimming Pool 4 Syntax Conventions 37 Syslog 354 Syslog IP Address 354 Syslog Server 354 System Console Port Speed 353 Diagnostic 358 Log and Trace 354 Syslog and Accounting 354 System Information 352 System Information 352 System information 61 System Information amp Diagnosis 350 482 P 335 Series User s Guide System Maintenance 249 350 352 359 363 366 371 374 375 376 379 System Name 267 System Timeout 219 T Tampering 5 TCP IP 126 336 337 343 TCP IP filter rule 336 Telecommunication Line Cord 4 Telephone 6 Television Interference 3 Television Reception 3 Telnet 220 TFTP File Transfer 371 TFTP Restrictions 218 365 383 Thunderstorm 4 Time and Date Setting 377 378 379 Time Zone 245 380 Timeout 281 282 287 Trace Records 354 Trademark 2 Trademark Owners 2 Trademarks 2 Tr
129. 4 8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Aesgnment 71 EES SEENEN EE RE EEE EE NER 12 3 4 10 Connection Wizard Complete rrrnnrrrnnrnnnnvnnnrnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnsennn ia Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard nxrnnnnnnannnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennn 76 TN Je 76 4 2 Predefined Media Bandwidth Management Services ccccccccseeeeeeeeseeeeseees 76 4 3 Bandwidth Management Wizard General rrrrrannnnnnnnannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennn 77 4 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard Services ANNE 78 4 5 Bandwidth Management Wizard Priority 78 4 6 Bandwidth Management Wizard Complete cccccecceseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaeees 79 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 333WT ERE 82 STE E EE 82 5 2 Wireless Security Overview 82 Tele 82 PRE Vg EE 82 FN PT EE EE 83 9 44 EE EE 83 EES 83 TNT eege EE 83 9 Table of Contents P 335 Series User s Guide 5 3 Configuring Wireless LAN on the Prestige ccccccssccsseeceeeeceeesseeseeeeneeesaeess 83 5 4 General Wireless LAN Screen rrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnenanennnrnnnnnnnnenanennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnen 84 NT NN e 85 EP eg EE EE ETER ER reer ner ee Set EE 86 5 4 3 WEP Encryption Screen zeien gsie ieete hee DgdheeEN HERE eEegE eet EeN dene 86 5 4 4 Introduction to RE 88 5 4 5 WPA 2 PSK Application Example cccccccceecceeeeseeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeaeesaeeees 88 5 4 6 WPA PSK Authentication Screen rrrnrnrnrrnarnrane
130. 59 Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen If you do not assign a Default Server IP Address the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management Number of an individual SUA server entry Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Table 59 Port Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This icon is turned on when the port forwarding entry is enabled Select the edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the Rule Setup screen to enable the port forwarding entry Clear the checkbox to disable forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry Name This field displays a name to identify this port forwarding rule Start Port This field displays a start port number End Port This field displays an end port number If the same port number as the Start Port is displayed then a single port is forwarded If a different number to the Start Port number is displayed then a range of ports are forwarded Server IP This field displays the inside IP address of the server Address Modify Click the Edit icon to open the address mapping rule screen Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Setup screen Clic
131. 65 TINN EE E 167 Table 69 Local ID Type and Content Fields rrrnnnnannnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnanenannnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnanennnennsene 170 Table 70 Peer ID Type and Content Fields oo cece cece eecsecseeeeeeeeeeseeseetaeeseeeeeeeeeeseees 170 Table 71 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example ccccccceeeeeeeeeeneees 171 ge EO NE ETTE reas eli EEE EE NE EEE ean 172 Table 73 Advanced Rule Setup ENEE 178 Table 74 Rule Setup MN EE 183 NT NG 186 VENN tee 187 Table 77 Telecommuter and Headquarters Configuration Example c ccccseeeeeeeee ees 188 Leite WEE 194 TN NNN br 196 List of Tables P 335 Series User s Guide EE NNN NN 197 Tapo Si Farmal EE REE NE 199 Tobio oc IF Siale ee 203 Tabia Go Slate KOULO SSUP ask 204 Table 84 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example 0 208 Table 85 Bandwidth Management Priorities 20 0 0 cece cccceccceeceecceeeeeeteeeseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 210 Table 86 Commonly Used Services rrrrnrunnannnnnnnnnnnnennnnnernnnrnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnenunnnennnnenunnnnennnene 211 Table 87 Bandwidth Management Configuration 213 Table 88 Bandwidth Management LEE 215 Table 89 WWW Remote Management rrennnnennnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnnennnnennnnennnnennnsennnne 219 Table 90 Telnet Remote Management 221 Table 91 FTP Remote Management EE 222 Table 932 3NMF EEE ERE EN EE 224 Table 93 SNMP Remote Management ic sctndadacdanscanaauorinnsahase
132. 8 ee RE I EEE NE ER 229 Table of Contents 14 P 335 Series User s Guide TEPPE 229 18 4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example rrorernnrnraneranrvannnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 230 18 4 1 Installing UPnP in Windows Me rararennnnnnnnennnennnrnnnnnnanennnennnnnnnnennnennnnnn 231 18 4 2 Installing UPNP in Windows XP Aessen Eege 232 18 5 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example rorernnnnnanenanennnrnnnnnnanrnnnennnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnne 232 18 5 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Devce 234 18 5 2 Web Configurator Easy ACCESS rrrrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnen 235 18 5 3 Web Configurator Easy ACCESS rrrrnnnrrnnnrrnnnnrnnnnennnnennanennnnennnnennnnennere 236 Chapter 19 PINE Seek RE RER ER ET EEE 240 19 1 Frim Server NN eee 240 19 2 Prestige let 240 19 2 1 RMN FONN ae anaana 240 19 3 Prestige Print Server Screen EE 241 Chapter 20 TE 242 EE EEE SEE EE EE EE ae 242 NNN NNN 242 NNN Ge 243 EEE en NERE a 243 20 4 Dynamic DNS Screen EEE 243 20 5 Time Setting Screen iis ined ccasmnacogevadaandncens ianieccansanaedpcsna ces deeg Eegeregie 245 Chapter 21 Eege 248 TT NNN EE 248 ab E in EE 249 Chapter 22 eege 254 FN VEN EE 254 PAA GT eg EEE EE rader 255 GE EE ER ER EN 256 PARR GE EG LE EE EET 256 22 2 3 Back to Factory Defaults cased ncccecisesesnducsnssmignadedineecsddvndasscndvansacendcadewaanes 257 EE EEN 257 Chapter 23 Jee E iere pi E TK E 260 TEN 260 23 1 1 Procedure fo
133. 83 Chapter 40 Gr tege TT ERE EE TE TT 386 40 1 intraoducuon EEN EE 386 Chapter 41 He Te ee EEE 390 41 1 Problems Starting Up the Prestige REENEN 390 41 2 Problems with the LAN RE 390 19 Table of Contents P 335 Series User s Guide DE EE 391 41 4 Problems Accessing the Prestige cccccceseccesscceseeceneeceseeeseesenseeeneeenees 392 41 5 Problems with Restricted Web Pages and Keyword Blocking nann0nn00nn00n 392 41 5 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 0 00n00n000000n 393 41 5 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers rrrrrarernnennnnnnnnnnanenanennnennnnnn 394 ER Se REE EEE 397 AEN E Java Rule un EE 399 41 5 2 ActiveX Controls in Internet Explorer rrrrrnnrnnnrernrrnanernnnnrnnrranrnnnrnnnenn 401 Appendix A FN TE 404 Appendix B EE eege 406 Appendix C FIF ee 408 Appendix D PT GE 412 Appendix E Print Server Specifications EE 434 Appendix F Appendix G Lon DeeS rh We EEE EE EE 442 Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address rr nrrnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnennnennnnnnn 444 Appendix EN RE a eee 456 Appendix J Antenna Selection and Positioning Recommendation sccccsssseeeeeeeees 470 Appendix K Brute Force Password Guessing Protection nnrnnnxnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 472 Appendix L EE Ett 474 Table of Contents 20 P 335 Series User s Guide 21 Table of Contents P 335 Series
134. A Map the third IGA to an inside web server and mail server Four rules need to be configured two bi directional and two unidirectional as follows 1 Map the first IGA to the first inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions 1 1 mapping giving both local and global IP addresses 2 Map the second IGA to our second inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions 1 1 mapping giving both local and global IP addresses 3 Map the other outgoing LAN traffic to IGA3 Many 1 mapping Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT 306 P 335 Series User s Guide 4 You also map your third IGA to the web server and mail server on the LAN Type Server allows you to specify multiple servers of different types to other computers behind NAT on the LAN The example situation looks somewhat like this Figure 179 NAT Example 3 ha pping Rules 1 FTP 1 gt 1GA 1 Type 11 Me 2 FTP 2 gt GA Type 11 3 Other LAN traffic 1 GA 3 Type M 1 Outgoing 4 G 3 Inside web server and mail server Inco LAN Wl ai Server NIE H2 168 1 70 FTP Server 1 1 In this case you need to gt configure Address Mapping Set from Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets Therefore you must choose the Full Feature option from the Network Address Translation field in menu 4 or menu 11 3 see Figure 160 2 Then enter 15 from the main menu 3 Enter 1 to configure the Address Mapping Sets 4 Enter to begin con
135. ANAGEMENT PROTOCOL METHOD MANUAL KEY Open NEP WPA WEP Yes eg ve WPA 2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Yes Roaming 467 A wireless station is a device with an IEEE 802 11 mode compliant wireless adapter An access point AP acts as a bridge between the wireless and wired networks An AP creates its own wireless coverage area A wireless station can associate with a particular access point only if it is within the access point s coverage area In a network environment with multiple access points wireless stations are able to switch from one access point to another as they move between the coverage areas This is roaming As the wireless station moves from place to place it is responsible for choosing the most appropriate access point depending on the signal strength network utilization or other factors The roaming feature on the access points allows the access points to relay information about the wireless stations to each other When a wireless station moves from a coverage area to another it scans and uses the channel of a new access point which then informs the access points on the LAN about the change The new information is then propagated to the other access points on the LAN An example is shown in see Figure 308 If the roaming feature is not enabled on the access points information is not communicated between the access points when a wireless station moves between coverage areas The wireless station may not be able to communicate
136. Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A Gateway IP Addr N A Network Address Translation SUA Only Metric 1 Private N A RIP Direction None Version N A Multicast None Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL This menu displays the My WAN Addr field for PPPoE and PPTP encapsulations and Gateway IP Addr field for Ethernet encapsulation The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 120 Remote Node Network Layer Options FIELD DESCRIPTION IP Address If your ISP did not assign you an explicit IP address press SPACE BAR and then Assignment ENTER to select Dynamic otherwise select Static and enter the IP address amp subnet mask in the following fields Rem If you have a static IP Assignment enter the IP address assigned to you by your ISP hae Rem If you have a static IP Assignment enter the subnet mask assigned to you Ge SR Gateway IP This field is applicable to Ethernet encapsulation only Enter the gateway IP address Addr assigned to you if you are using a static IP address My WAN Addr This field is applicable to PPPoE and PPTP encapsulations only Some implementations especially the UNIX derivatives require the WAN link to have a separate IP network number from the LAN and each end must have a unique address within the WAN network number If this is the case enter the IP address assigned to the WAN port of your Prestige Note that this is the address assigned to your local Prestige not the
137. D Log Select the categories of logs that you want to record Send Immediate Select log categories for which you want the Prestige to send E mail alerts immediately Click Apply to save your changes Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh ZS D D EV Chapter 21 Logs 252 P 335 Series User s Guide 253 Chapter 21 Logs P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 22 Tools This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware upload or save backup configuration files and restart the Prestige 22 1 Firmware Upload Screen Find firmware at www zyxel com in a file that usually uses the system model name with a bin extension e g Prestige bin The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for upgrading firmware using FTP TFTP commands Click MAINTENANCE and then the F W Upload tab Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your Prestige Figure 134 Maintenance Firmware Upload Firmware Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal router firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from website If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary BIN file In some cases you may need to reconfigure File Path Browse Uploa
138. E Encapsulation Specific rrrrreranernnnnnanennnrnnnnnnnre 28 Table 119 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for PPTP Encapsulation 288 Table 120 Remote Node Network Layer Options 289 Table 121 Menu 11 6 Traffic Redirect Setup ec cecceeccssceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeesagens 292 Table 122 Menu12 1 Edit IF Static ROUIG ssiccscszsanndcscacevssecsdessinncexeatesonecatateesinsuenseacdciewpadouns 295 List of Tables 32 P 335 Series User s Guide 33 Table 123 Applying NAT in Menus 4 amp 11 3 Vassnes 298 Table 124 SUA Address Mapping Rules ccccceccceccceeeceeeeeeecceeeceeseeeeeeeecaeesaeeseeesanees 300 Table 123 Monu 12 1 1 e EEN 301 Table 126 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set eee 302 Table 127 Menu 15 3 Trigger Port Setup rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnsen 312 Tapie 120 Monu 27 oT eg ES 317 Table 129 Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup ME 320 Table 130 Menu 27 1 1 1 IKE EE 324 Table 131 Active Protocol Encapsulation and Security Protocol rrrrrnnrernnenanennnennnennnre 326 Table 132 Menu 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup samene midder 326 Table 133 Menu 27 2 SA Monitor EEE 329 Table 134 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu cccccceeeeeeeeeae es 335 Table 135 Rule Abbreviations Used rrrnnnennrnnnnenanennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnennnennnnennne 336 REN KN e F FLO EE oor Table 137 Generic
139. E NE NE 396 Figure 241 POP Blocker S NN ccacciccicscrecictersanesie seiacnersistednernagriedioresceatevesreitiepiieieest 397 FE Eg EEE AE 398 Figure 243 Security Settings Java Scripting r rrrrnnnnnnnennnrnnnrrnnnnnnnnnanrnnnrnanrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnne 399 Figure 244 Security Settings Java EEE RE 400 Foue NAN E 401 Figure 246 Internet Options SC REE aani aa aaa 402 Figure 247 Security Setting ActiveX Controls A 403 Figure 248 Single Computer per Router Hardware Configuration rarrrarernnrvnrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnn 407 Figure 249 Prestige as a PPPOE GJEN assiiccsisdinecidinecai certian eeteniwesinacmemeenesn 407 Figure 250 Transport PPP frames over Ethernet cccscccssseressserensseceneneresoserseaserenenees 408 Figure 291 PUP Protocol VENN EE 409 List of Figures P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 252 Example Message Exchange between Computer and an ANT aanannaanannannnan 410 Figure 253 Network Print Server Setup Wizard ENEE 413 Figure 254 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Welcome 414 Figure 255 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Select A Print ener 415 Figure 256 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Change Settings rrrnrrrarernnrnanrnnnrnnnnnn 416 Figure 257 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Select A Printer rrrrrnrrnnnrrnnnnennnnrnnnnnnn 417 FOUE 235 PT HEID ae 417 Figure 259 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Summary rrrarnrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennn 418 Figure 260 Networ
140. EL Use the instructions in the following table to configure IP alias parameters Table 113 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION IP Alias 1 2 Choose Yes to configure the LAN network for the Prestige IP Address Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation Chapter 26 Menu 3 LAN Setup P 335 Series User s Guide Table 113 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige RIP Direction Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP direction Options are Both In Only Out Only or None Version Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP version Options are RIP 1 RIP 2B or RIP 2M Incoming Protocol Enter the filter set s you wish to apply to the incoming traffic between this node Filters and the Prestige Outgoing Protocol Enter the filter set s you wish to apply to the outgoing traffic between this node Filters and the Prestige When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 26 Menu 3 LAN Setup 2 6 P 335 Series User s Guide 21 1 Chapter 26 Menu 3 LAN Setup P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 27 Internet Access This chapter shows you how to
141. FC 1305 the default is similar to Time RFC 868 None enter the time manually Time Server Enter the IP address or domain name of your timeserver Check with your ISP Address network administrator if you are unsure of this information The default is tick stdtime gov tw Time Zone Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daylight time in the evenings If you use daylight savings time then choose Yes Start Date Enter the month and day that your daylight savings time starts on if you selected Yes in the Daylight Saving field Chapter 38 System Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide Table 150 Time and Date Setting Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION End Date Enter the month and day that your daylight savings time ends on if you selected Yes in the Daylight Saving field Once you have filled in this menu press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel 38 3 1 Resetting the Time The Prestige resets the time in three instances 1 On leaving menu 24 10 after making changes 2 When the Prestige starts up if there is a timeserver configured in menu 24 10 3 24 hour intervals after starting Chapter 38
142. Guide 9 5 Port Forwarding Screen 141 Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules For example if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9 In the set summary screen the new rule will be rule 7 not 9 Now if you delete rule 4 rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by I rule so old rules 5 6 and 7 become new rules 4 5 and 6 Refer to Table 57 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Note If you do not assign a Default Server IP Address the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management To change your Prestige s port forwarding settings click the NAT link under Network and the Port Forwarding tab The screen appears as shown Figure 72 Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Default Server Setup Default Server 0 0 0 0 Port Forwarding SS Sa A E Ee e emule 4662 4665 192 168 1 33 sch Ach Ach A C N O E gi ei Eb E ei gi ei ei ei ei Ek CH OD Ex EH ODO Er CH ad o EK O ER O amp Oo bet bt 5 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table
143. Guide Installation Requirements To install the print server driver you will need the following requirements e Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 SE Second Edition Windows ME Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Macintosh OS X e computer with an Ethernet port e RJ 45 cables and a USB cable The print server must be set up on each computer in your network that you want to use the print server Before you set up the print server make sure the USB printer is connected to the Prestige using the USB cable and that both the Prestige and the USB printer are turned on Windows NT 2000 XP Print Server Setup Wizard Use this wizard if you want to set up your network print server on Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP The Setup Wizard for Windows NT 2000 XP allows you to set up your print server using Line Printer Remote LPR protocol LPR is a cross platform printing protocol that uses TCP IP to establish connections between printers and computers on a network 1 Load the CD ROM that is supplied with the Prestige Select Network Print Server Setup 2 Click the Setup Wizard for Windows NT 2000 XP link Figure 253 Network Print Server Setup Wizard ES AutoPlay Menn 1 KC Ci Setup Wizard for Windows NT 2000 XP Setup Wizard for Windows 98 ME NT 2000 XP P 335 Firewall Router with Print Server 3 The Welcome screen displays Click Next to continue 413 Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User
144. Guide Table 41 Commonly Used Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION PING ICMP 0 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL GRE 0 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 REXEC TCP 514 RLOGIN TCP 513 RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Command Service A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web Remote Execution Daemon Remote Login Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet Simple File Transfer Protocol SFTP TCP 115 SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes mid
145. IPSec SA Secrecy PFS setup This allows faster IPSec setup but is not so secure Press SPACE BAR and choose from DH1 or DH2 to enable PFS DH1 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number DH2 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit 1Kb random number more secure yet slower When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 32 4 Manual Setup You only configure Menu 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup when you select Manual in the Key Management field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup Manual key management is useful if you have problems with IKE key management 325 Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup P 335 Series User s Guide 32 4 1 Active Protocol This field is a combination of mode and security protocols used for the VPN See the Web Configurator part on VPN for more information on these parameters Table 131 Active Protocol Encapsulation and Security Protocol ESP Transport 32 4 2 Security Parameter Index SPI To edit this menu move the cursor to the Edit Manual Setup field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to go to Menu 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup Figure 194 Menu 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup Menu 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup Active Protocol ESP Tunnel ESP Setup SPI Decimal Encryption Algorithm DES Keyl Key2 N A Key3 N A Authenticat
146. If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestige s LAN port Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window Appendix H Setting up Your Computere IP Address 0444 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 289 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration Network BR m LPR for TCP IP Printing SA 21 om EtherLink 10100 PCI T NIC 3C9056 T a Dial Up Adapter W LISE Fast Ethernet Adapter 7 TCPAP gt 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI T NIC 3C905B6 T i Client for Microsoft Networks Installing Components 445 The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 In the Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1 In the Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 335 Series User s Guide 3
147. LEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FTP SITE support Qzyxel com tw 886 3 578 3942 www zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Corp HEADQUARTERS Science Park ftp europe zyxel com Taiwan Czech s r o CZECH REPUBLIC info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 359 Modranska 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika 45 39 55 07 00 www zyxel dk ZyXELCommunicationsA S DENMARK Columbusvej 5 sales Qzyxel dk 45 39 55 07 07 2860 Soeborg Denmark 358 9 4780 8411 www zyxel fi ZyXEL Communications Oy FINLAND Malminkaari 10 sales zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8448 00700 Helsinki info zyxel fr 33 0 4 72 52 97 97 www zyxel fr ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers FRANCE 33 0 4 72 52 19 20 Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France support zyxel de 49 2405 6909 0 www zyxel de ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH sales zyxel de 49 2405 6909 99 Wuerselen Germany sales zyxel com 1 714 632 0858 ftp us zyxel com AN EE U S A support Qzyxel no 47 22 80 61 80 www zyxel no ZyXEL CommunicationsA S NORWAY Nils Hansens vei 13 sales zyxel no 47 22 80 61 81 0667 Oslo Norway support zyxel es 34 902 195 420 ZyXEL Communications support zyxel com 1 800 255 4101 www us zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Inc 1 714 632 0882 1130 N Miller St NORTH AMERICA Alejandro Villegas 33 1 28043 Madrid sales zyxel es 34 913 005 345 Spain support zyxel se 46 31 744 7700 www zyxel se ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg sales Qzyxel se 46 31 744 7701 Sweden Custo
148. Lugaannmenuiseaueenum ggg AE 284 28 2 Remote Node Profile Setup rrrnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnvnnnrnnnnnnannnnnrnnnrnnnnnnannnanenanennnsennnen 284 RE ETONE EM ODS eg PE EE 284 ER gt Le NN 286 28 2 2 1 Outgoing Authentication Protocol rrnnrnrnnnrrnrnnnrvnnnnrvnnnrenrnnnennnn 286 Nr NNN NNN ee 287 EN sd hj E 287 SE E tere 288 Table of Contents 16 P 335 Series User s Guide E Re ER NOGE EE 290 ERE EEE 291 Chapter 29 TE NG 294 PN NNN SSN 294 Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT rrnnnrrnnernnnernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnennnnnnn 296 TDN WEE 296 30 1 1 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT rrrnnnnnnnnnennnennnnnennnennnnnnnnnen 296 EP OTRAS ae 296 NTN ner 298 EN PO IN SO era 299 30 3 1 1 User Defined Address Mapping Sets arrrnrrnnarnrarnrarennnrrnnnnnnen 300 390 3 1 2 Ordenng VOR EE 301 30 4 Configuring a Server behind TEE 303 30 5 General NAT BAIN JE EE veo qakatvaasetaaneaees 304 30 5 1 Example 1 Internet Access Only cccccscceeeecseeceeeceeeeeeeesseeseeeeaens 304 30 5 2 Example 2 Internet Access with an Inside Server ccccccceeeeeeees 305 30 5 3 Example 3 Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers 306 30 5 4 Example 4 NAT Unfriendly Application Programs cccccceeeeee ees 310 30 6 Configuring Trigger Port Forwarding 311 Chapter 31 Enabling EE EE e 314 31 1 Remote Management and the Firewall r rrrnrnnnnn
149. N A a Note Only check for Trend Micro Internet Security version 11 35 or higher Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Trend Micro Select the checkbox to enable Trend Micro Security Services on your Security Services Prestige Enable Parental Controls Select the check box to enable this feature on your Prestige Security Services Display Interval Automatically display Select from the drop down list box how often the TMSS web page appears TMSS Web page every in your web browser Check for Trend Micro Internet Security Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services 194 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 78 General continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Automatically check for Select the checkbox to have the Prestige download the latest scan engine update components and virus pattern version numbers not the actual software from the Trend Micro website The Prestige can then compare version numbers currently on Prestige LAN computers with its latest downloaded version numbers and display the status in the table below Check for update Select how often the Prestige should automatically check the Trend Micro components every Active Update server for updated components Choose more frequent checking if there are many current virus threats or less frequent checking if there aren t and you have a lot of Internet traffic Scan engine This field dis
150. N rule for each telecommuter and identify them by unique IDs see the Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example section Table 77 Telecommuter and Headquarters Configuration Example IP Address 0 0 0 0 dynamic IP address Public static IP address assigned by the ISP Secure Gateway Public static IP address or domain 0 0 0 0 With this IP address only the IP Address name telecommuter can initiate the IPSec tunnel Figure 95 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example Lon r regen Dynamic public TE IP address 0 0 0 0 LAN a oe Local IP Address LAN Telecommuter R Headquarters 192 188 1 10 gt pe sm Local IP Address 192 168 1 2 Dynamic public IP address 0 0 0 0 My IP Address a b c d Hhacura Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 Ranas Address N A Ti we Dupong public Local IP Address 192 168 1 10 IP address 0 0 0 0 All tdecommuters use My IP Address 0 0 0 0 Secure Galeway Address a b c d Remote IP Address 192 188 1 10 13 17 2 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example With aggressive negotiation mode see section Negotiation Mode the Prestige can use the ID types and contents to distinguish between VPN rules Telecommuters can each use a separate VPN rule to simultaneously access a Prestige at headquarters They can use different IPSec parameters including the pre shared key and the local IP addresses or ranges of addresses can overlap Chapter 13 VPN Screens 188 P 335 Series U
151. NN EE 175 Val et eren MOOG PRE 176 13 11 2 Diffie Hellman DH Key Groups rrrrrnnnnnrnnannrnvnnnrnnnnnennnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnsnn 176 13 11 3 Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS ENEE 176 1812 Advanced RUG Setup Ee CT 177 NNN EE EE 182 13 13 1 Security Parameter Index SPI rrrnrnnnnnrnnnnnvnnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 182 TN SOGN ean 182 ee EE EEE EE 185 NNN NN EE 186 13 17 Telecommuter VPN IPSec Examples rrrnrrnnnrnnnrnanvnnnnnnnrnnnnnnannnanennnrnnnnnnnnen 187 13 17 1 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example 187 13 17 2 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example rrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrr 188 13 18 VPN and Remote Management uk RENE 189 Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services Lose 190 14 1 Trend Micro Security Services Overview 190 Telt TSS DP Jarre 190 14 2 Configuring TMSS on the Prestige cccccccsseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseneeeesees 193 RE SSE ar Ve EE 194 PENT NN EN 195 14 4 Virus Protection Screen sanden 197 14 5 Parental Controls Screen eegene Ae AE 198 Table of Contents P 335 Series User s Guide Chapter 15 SENE ROUTE S eg EE 202 195 1 Statt ST GAGE EE SE EE 202 TEPPE 202 15 2 1 Static Route Setup E EG 203 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Manageme nt ennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnunnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnenn 206 16 1 Bandwidth Management Overview 206 16 1 1 Application based Bandwidth Management Example 0060 206 16 1 2 Subnet based B
152. NPS Java 275 Figure 154 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ENNEN 279 Figure 155 Internet Access Setup PPTP eneeier e eden 281 Figure 156 Internet Access Setup PPPOE A 282 Figure 157 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for Ethernet Encapsulaton 285 Figure 158 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for PPPoE Encapsulation ccceeeee 286 Figure 159 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for PPTP Encapsulation rrrnrrnnnrnanennnrnnnnr 288 Figure 160 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options for Ethernet Encapsulation 289 Figure 161 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Ethernet Encapsulation 00nn0nnaanenannannnans 291 Figure 162 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter PPPoE or PPTP Encapsulation 00000000n 291 Figure 163 Menu 11 6 Traffic Redirect EE 292 Figure 164 Menu 12 IP Static Route Setup ENNEN 294 Figure 165 Menu12 1 Edit IP Static Route accicanssisnncarinceinicanteserescsseacevanccseareserqenieeeincseupiawnad 295 List of Figures P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 166 Menu A Applying NAT for Internet ACCESS rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnrnnnnennnrennnnennnnen 297 Figure 167 Menu 11 3 Applying NAT to the Remote Node 298 Fig re 168 Menu 15 NAT GA seem ee dE ege 299 Figure 169 Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets rrrnarnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnn 299 Figure 170 Menu 15 1 255 SUA Address Mapping Rules rrrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnnnnnennnennn 300 SEE RE RE NE 301 Figure 172 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Co
153. Not Matched will be N A Log Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select a logging option from the following None No packets will be logged Action Matched Only packets that match the rule parameters Action Not will be logged Matched Action Not Matched Only packets that do not match the rule Both parameters will be logged Both All packets will be logged Action Matched Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the action fora Check Next matching packet Rule Forward Drop Action Not Matched Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the action for a Check Next packet not matching the rule Rule Forward Drop Greater Equal Not Equal When you have Menu 21 1 1 1 TCP IP Filter Rule configured press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel This data will now be displayed on Menu 21 1 1 Filter Rules Summary The following figure illustrates the logic flow of an IP filter Chapter 34 Filter Configuration 338 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 201 Executing an IP Filter Check Next File Check Het Foie a aa 34 2 3 Configuring a Generic Filter Rule This section shows you how to configure a generic filter rule The purpose of generic rules is to allow you to filter non IP packets For IP it is generally easier to use the IP rules directly For generic rules the Prestige treats a packet as a byte stream as opposed
154. OG PRTIRL SYSLOG NOTICE Strang Sring Packet trigger Protocol xx Data xxxxxxxxXX X Protocol 1 IP 2 IPX 3 IPXHC 4 BPDU 5 ATALK 62 LPNG Data We will send forty eight Hex characters to the server Jul 19 11228439 192 169 10242 ZyXEL Packet Trigger Protocol l Data 4500003c100100001 010004c0a86614ca849a7p08004a5c020001006162636465666768696a6b6c 6d6e6f 7071727374 Jul 19 11 28 56 192 168 102 32 ZyXEL Packet Trigger Protocols Data 4500002c1b0140001f06b50ec0a86614ca849a7pb0427001700195b3e00000000600220008cd40000 020405b4 dar 19 11290006 19216831 02 2 erc Packer Trigger Protocol Data 45000028240140001f06ac12c0a86614ca849a7pb0427001700195b451d1430135004000077600000 355 Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis P 335 Series User s Guide 36 3 1 3 Filter log Filter log Message Format pdcmasys lLogsend SYShOG FILLOG SYSLOG NOTICE String String IP Src xx xx xx xx DSt xx xx xxX xXx prot Spo xxxx dpo xxxx S04 gt RO1mD IP is the packet header and SO4 gt ROlmD means filter set 4 S and rule 1 R match m drop D Src Source Address Dst Destination Address prot Protocol TCP UDP ICMP spo Source port dpo Destination port Mar 03 10 59 15 202e e 1555907 ZELL GEN fffffffffffnordff0080 S05 gt RO1lmF Mar 05 LO 24 229 202 NS SST VER GEN O00aO0c5Sf502fnord010080 S05 gt ROImF Mar 03 10 4125354 Z202 1322155 97 ZyXEL TIP Sre1924 168 2 233 DEE 202 1324155493 1CMP
155. ON Host Enter the IP address of the Prestige 192 168 1 1 is the Prestige s default IP address when shipped Send Fetch Use Send to upload the file to the Prestige and Fetch to back up the file on your computer Local File Enter the path and name of the firmware file bin extension or configuration file rom extension on your computer Remote File This is the filename on the Prestige The filename for the firmware is ras and for the configuration file is rom O Binary Transfer the file in binary mode Abort Stop transfer of the file 37 3 Restore Configuration This section shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk FTP 1s the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your Prestige since FTP is faster Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete Note WARNING Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE YOUR Prestige 37 3 1 Restore Using FTP For details about backup using T FTP please refer to earlier sections on FTP and TFTP file upload in this chapter 367 Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 222 Telne
156. P CO IIO DOUT IISR OD II RI Si Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 102 Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Address Info Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail addresses specified below If this field is left blank logs and alert messages will not be sent via E mail Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e mail message that the Prestige sends Not all Prestige models have this field Send Log To The Prestige sends logs to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank the Prestige does not send logs via e mail 251 Chapter 21 Logs P 335 Series User s Guide Table 102 Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Send Alerts To Alerts are real time notifications that are sent as soon as an event such as a DoS attack system error or forbidden web access attempt occurs Enter the E mail address where the alert messages will be sent Alerts include system errors attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites If this field is left blank alert messages will not be sent via E mail SMTP Authentication SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabl
157. P 335 Firewall Router with Print Server P 335W I 802 119 Wireless Firewall Router with Print Server User s Guide Version 3 60 9 2005 ZyXEL P 335 Series User s Guide Copyright Copyright 2005 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Copyright 2 P 335 Series User s Guide Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC ru
158. P 335 Series User s Guide Table 45 PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Use fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address address My WAN IP Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address Address Remote IP Enter the Remote IP Address if your ISP gave you one in this field Address Remote IP Enter the Rmote IP subnet Mask in this field Subnet Mask Metric PPPoE This field sets this route s priority among the routes the Prestige uses The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 and GE only means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost Private PPPoE This parameter determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node and PPTP only in its RIP broadcasts If set to Yes this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast If No the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts WAN MAC Address Spoof WAN MAC The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Clear the check box to use the factory
159. P Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Address _ Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s to the WAN IP address DDNS server auto Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s automatically detect IP Address by the DDNS server It is recommended that you select this option Use specified IP Type the IP address of the host name s Use this if you have a static IP Address address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh K Chapter 20 System 24 P 335 Series User s Guide 20 5 Time Setting Screen To change your Prestige s time and date click the System link under Maintenance and the Time Setting tab The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the Prestige s time based on your local time zone Figure 131 Time Setting Time Setting Current Time and Date Current Time 02 58 40 Current Date 2000 01 01 Time and Date Setup Manual New Time hh mm ss New Date yyyy mm dd Get from Time Server Time Protocol Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone cGMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London v C Daylight Savings Start Date F t 7 Saturday Januar vj 2000 01 01 at c o clock End Date Fir l 7 gt aturda Januar rj 2000 01 01 at fo o clock Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 Time Setting LABEL DESCRI
160. P address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router For example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet 1s traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 55 NAT Definitions TERM DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN This refers to the host on the WAN This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN Note NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 134 P 335 Series User s Guide 9 1 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the des
161. PP sessions from your LAN PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP Benefits of PPPoE PPPoE offers the following benefits e It provides you with a familiar dial up networking DUN user interface It lessens the burden on the carriers of provisioning virtual circuits all the way to the ISP on multiple switches for thousands of users For GSTN PSTN and ISDN the switching fabric is already in place e It allows the ISP to use the existing dial up model to authenticate and optionally to provide differentiated services Traditional Dial up Scenario The following diagram depicts a typical hardware configuration where the computers use traditional dial up networking Appendix B PPPoE 406 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 248 Single Computer per Router Hardware Configuration HA Access Concentrator z Cu How PPPoE Works The PPPoE driver makes the Ethernet appear as a serial link to the computer and the computer runs PPP over it while the modem bridges the Ethernet frames to the Access Concentrator AC Between the AC and an ISP the AC is acting as a L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol LAC L2TP Access Concentrator and tunnels the PPP frames to the ISP The L2TP tunnel is capable of carrying multiple PPP sessions With PPPoE the VC Virtual Circuit is equivalent to the dial up connection and is between the mod
162. PTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your Prestige Each time you reload this page the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your Prestige Each time you reload this page the Prestige synchronizes the date with the time server Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually If you configure a new time and date Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time hh mm ss configured manually When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new time in this field and then click Apply 245 Chapter 20 System P 335 Series User s Guide Table 100 Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION New Date This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date yyyy mm dd configured manually When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Get from Time Select this radio button to have the Prestige get the time and date from the time Server server you specified below Time Protocol Select the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the Prestige Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to check with your ISP
163. Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 127 Menu 15 3 Trigger Port Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number Name Enter a unique name for identification purposes You may enter up to 15 characters in this field All characters are permitted including spaces Incoming Incoming is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The Prestige forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Start Port Enter a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers End Port Enter a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Trigger The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the Prestige to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Start Port Enter a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers End Port Enter a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT 312 P 335 Series User s Guide 313 Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 31 Enabling the Firewall This chap
164. Products 5 Proof of Purchase 5 Proper Operating Condition 5 Purchase Proof of 5 Purchaser 5 Q Qualified Service Personnel 4 R Radio Communications 3 Radio Frequency Energy 3 Radio Interference 3 Radio Reception 3 Radio Technician 3 RADIUS 461 Shared Secret Key 462 RADIUS Message Types 461 RADIUS Messages 461 RAS 353 Receiving Antenna 3 Index Registered 2 Registered Trademark 2 Regular Mail 6 Related Documentation 36 Relocate 3 Rem Node Name 285 Re manufactured 5 Remote Management Firewall 314 Remote Management and NAT 219 Remote Management Limitations 218 383 Remote Node Filter 290 Removing 4 Reorient 3 Repair 4 5 Replace 5 Replacement 5 Reproduction 2 Required fields 263 Resetting the Time 380 Restore 5 256 Restore Configuration 367 Restrict Web Features 153 199 Return Material Authorization RMA Number 5 Returned Products 5 Returns 5 RF Radio Frequency 43 Rights 2 Rights Legal 5 RIP 123 290 Version 290 Risk 4 Risks 4 RMA 5 Roaming 101 467 Example 468 Requirements 468 Route 285 RTC 377 RTS Request To Send 459 RTS Threshold 458 459 S SA Monitor 328 Safety Warnings 4 Schedule Sets Duration 387 Schedules 287 Index P 335 Series User s Guide Security Association 328 Security Parameters 467 Separation Between Equipment and Receiver 3 Serial Number 6 Server 137 246 279 285 298 300 302 303 305 306 307 379 Server IP 285 Service
165. Questionable Gambling violence Hate Racism Abortion Illegal Drugs Reset Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Summary Parental Control Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Category All Parental Control categories are displayed as shown Access Attempts This field displays the number of attempts that have been made to access web page s from a category of web pages that you have selected in the Parental Controls screen Actual Accesses This field displays the number of times access has been made to web page s from a category of web pages that you have not selected in the Parental Controls screen or that have been accesses by exempted computers Click Reset to clear all of the fields in this screen Click Refresh to renew the statistics screen 2 4 5 Summary Wireless Station Status P 335WT Click the WLAN Station Status Details hyperlink in the Status screen View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the Prestige in the Association List screen Figure 12 Summary Wireless Association List Association List Refresh Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 56 P 335 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Summary Wireless Association List DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station As
166. R Paseword KIKKKKKKK Enable Wildcard No Offline N A Edit Update IP Address Use Server Detected IP No User Specified IP Address No IP Address N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Follow the instructions in the next table to configure Dynamic DNS parameters Table 109 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS FIELD DESCRIPTION This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to make dynamic DNS active DDNS Type Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select DynamicDNS if you have a dynamic IP address es Select StaticDNS if you have a static IP address s Select CustomDNS to have dyns org provide DNS service for a domain name that you already have from a source other than dyndns org Host 1 3 Enter your host name s in the fields provided You can specify up to two host names separated by a comma in each field Enter the password assigned to you Enable Your Prestige supports DYNDNS Wildcard Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER Wildcards to select Yes or No This field is N A when you choose DDNS client as your service provider This field is only available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes When Yes is selected http www dyndns orq traffic is redirected to a URL that you have previously specified see www dyndns org for details Chapter 24 Menu 1 General Setup 268 P 335 Serie
167. RIPTION Size of Client IP This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Pool The Prestige passes a DNS Domain Name System server IP address in the order you specify here to the DHCP clients First DNS Server ane SES Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the ENE Prestige s WAN IP address The IP Address field below displays the read only Third DNS Server DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the IP Address field below If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you save your changes If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you save your changes Select DNS Relay to have the Prestige act as a DNS proxy The Prestige s LAN IP address displays in the IP Address field below read only The Prestige tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the Prestige itself is the DNS server When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the Prestige the Prestige forwards the query to the Prestige s system DNS server configured in menu 1 and relays the response back to the computer You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server that choice changes to None after you save y
168. Rule as shown next Figure 200 Menu 21 1 1 1 TCP IP Filter Rule Menu 211 1 1 1 TCP IP Filter Rule Filter 1 1 Filter Type TCP IP Filter Rule Active Yes IP Protocol 0 IP Source Route No Destination IP Addr 0 0 0 0 IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Port 137 Port Comp Equal Source IP Addr 0 0 0 0 IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Port Port Comp None TCP Estab N A More No Log None Action Matched Check Next Rule Action Not Matched Check Next Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes how to configure your TCP IP filter rule Table 136 TCP IP Filter Rule FIELD DESCRIPTION OPTIONS Active Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes to activate Yes the filter rule or No to deactivate it No IP Protocol Protocol refers to the upper layer protocol e g TCP is 6 UDP is 0 255 17 and ICMP is 1 Type a value between 0 and 255 A value of 0 matches ANY protocol IP Source Route Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes to apply Yes the rule to packets with an IP source route option Otherwise the No packets must not have a source route option The majority of IP packets do not have source route Destination IP Address Enter the destination IP Address of the packet you wish to filter 0 0 0 0 This field is ignored if it is 0 0 0 0 IP Mask Enter the IP mask to apply to the Destination IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Port Enter the destination port of the packets that you wish to filter
169. SCRIPTION Active Select the Active check box to have the Prestige apply bandwidth management to traffic going out through the Prestige s WAN LAN or WLAN port Managed Bandwidth Enter the amount of Managed Bandwidth in kbps 2 to 100 000 that you Kbps want to allocate for traffic 20 kbps to 20 000 kbps is recommended The recommendation is to set this speed to be equal to or less than the speed of the broadband device connected to the WAN port For example set the speed to 1000 Kbps or less if the broadband device connected to the WAN port has an upstream speed of 1000 Kbps Click Next to continue IT Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide 4 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard Services Use the second wizard screen to select the services that you want to apply bandwidth management Figure 34 Bandwidth Management Wizard Services STEP 2 STEP 3 ff Services Setup Apply bandwidth management by selecting services from the list provided Ed xBox Live E voip SIP Ei FTP E E mail M eMule feDonkey Bwww The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Bandwidth Management Wizard Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Choose Create bandwidth management classes by selecting services from the list provided Channel ID XBox Live VoIP SIP FTP E Mail eMule eDonkey e WWW Click Back to display the previous screen Click Next to proceed to the next screen 4
170. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect Configuring 1 In the Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab If your IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically If you have a static IP address select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields Figure 290 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address TCP IP Properties Bindings Advanced NetBIOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer IF pour network does not automatically assign IP addresses ack pour network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Specify an IF address IP Address Subnet Mask IY Detect connection to network media 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab If you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS If you know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 446 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 291 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration TCP IP Properties Bindings
171. Session Example of Firmware File Upload 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in EGp gt ban 200 Type I OK ftp gt put firmware bin ras 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp 1103936 bytes sent in 1 10Seconds 297 89Kbytes sec ELOS GULL More commands found in GUI based FTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter 37 4 5 TFTP File Upload The Prestige also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol over LAN Although TFTP should work over WAN as well it is not recommended To use TFTP your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients To transfer the firmware and the configuration file follow the procedure shown next 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the Prestige and log in Because TFTP does not have any security checks the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address 2 Put the SMT in command interpreter CI mode by entering 8 in Menu 24 System Maintenance 371 Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide 3 Enter the command sys stdio 0 to disable the console timeout so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted Enter command sys stdio 5 to restore the five minute console timeout default when the file transfer is complete 4 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to th
172. Source route failed ngem of A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network Ea o o fr Redirect datagramstortheNework o o fi rem 2 Redirect datagrams forthe Type of Service and Nework 5 fReareetdatagrams for tne Type of Service and Host C em fo femmes um meses hb mees fi Fregmentreassembiy ime excceded Oo o o OO oo fPremeiererolem 0 Pomterindcatestheeror oOOOooooO cs fms e fmestarnprequest messe OOOO rm msemo fo Jnmesamprepymesse iS ___ iermationRewest fe Jintrmaton requestmessag fe _ intoratonRepy Ir fmommatonrepy message Appendix G Log Descriptions P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communicate with your network
173. Subnet A VoIP 64 kbps ubnet Subnet A Web 64 kbps LAN Subnet AFTP 64 kbps WW Subnet A E mail 64 kbps E ie Subnet A Video 64 kbps RS Subnet B VoIP 64 kbps Subnet B 25 Subnet B Web 64 kbps Subnet B FTP 64 kbps Subnet B E mail 64 kbps Subnet B Video 64 kbps 16 1 4 Bandwidth Usage Example Here is an example of a Prestige that has bandwidth usage enabled on an interface The first figure shows each bandwidth rule s bandwidth budget The rules are set up based on subnets The interface is set to 320 Kbps Each subnet is allocated 64 Kbps The unbudgeted 64 Kbps allows traffic that does not match a bandwidth management rule to go out when you do not select the Use All Managed Bandwidth option Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 208 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 115 Bandwidth Usage Example Bandwidth Budget 320 Kbps gt Administration 64 Kbps Sales 64 Kbps Marketing 64 Kbps R amp D 64 Kbps The following figure shows the bandwidth usage with the maximize bandwidth usage option enabled The Prestige divides up the unbudgeted 64 Kbps among the rules that require more bandwidth If the administration department only uses 32 Kbps of the budgeted 64 Kbps the Prestige also divides the remaining 32 Kbps among the rules that require more bandwidth Therefore the Prestige divides a total of 96 Kbps total of unbudgeted and unused bandwidth among the rules that require more bandwidth In
174. T mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The Prestige keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 68 How NAT Works NAT Table Inside Local Inside Global LAN WAN IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1 11 IGA 2 192 168 1 13 E 192 168 1 12 IGA 3 Er 192 168 1 13 IGA 4 192 168 1 12 192 168 1 10 Ge wanes 192168 1 11 E Inside Local 192 168 110 Addresses ILA Inside Gobal Addresses IGA tee el ee bebe bee ee ot 9 1 4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application where three inside LANs logical LANs using IP Alias behind the Prestige can communicate with three distinct WAN networks More examples follow at the end of this chapter Figure 69 NAT Application With IP Alias LAN1 192 168 1 X Network Server Admin 192 168 1 1 Corporation B DE NT Server 192 168 1 1 a Ses W s Li nd men LAN2 192168 2X ces wa T NTT Network Server Sales 192 168 2 1 NT Serv erver 192 168 2 1 LAN3 192 168 3 X Network Server R amp D 192 168 3 1 WAN Addresses Server in Admin Network P 1 IGA 1 E zws Corporation A
175. TH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users 16 1 6 Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of the services that you can select and apply bandwidth management Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 210 P 335 Series User s Guide VoIP SIP Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP Session Initiated Protocol SIP is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP using the default port number 5060 FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 Services The commonly used services and port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to
176. The Prestige has to rebuild the VPN tunnel each time the remote secure gateway s WAN IP address changes there may be a delay until the DDNS servers are updated with the remote gateway s new WAN IP address 13 4 1 Dynamic Secure Gateway Address If the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and does not use DDNS enter 0 0 0 0 as the secure gateway s address In this case only the remote secure gateway can initiate SAs This may be useful for telecommuters initiating a VPN tunnel to the company network Note The Secure Gateway IP Address may be configured as 0 0 0 0 only when using IKE key management and not Manual key management 13 5 VPN Summary Screen The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator Figure 84 IPSec Summary Fields Local Remote IP addresses Local Remote IP addresses Network Network VPN Tunne My IP address Secure Gateway IP address Local and remote IP addresses must be static Click the VPN link under Security to open the VPN Summary screen This is a read only menu of your IPSec rules tunnels Edit or create an IPSec rule by clicking the edit icon under the Modify field to configure the associated submenus Chapter 13 VPN Screens 166 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 85 Summary PN Summary rs 10 10 20 40 0 0 0 0 Tunnel ESP DES SHA1 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION The VPN
177. The field sets a ceiling for outgoing call time for this remote node The default for this field is 0 meaning no budget control Period hr This field is the time period that the budget should be reset For example if we are allowed to call this remote node for a maximum of 10 minutes every hour then the Allocated Budget is 10 minutes and the Period hr is 1 hour Schedules You can apply up to four schedule sets here For more details please refer to the Call Schedule Setup chapter Nailed Up This field specifies if you want to make the connection to this remote node a nailed Connection up connection More details are given earlier in this section Session Options Idle Timeout Type the length of idle time when there is no traffic from the Prestige to the remote node in seconds that can elapse before the Prestige automatically disconnects the PPPoE connection This option only applies when the Prestige initiates the call 28 2 3 PPTP Encapsulation If you change the Encapsulation to PPTP in menu 11 1 then you will see the next screen Please see the appendix for information on PPTP 28 Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 159 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for PPTP Encapsulation Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name MyISP Route IP Active Yes Apply Alias None Encapsulation PPTP Edit IP No Service Type Standard Telco Option Service Name N A Allocated Budget min
178. Troubleshooting 392 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 157 Troubleshooting Restricted Web Pages and Keyword Blocking PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Parental Restart the device to clear the cache Control is configured correctly but The content filter server may be unavailable The View Logs screen can display content filtering log messages See the Log Descriptions appendix for a list of possible log messages In the View Logs screen copy and paste the log messages and e mail them to customer support with an explanation of the problem restricted web f you still have problems contact your vendor or customer support for further advice pages Problems with the Password can still access Table 158 Troubleshooting the Password PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Cannot access the The password field is case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct Prestige password using the proper casing Use the Reset button to restore the factory default configuration file This will restore all of the factory defaults including the password see section 2 3 for details Problems with Remote Management Table 159 Troubleshooting Telnet PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Cannot access the Refer to Chapter 15 for scenarios when remote management may not be Prestige from the possible When NAT is enabled e Use the Prestige s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN e Use the Prestige s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN
179. Type the IP address of the PPTP server Connection ID Name Type your identification name for the PPTP server WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the ISP default selection Use fixed IP address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address My WAN IP Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address Address Remote IP Address Enter the Remote IP Address if your ISP gave you one in this field Remote IP Subnet Enter the Rmote IP subnet Mask in this field Mask Metric PPPoE and This field sets this route s priority among the routes the Prestige uses PPTP only The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost Private PPPoE and This parameter determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote PPTP only node in its RIP broadcasts If set to Yes this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast If No the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts Spoof WAN MAC The MAC address section allows
180. User s Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Prestige Print Server Application cccccecccseccsseceeeceueecseeceueceeeceueeseeecaeeseeeseas 44 Figure 2 Secure Internet Access via Cable DSL or Wireless Modem o nn0nnannennnannnnnnns 45 FUNN vr er 45 Figure 4 Internet Access Application Example rrarrrnrnnnrnnnrrnrrnnrnnnrrnnnnnrrnernnnnnennnnnnennsenner 46 FV AG EEE RE NE NR 46 FS RE ENE 46 Figure 7 Change Password Screen cicicindaccscvcnnzsanncodanceinncsncesvteprameeceranecssiseinnntpindeesincadenadwsis 49 Figure 8 Web Configurator Status Screen REENEN 50 Figure 9 Summary Any IP Table cieccecsccietescaticcectnddacascintsdidpaneossdoncnsin tescensimdsdnekueventtnavenseteas 54 FR TU ee TODE RR aa 55 Figure 11 Summary Parental Control Statistics AA 56 Figure 12 Summary Wireless Association List NENNEN 56 eg AEE EE 57 Figure 14 Summary E 57 FORT Summary VPN MONILO svermeren Gene 58 FOO TO Soera WEE 60 Figure 17 Select a Language ccccceccesecceeecececeeecueceueecueetcecaueceueceueceaeecueesueesaeesaeeseas 61 Figure 18 Welcome to the Connection Wizard AANEREN ENEE 61 Figure 19 Connection Wizard System Information arannnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 62 Figure 20 Connection Wizard Wireless AN 63 FAE SS ee ee Eege 64 Figure 22 Extend WPA2 PSK and WPA2 PSK Security rrrrrrrnnnerrnnnrrvrnrnenvnnnenrnnrrnnnnnne 65 alle RN W 66 Figure 24 Connection Wizard WAN Connection Typ
181. WEP keys HEX Select this option to enter hexadecimal characters as the WEP keys The preceding Ox is entered automatically Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the Prestige and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 256 bit WEP then enter 29 ASCII characters or 58 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 Click Back to display the previous screen Click Next to proceed to the next screen Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 64 P 335 Series User s Guide 3 3 2 Extend WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Security Choose Extend WPA PSK or Extend WPA2 PSK security in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre Shared Key Figure 22 Extend WPA2 PSK and WPA2 PSK Security ff Wireless LAN WPA PSK uses Press Shared Key to authentic vate wireless users and make s syre they are ed to access yo F IFE 5 d key as shared password that you must ar 5 ast amp charai in length and made BB of bat letters ane numbers This pre shared key is rec SEE to be different from the password you use to access this router or use to log in to your ISP Pre Share
182. Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections To continue click Nest 4 Back Cancel 4 Select the Local printer radio button 5 Click Next to continue Figure 267 Local Printer Screen Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer ls the printer attached to your computer If the printer i directly attached to pour computer click Local printer IF it is attached to another computer or directly to the network click Network printer f Local printer Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer Network printer lt Back Cancel 6 Select the Create a new port radio button 7 Choose Standard TCP IP Port from the Type drop down list box 8 Click Next to continue Appendix D Print Server 422 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 268 Select Printer Port Screen Add Printer Wizard Select the Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through parts Select the port you want your printer to use fF the port ig not listed You can create new port Use the following port Pot Description Printer Le LPT 1 Printer Port LPT 2 Printer Port LPT 3 Printer Port COM1 Serial Port COM Serial Port Cha Geral Part sl Mote Most computers use the LPT 1 port to communicate with a local printer e Create anew port Type 9 Follow the on screen instructions and click Next to continue Figure 269
183. _CLIENT UDP 68 el Select Custom Port you can give new port range for blocking Type TCP D Port Number 5 Wi 20 Add Delete Clear All Schedule to Block Day to Block IV Everyday M sun M mon M Tue M Wed Thu M Fri M Sat Time of Day to Block 24 Hour Format sll day C From Start lo hour fo min End fo hour fo min Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Services Select this check box to enable this feature Blocking Available Service This is a list of pre defined services ports you may prohibit your LAN computers from using Select the port you want to block using the drop down list and click Add to add the port to the Blocked Service field Blocked Service This is a list of services ports that will be inaccessible to computers on your LAN once you enable service blocking Choose the IP port TCP UDP or TCP UDP that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Custom Port A custom port is a service that is not available in the pre defined Available Services list and you must define using the next two fields Services are either TCP and or UDP Select from either TCP or UDP Port Number Enter the port number range that defines the service For example suppose you want to define the Gnutella service Select TCP type and enter a port range from 6345 6349 Add Select a service from the Available Services drop
184. a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode Prestige gateways authenticate an IKE VPN session by matching pre shared keys Pre shared keys are best for small networks with fewer than ten nodes Enter your pre shared key here Enter up to 31 characters Any character may be used includ ing spaces but trailing spaces are truncated Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre shared key You will receive a PYLD MALFORMED payload malformed packet if the same pre shared key is not used on both ends Encryption When DES is used for data communications both sender and receiver must know Algorithm the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code Prestige DES encryption algo rithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in slightly increased latency and decreased throughput Press SPACE BAR to choose from 3DES or DES and then press ENTER Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup 324 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 130 Menu 27 1 1 1 IKE Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Authentication MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms Algorithm used to authenticate packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stron ger than MD5 but is slightly slower Press SPACE BAR
185. a Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server manage IP addresses and partition your physical network into logical networks 7 1 1 IP Pool Setup The Prestige is pre configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses excluding the Prestige itself in the lower range for other server computers for instance servers for mail FTP TFTP web etc that you may have 7 1 2 System DNS Servers Refer to the ZP Address and Subnet Mask section in the Wizard Connection chapter 7 2 LAN TCP IP The Prestige has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability 7 2 1 Factory LAN Defaults The LAN parameters of the Prestige are preset in the factory with the following values e IP address of 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 24 bits e DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 These parameters should work for the majority of installations If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address es read the embedded web configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured Chapter 7 LAN 122 P 335 Series User s Guide 7 2 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask Refer to the IP Address and Subnet Mask section in the Wizard Setup chapter for this informa
186. able 105 SMT Menus Overview continued MENUS SUB MENUS 24 2 System Information and Console 24 2 1 Information Ls Port Speed 24 2 2 Change Console Port Speed EIER ugeet S o S bel 2AGResoreConfouraton pf 24 7 Upload Firmware 24 7 1 Upload System Firmware 24 7 2 Upload System Configuration File 24 9 Call Control 24 9 1 Budget Management MN 27 VPN IPSec Setup 27 1 IPSec Summary 27 1 1 IPSec Setup 27 1 1 1 IKE Setup 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup 23 2 Navigating the SMT Interface The SMT System Management Terminal is the interface that you use to configure your Prestige Several operations that you should be familiar with before you attempt to modify the configuration are listed in the table below Table 106 Main Menu Commands OPERATION KEYSTROKE DESCRIPTION Move down to ENTER To move forward to a submenu type in the number of the another menu desired submenu and press ENTER Move up toa ESC Press ESC to move back to the previous menu previous menu Move to a hidden Press SPACE Fields beginning with Edit lead to hidden menus and have menu BAR to change No a default setting of No Press SPACE BAR once to change to Yes then press No to Yes and then press ENTER to go to the hidden ENTER menu Chapter 23 Introducing the SMT 262 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 106 Main Menu Commands OPERATION KEYSTROKE DESCRIPTION Move the cursor ENTER or UP With
187. acintosh OS X Apple Menu KG Grab File Edit Capt About This Mac Get Mac 05 X Software System Preferences Dock Location 2 Click Network in the icon bar s Select Automatic from the Location list 453 Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 335 Series User s Guide Select Built in Ethernet from the Show list Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list Figure 301 Macintosh OS X Network ov 18 Show All Network Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic Ea Show Built in Ethernet ka TY PPPoE RApeT ale proxies Using DHCP ia Domain Name Servers Optional 168 95 1 1 Confiqure 192 168 11 12 Provided by DHCP Server 255 255 254 0 IP Address Subnet Mask Search Domains Optional Router 192 168 10 11 DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff on a Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure box select Manually e Type your IP address in the IP Address box e Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box e Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Appen
188. acks The IPSec receiver can detect and reject old or duplicate packets to protect against replay attacks Enable replay detection by setting this field to Yes DNS Server for IPSec If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN type its IP address here VPN The Prestige assigns this additional DNS server to the Prestige s DHCP clients that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule s range of local addresses A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their private domain names Local Address The local IP address must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router s configured remote IP addresses Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Local Port Start 0 is the default and signifies any port Type a port number from 0 to 65535 Some of the most common IP ports are 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POP3 Local Port End Enter a port number in this field to define a port range This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field or equal to it for configuring an individual port Remote Address Start Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router s configured local IP addresses The remote address fields do not apply when the Secure Gateway Address field is
189. affic Redirect 118 119 Translation 2 Trigger Port Forwarding 311 Process 143 TV Technician 3 U Undesired Operations 3 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 228 UNIX Syslog 354 Upload Firmware 369 URL Keyword Blocking 153 Use Server Detected IP 269 User Name 244 268 User Specified IP Addr 269 483 V Value 5 Vendor 4 Ventilation Slots 4 Viewing Certifications 3 VoIP 211 Voltage Supply 4 Voltage High 4 VPN 114 VPN monitor 58 W Wall Mount 4 WAN advanced 116 WAN DHCP 359 360 WAN IP address assignment 71 WAN MAC address 72 WAN Setup 270 WAN Wizard 66 Warnings 4 Warranty 5 Warranty Information 6 Warranty Period 5 Water 4 Water Pipes 4 Web 219 Web Configurator 48 49 315 Web Proxy 153 199 Web Site 6 WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy 43 WEP Encryption 87 89 WEP encryption 86 Wet Basement 4 Wi Fi Multimedia QoS 103 Wi Fi Protected Access 88 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA 43 Wireless association list summary 56 Wireless Client WPA Supplicants 89 Wireless LAN MAC Address Filtering 43 Wireless LAN Wizard 62 Wireless security 82 WLAN Interference 458 Security parameters 467 Workmanship 5 Worldwide Contact Information 6 Index WPA 88 Written Permission 2 WWW 108 www dyndns org 268 Z ZyNOS 2 352 363 ZyNOS F W Version 352 363 ZyXEL Communications Corporation 2 ZyXEL Home Page 3 ZyXEL Limited Warranty Note 5 ZyXEL Network Operating System 2 Index P 335
190. aged network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the Prestige An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices Chapter 35 SNMP Configuration 346 P 335 Series User s Guide The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include the number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations 1 Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent 2 GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations 3 Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables w
191. agement Protocol SNMP is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a member of the TCP IP protocol suite Your Prestige supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Prestige through the network The Prestige supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two SNMPv2 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation Note SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens 222 P 335 Series User s Guide 223 Figure 123 SNMP Management Model MANAGER Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the Prestige An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of acces
192. ain name up to 31 characters by which to identify this Prestige Type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify this Prestige The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail address Table 70 Peer ID Type and Content Fields PEER ID TYPE CONTENT Type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection or leave the field blank to have the Prestige automatically use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field Type a domain name up to 31 characters by which to identify the remote IPSec router Type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify the remote IPSec router The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail address The domain name also does not have to match the remote router s IP address or what you configure in the Secure Gateway Address field below 13 8 1 ID Type and Content Examples Two IPSec routers must have matching ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN tunnel Chapter 13 VPN Screens 170 P 335 Series User s Guide The two Prestiges in this example can complete negotiation and establish a VPN tunnel Table 71 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example PRESTIGE A PRESTIGE B Local ID type
193. al network topology all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the Prestige to protect your LAN against attacks Figure 309 Ideal Setup K d The Triangle Route Problem A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices Some companies have more than one alternate route to one or more ISPs If the LAN and ISP s are in the same subnet the triangle route problem may occur The steps below describe the triangle route problem 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN 2 The Prestige reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway B on the LAN to the WAN 3 The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the Prestige As a result the Prestige resets the connection as the connection has not been acknowledged Appendix L Triangle Route 474 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 310 Triangle Route Problem Internet weal The Triangle Route Solutions This section presents you two solutions to the triangle route problem IP Aliasing IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface Your Prestige supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the Prestige being the gateway for each logical network By putting your LAN and Gateway B in different subnets all returning network t
194. al private networking over public networks such as the Internet Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP Note The Prestige supports one PPTP server connection at any given time Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 68 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 27 PPTP Connection Type STEP 2 STEPS Es Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type User Name Password Get automatically from ISP Default Use fixed IP address My IP Address My IP Subnet Mask Server IP Address Connection ID Name The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 18 PPTP Connection Type LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above PPTP Configuration Get automatically Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address from ISP Use fixed IP Select this radio button provided by your ISP to give the Prestige a fixed unique address IP address My IP Address Type the static IP address assigned to you by your ISP My IP Subnet Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given Mask Server IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server Connection ID Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field It must follow the c id Name and n name format For example C 12 or N My
195. alog box displays the security mode and the WEP key or pre shared key depending on which mode is configured Click OK to proceed with the OTIST setup 99 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 48 OTIST Start E AN The security is WPA PSK mode on WLAN now The key is 12345678 Note The process takes three minutes During this time the Prestige assigns its security settings to OTIST enabled wireless clients within range that have selected to associate with this Prestige Figure 49 OTIST Process OTIST in Progress Please wait a moment about 172 Seconds When the previous screen closes your current Prestige security configuration is automatically saved to the wireless clients Note See your wireless client documentation for information on enabling OTIST on it If there are multiple OTIST enabled Prestiges within range and with the same OTIST setup key then the wireless client must choose which Prestige should assign its settings to it 5 5 2 OTIST button Use the OTIST button to set up OTIST using the current OTIST Setup Key and the Prestige s current wireless security settings 1 Log out of your current configuration management session 2 Push the OTIST button once on the back panel of the Prestige device to enable OTIST 5 6 MAC Filter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the Prestige to give exclusive access to up to 32 devices Allow or exclude up to 32 devices from a
196. and enable WEP encryption click Wireless LAN and Wireless to the display the Wireless screen 5 4 3 WEP Encryption Screen In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the Wireless screen Select Static WEP from the Security list Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 86 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 39 Wireless Static WEP Encryption Wireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz v Security Security Mode Static WEP D Passphrase D 2345 Generate WEP Encryption 54 bit WEP DN Authentication Method Auto v NT Note 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 256 bit WEP Enter 29 characters or 58 digit 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission ASCII Hex keyi oxe235485511 Key 2 Ox292bbS51beo C Key 3 fOx3dcdz2008 C Key4 ox97c74da650 Apply The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 31 Wireless Static WEP Encryption LABEL DESCRIPTION Passphrase Enter a Passphrase up to 32 printable characters and clicking Generate The Prestige automatically generates a WEP key WEP Select 64 bit WEP 128 bit WEP or
197. andwidth Management Example nnannannannnnnnnnnnnnnnn 207 16 1 3 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example 207 16 1 4 Bandwidth Usage Example nnannannnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnennnnnnnrnnnnnnnn 208 16 1 5 Bandwidth Management Priorities rrrrrrnrrnanennnnnnnrnranrvanennnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnn 210 16 1 6 Bandwidth Management Services rrrrnnnrnnnnennnnrrnnnennnnennnnnnnnnnennnennnnne 210 16 2 Bandwidth Management Configuration Screen ararnrrnnnrrnnrnrnrnranennnrnnnnnnnnnn 213 16 3 Bandwidth Management Rule and Filter rrrnrnnnrvnnnnnnnnrvnnnrnnnrrrvnnrnnnnernnnennnn 214 eee EEE EE ER 214 Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens rxrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnuunnn 218 17 1 Remote Management Overview rrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnanrnanennnrnnnrnnanenannnanrnanennnnnnnsne 218 17 1 1 Remote Management Limitations rnnnnnnnrnanrnnnnnnnrnnanrvanrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnn 218 17 1 2 Remote Management and NAT cccccccseeceeeceeeeceeeseeseeeeeeeeaeeesaeess 219 FARE Sor m IEOU REE ee RR ERT 219 SER SEE EE T 219 VG 220 ke NTE acto rein nse ieee 220 VPT NN 221 be TE 222 EC EE PE ERE 224 ET EE REN EET 224 TF ee 224 EE SE ee 226 RN se RE MERE Se EE MR ee 226 Chapter 18 PT NG 228 18 1 Universal Plug and Play Overview susemenenimseneimneseeieiemeemveiae ie 228 18 1 1 How Do I Know If l m Using UPnP TEE 228 SE GT EE 228 EST EE EE PE 22
198. anges back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes Chapter 15 Static Route Screens 204 P 335 Series User s Guide 205 Chapter 15 Static Route Screens P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 16 Bandwidth Management This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management editing rules and viewing the Prestige s bandwidth management logs 16 1 Bandwidth Management Overview ZyXEL s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application and or subnet You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to different bandwidth rules The Prestige applies bandwidth management to traffic that it forwards out through an interface The Prestige does not control the bandwidth of traffic that comes into an interface Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router regardless of the traffic s source Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN to LAN traffic to pass through the Prestige and be managed by bandwidth management e The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface WAN to LAN LAN to WAN WAN to WAN Prestige must be less than or equal to the WAN BW Budget that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Configuration screen e The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port LAN to WAN WAN to LAN LAN to LAN Prestige must be less
199. assigned default MAC Address Clone the Click Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP address Computer e MAC of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully address configured the address will be copied to the rom file ZyNOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 4 3 PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet The screen shown next is for PPTP encapsulation Chapter 6 WAN 114 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 56 PPTP Encapsulation Internet Connection ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation User Name Password Retype to Confirm Nailed Up Connection Idle Timeout sec 100 fin seconds PPTP Configuration C Get automatically from ISP Default amp Use Fixed IP Address My IP Address 2101923142 My IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 240 Server IP Address booo Connection ID Name WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Default C Use Fixed IP Ad
200. assword Recent Virus Outbreak E PE ELKERN D is a high risk alert DPE YALLA is a low risk alert E PE FUNLOVE 4099 is a medium alert D WORM LOVGATE G is low risk alert SB TROJ NTSERV A is low risk alert Online Support Technical Support Search our Knowledge Base FAQ Antivirus Resources I think my computer is infected what should I do Antivirus and Security Tips Subscribe to our FREE You need a Parental Control license to activate configure Parental Control categories on the Prestige see Figure 108 on page 198 The following screen is an example of theParental Control screen with TMSS activated Figure 104 Example TMSS Activated Parental Controls Screen BREY Home Network Security Services Home Service Summary Security Scan Parental Controls The table below provides the number of attempts and actual times a Web site belonging to a certain category was accessed As of 01 01 2004 Category Name Actual Accesses Pornography Alcohol Tobacco lllegal Questionable violence Hate Racism Abortion 1 0 5 Gambling 1 1 0 0 Illegal Drugs To change these settings login to use your router Web console user name and password After the free trial expires you can buy the Trend micro Internet Security TIS package This package contains anti virus software and a license for Parental Control to forbid access to undesirable web site content based o
201. atched Forward Press ENTER tO Confirm Or ESC to Cancel Press Space Bar to Toggle e Select Yes from the Active field to activate this rule e 61s the TCP IP Protocol e The Port for the telnet service TCP protocol is 23 See RFC 1060 for port numbers of well known services e Select Equal from the Port Comp field as you are looking for packets going to port 23 only e Select Drop in the Action Matched field so that the packet will be dropped if its destination is the telnet port e Select Forward from the Action Not Matched field so that the packet will be forwarded if its destination is not the telnet port e Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to choose this filter rule type The first filter rule type determines all subsequent filter types within a set When you press ENTER to confirm you will see the following screen Note that there is only one filter rule in this set Chapter 34 Filter Configuration 342 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 205 Example Filter Rules Summary Menu 21 1 3 Menu 21 1 3 Filter Rules Summary Filter Rules SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 it al 2 3 4 5 6 Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 to Configure This shows you that you have configured and activated A Y a TCP IP filter rule Type IP Pr 6 for destination telnet ports DP 23 M N means an action can be taken immediately The action is to drop the packet m D if the action is matched and to forward the packet
202. ation e Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication phase 1 However the trade off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder and both parties want to use pre shared key authentication 13 11 2 Diffie Hellman DH Key Groups Diffie Hellman DH is a public key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel Diffie Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys 768 bit Group DH1 and 1024 bit Group 2 DH2 Diffie Hellman groups are supported Upon completion of the Diffie Hellman exchange the two peers have a shared secret but the IKE SA 1s not authenticated For authentication use pre shared keys 13 11 3 Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS Enabling PFS means that the key is transient The key is thrown away and replaced by a brand new key using a new Diffie Hellman exchange for each new IPSec SA setup With PFS enabled if one key is compromised previous and subsequent keys are not compromised because subsequent keys are not derived from previous keys The time consuming Diffie Hellman exchange 1s the trade off for this extra security Chapter 13 VPN Screens 176 P 335 Series User s Guide
203. ation on filename conventions 8 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt The Prestige will automatically restart after a successful restore process Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 368 P 335 Series User s Guide 37 3 2 Restore Using FTP Session Example Figure 223 Restore Using FTP Session Example EE put configs rom ron 0 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR rom 0 226 File received OK 221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp 16384 bytes sent in 0 06Seconds 273 07Kbytes sec fep gurt 37 4 Uploading Firmware and Configuration Files This section shows you how to upload firmware and configuration files You can upload configuration files by following the procedure in the previous Restore Configuration section or by following the instructions in Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance Upload System Configuration File Note WARNING Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE YOUR Prestige 37 4 1 Firmware File Upload FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client When you telnet into the Prestige you will see the following screens for uploading firmware and the configuration file using FTP 369 Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 224 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 1 Upload System Firmware Menu 24 7 1 System Ma
204. bnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router Remote Port Start 0 is the default and signifies any port Type a port number from 0 to 65535 Some of the most common IP ports are 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POP3 Remote Port End Enter a port number in this field to define a port range This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field If Remote Port Start is left at 0 Remote Port End will also remain at 0 DNS Server for IPSec If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN type its IP address VPN here The Prestige assigns this additional DNS server to the Prestige s DHCP clients that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule s range of local addresses A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their private domain names My IP Address Enter the WAN IP address of your Prestige The Prestige uses its current WAN IP address static or dynamic in setting up the VPN tunnel if you leave this field as 0 0 0 0 The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if this IP address changes Secure Gateway IP Type the WAN IP address or the URL up to 31 characters of the IPSec Address router with which you re making the VPN connection Type a number base 10 from 1 to 999999 for the Security Parameter Index Encapsulation Mode Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop down list box Enable Replay As a VPN setup is processing intensive
205. bring up the following menu Chapter 38 System Maintenance 376 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 231 Menu 24 9 2 Call History Menu 24 9 2 Call History Phone Number Dir Rate call Max Min Total O kO OANA Oa FP WN EF H Enter Entry to Delete 0 to exit The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 149 Call History Fields r This is the length of time of the longest telephone call This is the length of time of the shortest telephone call This is the total length of time of all the telephone calls to from that telephone number DU You may enter an entry number to delete it or 0 to exit 38 3 Time and Date Setting The Real Time Chip RTC keeps track of the time and date not available on all models There is also a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Prestige Menu 24 10 allows you to update the time and date settings of your Prestige The real time is then displayed in the Prestige error logs and firewall logs Select menu 24 in the main menu to open Menu 24 System Maintenance as shown next 377 Chapter 38 System Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 232 Menu 24 System Maintenance Menu 24 System Maintenance LO OO JJ On OF WN EF kA OO e Lis System Status System Information and Console Port Speed Log and Trace Dragnostrc Backup Configuration Restore Confi
206. cal algorithm called Rijndael The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC TKIP makes it much more difficult to decode data on a Wi Fi network than WEP making it difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs an easier to use consistent single alphanumeric password Appendix Wireless LANs 466 P 335 Series User s Guide Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each Authentication Method key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 172 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD KEY AA ENABLE IEEE 802 1X M
207. cation is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority The Prestige automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed The default time interval is 3600 seconds or 1 hour Authentication Server IP Address Port Number Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide Table 36 Wireless 802 1x and No WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the Prestige The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Prestige The key is not sent over the network Accounting Server Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server The default port n
208. ccessing the Prestige Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen To change your Prestige s MAC filter settings click the Wireless LAN link under Network and then the MAC Filter tab The screen appears as shown Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 100 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 50 MAC Address Filter MAC Address Filter I Active Filter Action e Allow C Deny re MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 17 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 18 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 19 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 26 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 28 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 29 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 Apply Reset 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 38 MAC Address Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Deny to block access to the Prestige MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the Prestige Select Allow to per
209. ces such as PPPoE or PP TP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN Allow between LAN and Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN Allow Trigger Dial Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 6 Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet through its normal gateway Connect the backup gateway on the WAN so that the Prestige still provides firewall protection Figure 58 Traffic Redirect WAN Setup N we Backup Gateway Na The following network topology allows you to avoid triangle route security issues see the Appendices when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN Use IP alias to configure the LAN into two or three logical networks with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network Put the protected LAN in one subnet Subnet 1 in t
210. cking the remaining rules D means to drop the packet N means to check the next rule The protocol dependent filter rules abbreviation are listed as follows Table 135 Rule Abbreviations Used ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION Protocol Source Address Source Port number Destination Address Destination Port number Refer to the next section for information on configuring the filter rules 34 2 1 Configuring a Filter Rule To configure a filter rule type its number in Menu 21 1 1 Filter Rules Summary and press ENTER to open menu 21 1 1 1 for the rule To speed up filtering all rules in a filter set must be of the same class 1 e protocol filters or generic filters The class of a filter set 1s determined by the first rule that you create When applying the filter sets to a port separate menu fields are provided for protocol and device filter sets If you include a protocol filter set in a device filter field or vice versa the Prestige will warn you and will not allow you to save 34 2 2 Configuring a TCP IP Filter Rule This section shows you how to configure a TCP IP filter rule TCP IP rules allow you to base the rule on the fields in the IP and the upper layer protocol for example UDP and TCP headers Chapter 34 Filter Configuration 336 P 335 Series User s Guide To configure TCP IP rules select TCP IP Filter Rule from the Filter Type field and press ENTER to open Menu 21 1 1 1 TCP IP Filter
211. cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Figure 30 VWAN MAC Address Es Internet Configuration Users configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from computer on your LAN Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address Alternatively select Spoof this Computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LON whose MAC address you are cloning Factory default Spoof this computer s MAC Address The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 23 WAN MAC Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Factory Default Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address Spoof this Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose computer s MAC MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be address copied to the rom file ZyNOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different rom file It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication Click Back to return to the previous screen Click Next to continue 3 4 10 Connection Wizard Complete Follow the on screen instructions and click Apply to complete the wizard setup and save your configuration 73 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard P 335 Series User s Gu
212. configure your Prestige for Internet access 27 1 Introduction to Internet Access Setup Use information from your ISP along with the instructions in this chapter to set up your Prestige to access the Internet There are three different menu 4 screens depending on whether you chose Ethernet PPTP or PPPoE Encapsulation Contact your ISP to determine what encapsulation type you should use 2 2 Ethernet Encapsulation From the main menu type 4 to display Menu 4 Internet Access Setup If you choose Ethernet in menu 4 you will see the next menu Chapter 27 Internet Access 2 8 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 154 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation Ethernet Service Type Standard My Login N A My Password N A Retype to Confirm N A Login Server N A Relogin Every min N A IP Address Assignment Dynamic IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A Gateway IP Address N A Network Address Translation SUA Only Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 114 Internet Access Setup Ethernet FIELD DESCRIPTION ISP s Name Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider e g mylSP This information is for identification purposes only Encapsulation Press SPACE BAR and then press ENTER to choose Ethernet The encapsulation method influences your choices for the IP Address field Service Type Press
213. connects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows 1 Telnet 2 HTTP 17 1 1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when 1 A filter in SMT menu 3 1 LAN or in menu 11 5 WAN is applied to block a Telnet FTP or Web service 2 You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens 218 P 335 Series User s Guide 3 The IP address in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately 4 There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time 5 There is a firewall rule that blocks it 17 1 2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled e Use the Prestige s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN e Use the Prestige s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 17 1 3 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The Prestige automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when a statistics screen 1s polling You can change
214. controls l Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe dl Fun Actives controls and plug ins Administrator approved Reset custom settings Reset to Medium 403 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications See also the Introduction chapter for a general overview of the key features Specification Tables Table 160 Device Dimensions P 335 150 W x 190 D x 22 H mm P 335WT 190 W x 133 D x 32 H mm Weight P 335 381g P 335WT 424g Table 161 Firmware Standards IEEE 802 3 Ethernet IEEE 802 3u Fast Ethernet TCP UDP ICMP ARP RIP 1 RIP 2 IP Routing RFC 791 PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 MAC encapsulated routing ENET encapsulation Other Protocol Support PPP Point to Point Protocol link layer protocol Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols DHCP Server Client Relay RIP I RIP II ICMP ATM QoS SNMP v1 and v2c with MIB II support RFC 1213 IP Multicasting IGMP v1 and v2 IGMP Proxy UPnP Appendix A Product Specifications 404 P 335 Series User s Guide 405 Table 161 Firmware continued Management Wireless P 335WT only NAT SUA Trend Micro Security Service Content Filtering Static Routes Other Features Embedded Web Configurator Menu driven SMT System Management Terminal management CLI Command Line Interpreter Remote Management via Te
215. copies of both files for later use Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 362 P 335 Series User s Guide The following table is a summary Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the Prestige and the external filename refers to the filename not on the Prestige that is on your computer local network or FTP site and so the name but not the extension may vary After uploading new firmware see the ZyNOS F W Version field in Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version The AT command is the command you enter after you press y when prompted in the SMT menu to go into debug mode Table 145 Filename Conventions FILE TYPE INTERNAL NAME EXTERNAL NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration This is the configuration filename on the File Prestige Uploading the rom 0 file replaces the entire ROM file system including your Prestige configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware Ras This is the generic name for the ZyNOS bi firmware on the Prestige 37 2 Backup Configuration Option 5 from Menu 24 System Maintenance allows you to backup the current Prestige configuration to your computer Backup is highly recommended once your Prestige is functioning properly FTP is the preferred methods for backing up your current configuration to your computer since they are fas
216. creen Click the LAN link under Network to open the IP screen 125 Chapter 7 LAN P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 62 LAN IP awed LAN TCP IP IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 LAN IP LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN TCP IP IP Address Type the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige 255 255 255 0 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 5 IP Alias Screen IP Alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network To change your Prestige s IP Alias settings click the LAN link under Network and the IP Alias tab The screen appears as shown Chapter 7 LAN 126 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 63 IP Alias IP Alias IP Alias 1 IP Alias 1 IP Address IP Subnet Mask RIP Direction RIP Version IP Alias 2
217. cribes the labels in this screen Table 76 Global Setting Windows Networking NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast NetBIOS over TCP IP packets that enable a computer to find other computers It may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through VPN tunnels in order to allow local computers to find computers on the remote network and vice versa Allow Through IP Sec Select this check box to send NetBIOS packets through the VPN Tunnel connection Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 17 Telecommuter VPN IPSec Examples The following examples show how multiple telecommuters can make VPN connections to a single Prestige at headquarters from remote IPSec routers that use dynamic WAN IP addresses 13 17 1 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example Multiple telecommuters can use one VPN rule to simultaneously access a Prestige at headquarters They must all use the same IPSec parameters including the pre shared key but the local IP addresses or ranges of addresses cannot overlap See the following table and figure for an example 187 Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Having everyone use the same pre shared key may create a vulnerability If the pre shared key is compromised all of the VPN connections using that VPN rule are at risk A recommended alternative is to use a different VP
218. d The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 Maintenance Firmware Upload LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Note Do not turn off the Prestige while firmware upload is in progress After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen wait two minutes before logging into the Prestige again Chapter 22 Tools 254 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 135 Upload Warning Firmware Upload In Process Lem G d Please Wait Please wait for the device to finish restarting PWR LED is on steady This should take about two minutes To access the device after a successful firmware upload you need to log in again Check your new firmware version in the system status menu The Prestige automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 136 Network Temporarily Disconnected ES Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the f
219. d below This field is normally left blank Domain Name zy xel com ty The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Connection Wizard System Information LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the Prestige in an Ethernet network Enter a descriptive name This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Domain Name Type the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen 3 3 Connection Wizard Wireless LAN P 335WT Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 62 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 20 Connection Wizard Wireless LAN STEP 2 ES WIRELESS LAN The SSID 1s the name given to your wireless network It may be possible to see multiple wireless networks from your home or office so choose name that you will be able to recognize later Name SSID FyxEL Channel Selection Channel 06 e Security AutonPA PSK with self generated key e The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Connection Wizard Wireless LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Name SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for t
220. d you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured Click the DHCP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here relates to your DHCP status The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of all network clients using the Prestige s DHCP server Figure 10 Summary DHCP Table DHCP Table IP Address lost Name MAC Address 192 166 1 33 tw11477 02 00 50 8d 48 59 1f Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Summary DHCP Table mem gt MAC Address _ This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name field Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Click Refresh to renew the screen 2 4 4 Summary Parental Controls Statistics Click the Parental Control Statistics Details hyperlink in the Status screen This screen displays a record of attempted entries to web pages or actual entries to web pages from a list of categories 55 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 11 Summary Parental Control Statistics Parental Controls Statistics Category Access Attempts Actual Accesses Pornography Alcohol Tobacco Ilegal
221. d Key The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Extend WPA2 PSK and WPA2 PSK Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Shared Type from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters You can set up the most secure Key wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens You need to configure an authentication server to do this Click Back to display the previous screen Click Next to proceed to the next screen 3 3 3 OTIST The following screen allows you to enable Prestige One Touch Intelligent Security Technology OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology OTIST allows your Prestige to assign wireless clients the Prestige s SSID and static WEP or WPA PSK encryption settings The wireless client must also support OTIST and have OTIST enabled See section 5 5 for more information 65 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 23 OTIST SERS STEP StTer 3a ff wireless LAN You previously had Static WEP security enabled on your wireless LAN OTIST will automatically configure the SSID and security settings on both your router and your wireless clients In order for this to work you must be using ZymEL ZY IR client adaptors that support OTIST The OTIST configuration process may take up to 3 minutes Please type in unique setup key This key acts like a password to ensure only those wireless LAN devices you authorize are configured by OTIST This key sh
222. d contents but not the new headers are signed with a hash value appended to the packet Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload which is unchanged by a NAT device Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT although NAT traversal provides a way to use Transport mode ESP when there is a NAT router between the IPSec endpoints the NAT Traversal section for details Table 66 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NAT I Chapter 12 Introduction to IPSec 162 P 335 Series User s Guide 163 Chapter 12 Introduction to IPSec P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 13 VPN Screens This chapter introduces the VPN Web Configurator See the Logs chapter for information on viewing logs and the Appendices for IPSec log descriptions 13 1 VPN IPSec Overview Use the screens documented in this chapter to configure rules for VPN connections and manage VPN connections 13 2 IPSec Algorithms The ESP and AH protocols are necessary to create a Security SA the foundation of an IPSec VPN An SA is built from the authentication provided by the AH and ESP protocols The primary function of key management is to establish and maintain the SA between systems Once the SA is established the transport of data may commence 13 2 1 AH Authentication Header Protocol AH protocol RFC 2402 was
223. d with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind of character to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country D ZyXEL Limited Warranty P 335 Series User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support e Product model and serial number e Warranty Information e Date that you received your device e Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TE
224. de 469 Appendix Wireless LANs P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix J Antenna Selection and Positioning Recommendation An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Choosing the right antennas and positioning them properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signa
225. der Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box The Prestige s purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network LAN to be securely connected to the Internet The Prestige can be used to prevent theft destruction and modification of data as well as log events which may be important to the security of your network The Prestige is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN Chapter 10 Firewall 146 P 335 Series User s Guide The Prestige has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports which are used to physically separate the network into two areas The WAN Wide Area Network port attaches to the broadband cable or DSL modem to the Internet The LAN Local Area Network port attaches to a network of computers which needs security from the outside world These computers will have access to Internet services such as e mail FTP and the World Wide Web However inbound access is not allowed by default unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service 10 1 4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 1 Change the default password via web configurator 2 Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way including attaching a modem to the port 3 Limit who can access your router 4 Don t enable any local service such as SNMP or NTP that
226. designed for integrity authentication sequence integrity replay resistance and non repudiation but not for confidentiality for which the ESP was designed In applications where confidentiality is not required or not sanctioned by government encryption restrictions an AH can be employed to ensure integrity This type of implementation does not protect the information from dissemination but will allow for verification of the integrity of the information and authentication of the originator 13 2 2 ESP Encapsulating Security Payload Protocol The ESP protocol RFC 2406 provides encryption as well as the services offered by AH ESP authenticating properties are limited compared to the AH due to the non inclusion of the IP header information during the authentication process However ESP is sufficient if only the upper layer protocols need to be authenticated An added feature of the ESP is payload padding which further protects communications by concealing the size of the packet being transmitted Chapter 13 VPN Screens 164 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 67 AH and ESP DE JE Encryption DES default Data Encryption Standard DES is a widely used method of data encryption using a secret key DES applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data Triple DES 3DES is a variant of DES which iterates three times with three separate keys 3 x 56 168 bits effectively doubling the strength of DES Advanced Encryption S
227. dio server port 7070 143 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide 2 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the Prestige to record Jane s computer IP address The Prestige associates Jane s computer IP address with the incoming port range of 6970 7170 3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970 7170 4 The Prestige forwards the traffic to Jane s computer IP address 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out The Prestige times out in three minutes with UDP User Datagram Protocol or two hours with TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol 9 6 2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 1 Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the Prestige and going to the outside 2 If an application needs a continuous data stream that port range will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN can t trigger it 9 7 Trigger Port Forwarding Screen To change your Prestige s trigger port settings click the NAT link under Network and the Trigger Port tab The screen appears as shown Note Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port range at a time Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 144 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 75 Trigger Port Trigger Port Port Triggering Rules Start Port End Port Start Port End Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
228. dix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 454 P 335 Series User s Guide 455 Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless stations A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an Ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an Ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 302 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network SES B C d BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Appendix Wireless LANs 456 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 303 Basic Service Set 7
229. down list and then click Add to add a service to the Blocked Service Delete Select a service from the Blocked Services List and then click Delete to remove this service from the list Clear All Click Clear All to empty the Blocked Service Day to Block Select a check box to configure which days of the week or everyday you want the content filtering to be active Chapter 10 Firewall P 335 Series User s Guide Table 63 Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Time of Day to Block Select the time of day you want service blocking to take effect Configure 24 Hour Format blocking to take effect all day by selecting the All Day check box You can also configure specific times that by entering the start time in the Start hr and Start min fields and the end time in the End hr and End min fields Enter times in 24 hour format for example 3 00pm should be entered as 15 00 Apply Click Apply to save the settings Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again Chapter 10 Firewall 150 P 335 Series User s Guide 151 Chapter 10 Firewall P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 11 Content Filtering This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded WebGUI 11 1 Introduction to Content Filtering Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to their needs Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL
230. dr displayed of the IPSec router with which you are making the VPN connection This field displays 0 0 0 0 when you configure the Secure Gateway Addr field in SMT 27 1 1 to 0 0 0 0 Select Press SPACE BAR to choose from None Edit Delete Go To Rule Next Page or Command Previous Page and then press ENTER You must select a rule in the next field when you choose the Edit Delete or Go To commands Select None and then press ENTER to go to the Press ENTER to Confirm prompt Use Edit to create or edit a rule Use Delete to remove a rule To edit or delete a rule first make sure you are on the correct page When a VPN rule is deleted subsequent rules do not move up in the page list Use Go To Rule to view the page where your desired rule is listed Select Next Page or Previous Page to view the next or previous page of rules respectively Select Rule Type the VPN rule index number you wish to edit or delete and then press ENTER When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 319 Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 192 Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup Index 1 Name Taiwan Active Yes Keep Alive No Nat Traversal No Local ID type Content My IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Peer ID type IP Content Secure Gateway Address zw50test zyxel com tw Protocol 0 DNS Se
231. dress My WAN IP Address Remote IP Address Remote IP Subnet Mask Metric Private WAN MAC Address VM Spoof WAN MAC Address Clone the computer s MAC address IP Addressf192 168 1 33 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 PPTP Encapsulation ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet The Prestige supports only one PPTP server connection at any given time To configure a PPTP client you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the Prestige automatically disconnects from the PPTP server 115 Chapter 6 WAN P 335 Series User s Guide Table 46 PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION PPTP Configuration My IP Address Type the static IP address assigned to you by your ISP My IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige Server IP Address
232. dress ranges from the Selected IP Addresses list box from Parental Controls the Parental Control enforcement Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services 196 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 79 Exception List LABEL DESCRIPTION Available IP Addresses This box displays the IP addresses of all TMSS clients Selected IP Addresses This box displays the IP addresses of the computer s chosen from the Available IP Addresses box to which you want to apply or exclude from Parental Controls Select an IP address es in the Available IP Addresses list box and click Add gt gt to move it them to the Selected IP Addresses box Select an IP address es in the Selected IP Addresses list box and click lt lt Remove to move it them to the Available IP Addresses list box Apply Click Apply to save the settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 14 4 Virus Protection Screen 197 Select the Virus Protection tab in the TMSS main screen Figure 99 on page 191 to display the following screen The anti virus software is part of the TIS package see the footnote on page 193 The virus pattern and the scan engine are both version numbers related to the anti virus software Figure 107 Virus Protection Virus Protection Client Antivirus Protection Status Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Virus Protection LABEL DESCRIPTION Client Antivirus Protectio
233. dresses click Add e In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add e Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add e Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways e In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric e Click Add e Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add e Click OK when finished Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 450 P 335 Series User s Guide 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP e Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es e Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them Figure 297 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration fou can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Othenwise you need to ask your network administrator f
234. dwidth Management Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Port Enter the port number of the source See Table 86 for some common services and port numbers Protocol Enter the protocol service type number for example 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP or 17 for UDP Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh Delete Click Delete to remove a rule configuration Chapter 16 216 P 335 Series User s Guide 217 Chapter 16 P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 17 Remote Management Screens This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens 17 1 Remote Management Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which Prestige interface if any from which computers Note When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access See the firewall chapters for details on configuring firewall rules You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via e Internet WAN only e ALL LAN and WAN e LAN only e Neither Disable Note When you Choose WAN only or ALL LAN amp WAN you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field You may only have one remote management session running at a time The Prestige automatically dis
235. e ccccssccceccceeeceeeceeeeseeesaeeeeesees 67 Figure 25 Ethernet Connection Type ccccccccsccceeeceecceeeceeeeceeceeeccueecueeceeseeessaeeeaeesaeeeeas 67 MUNTER 68 PUPP NON TEGN 69 FO EE 70 Figure 29 IP and DNS Server Address Assignment ccceccsseeceeeceeeceeeseueecseeseeesaeesees 72 Figure 30 WAN MAC Address cic ccwanains acadnatconnesatoatancendgaeaveceseancavnacevancenceednoseuedeeceansvnaceaanaenans Ze Figure 31 Connection Wizard Complete vunne gaselle eee deuecvawesonae 74 Figure 32 Welcome to the Bandwidth Management Wizard rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnvrennnrrennnrrennnnn 76 Figure 33 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information if Figure 34 Bandwidth Management Wizard Services rrrnnurennnrennnnennnrennnnennnnennnnennnnnnnnnnn 78 Figure 35 Bandwidth Management Wizard Priority rrrarernnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnenanrnnnnrnnennnnnnnnennn 79 Figure 36 Bandwidth Management Wizard Complete rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnrnnnrennnnennnnen 79 List of Figures 22 P 335 Series User s Guide 23 PT NN tte 85 FE KE NO SOU EE Aaa nae aaria 86 Figure 39 Wireless Static WEP Encryption acciciccsinscavesedunissuecedacccsnaneionxeiwansosndvanupetecexueensnone 87 Figure 40 WPA 2 PSK Authentication sasccicirensahcccaiela danse rcnadsnadedaniu lars Edge 88 Figure 41 Wireless WPA PSK TT 89 Figure 42 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example rrrnnrrnnnnrrnnnnnvrnnnnrvrnnnennnnnnrnnnernn
236. e get rom 0 config rom transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it config rom See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 364 P 335 Series User s Guide 37 2 3 Example of FTP Commands from the Command Line Figure 221 FTP Session Example 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp gt bin 200 Type I OK ftp gt get rom O zyxel rom 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp 16384 bytes sent in 1 10Seconds 297 8 9Kbytes sec frp Cure 37 2 4 GUl based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 146 General Commands for GUl based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory path In
237. e 100 TMSS Service Summary Home Se 2 mma Security Scan Parental Controls Service Summary My Services 3 You still need to activate your services and only have 59 days to continue using Security Scan Activate now to take full advantage of Trend Micro Security Services including unlimited use of Security Scan Service Name Status Action Security Scan 60 day trial 59 days left Internet Security antivirus anti spam Not activated personal firewall l Activate My Services Parental Controls Not activated 4 Click Next to begin the process as outlined in the screen 191 Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 101 TMSS 3 Steps y15EN2 Home Network Security Services Home Service Summary Security Scan Parental Controls Three Easy Steps to Activate Your Service Register a Trend Micro Customer Account which allows you to easily manage different licenses under the same account Validate your email address by following the instructions in the email Download amp Install trend micro internet Security Service on your home network PCs 5 Fill in the registration form and submit it Figure 102 TMSS Registration Form Register a Trend Micro Customer Account Please enter the following Already Registered with Trend Micro SIGN IN NOW First name User ID is the same as your Trend Micro Customer Care Center ID Last name
238. e Prestige Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer 5 Use the TFTP client see the example below to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer The file name for the firmware is ras Note that the telnet connection must be active and the Prestige in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer For details on TFTP commands see following example please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program For UNIX use get to transfer from the Prestige to the computer put the other way around and binary to set binary transfer mode 37 4 6 TFTP Upload Command Example The following is an example TFTP command trep 2 Host put firmware bin ras where 1 specifies binary image transfer mode use this mode when transferring binary files host is the Prestige s IP address and put transfers the file source on the computer firmware bin name of the firmware on the computer to the file destination on the remote host ras name of the firmware on the Prestige Commands that you may see in GUI based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 372 P 335 Series User s Guide 373 Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 38 System Maintenance This chapter leads you through SMT menus 24 8 to 24 10 38 1 Command Interpreter Mode The Command I
239. e Prestige so you should see a Trend Micro screen after you launch your web browser to connect to the Internet via the Prestige for the first time You might not see this screen if you have a web pop up blocker enabled so disable it or manually enter http tmss trendmicro com dashboard as the URL Click Continue to go to the Active X control installation page Figure 97 TMSS First Time Access Congratulations You have successfully installed your router and connected to the Internet Trend Micro Security Services are integrated with chosen hardware routers and once activated help protect multiple PCs on network from viruses and other Internet threats Trend Micro Security Services are specifically designed to address the security needs of multiple PCs accessing the Internet via a broadband router Click Continue to start taking advantage of Trend Micro Security Services that were included with your router Note You need to download an ActiveX control The file is approximately 200KB and will takes 5 seconds to download mm ven ZyXEL WIC RO Secuit services Unieseh Networking Power 1 Download the ActiveX control to view the TMSS web page dashboard Note Make sure that you have not restricted access to ActiveX Cookies or Web Proxy features in the Prestige or web browser or you will not be able to access the TMSS web page Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services 190 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 98 Download Activ
240. e Type Standard Session Options Service Name N A Edit Filter Sets No Outgoing My Login N A My Password N A Edit Traffic Redirect No Retype to Confirm N A Server N A Relogin Every min N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 117 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for Ethernet Encapsulation FIELD DESCRIPTION Rem Node Name Enter a descriptive name for the remote node This field can be up to eight characters Active Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes activate remote node or No deactivate remote node Encapsulation Ethernet is the default encapsulation Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to change to PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation Service Type Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select from Standard RR Toshiba RoadRunner Toshiba authentication method RR Manager RoadRunner Manager authentication method RR Telstra or Telia Login Choose one of the RoadRunner methods if your ISP is Time Warner s RoadRunner otherwise choose Standard Outgoing My Login This field is applicable for PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the login name assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node Some ISPs append this field to the Service Name field above e g jim poellc to access the PPPoE server My Password Enter the password assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node Valid for PPPoE encapsulation only
241. e following menu Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule in which you can edit an individual rule and configure the Type Local and Global Start End IPs Note An End IP address must be numerically greater than its corresponding IP Start address Figure 172 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Type One to One Local IP Start 0 0 0 0 End N A Global IP Start 0 0 0 0 End N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table explains the fields in this menu Table 126 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set FIELD DESCRIPTION Type Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select from a total of five types These are the mapping types discussed in the chapter on NAT web configurator screens Server allows you to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this computer See section for an example Local IP Only local IP fields are N A for server Global IP fields MUST be set for Server This is the starting local IP address ILA End This is the ending local IP address ILA If the rule is for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0 0 0 0 and the End IP as 255 255 255 255 This field is N A for One to One and Server types This is the starting inside global IP address IGA If you have a dynamic IP enter 0 0 0 0 as the Global IP Start Note that Global IP Start can be set to 0 0 0 0 only if the types are Many to One
242. e information on WPA user authentication and WPA encryption If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN Note You can t use the Local User Database for authentication when you select WPA 5 4 5 WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and only allows it to join the network if the password matches 3 The AP derives and distributes keys to the wireless clients 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 40 WPA 2 PSK Authentication mA gk No b 4 ES m DOO pe a 5 4 6 WPA PSK Authentication Screen In order to configure and enable WPA PSK Authentication click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the Wireless screen Select WPA PSK from the Security list Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 88 P 335 Se
243. e routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting Multicasting can reduce the load on non router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets However if one router uses multicasting then all routers on your network must use multicasting also By default RIP direction is set to Both and the Version set to RIP 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 127 Chapter 7 LAN P 335 Series User s Guide 7 6 Advanced LAN Screen To change your Prestige s advanced IP settings click the LAN link under Network and the Advanced tab The screen appears as shown Figure 64 Advanced Advanced RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast Any IP Setup Active Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP Allow between LAN and WAN Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP Direction RIP Routing Information Protocol RFC1058 and RFC 1389 allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets Select the RIP direction from Both In Only Out Only None When set to Both or Out Only the Prestige will broadcast its routing table periodically When se
244. e the same on the external authentication server and your Prestige The key is not sent over the network Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide Table 34 Wireless 802 1x and Dynamic WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Accounting Server Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server The default port number is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the Prestige The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your Prestige The key is not sent over the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 4 12 802 1x and Static WEP Key Exchange Screen In order to configure and enable 802 1x and Static WEP Key Exchange click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the Wireless screen Select 802 1x Static WEP from the Security list Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 94 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 45 Wireless 802 1x and Static WEP General W
245. eX to View TMSS Web Page Security Warning Do vou want to install and run http fac veupdate tres netfscans actyes TMS5Repar LEAB signed on 5 5 2004 10 06 4M and distributed by Trend Micro Inc Publisher authenticity verted by VeriSign Class 3 Code Signing 2001 CA Caution Trend Micro Inc asserts that this content it sate Tou should only install view this content if you trust Trend Micra Inc to make that assertion IT Always trust content from Trend Micro Inc More Info Service Summary Security Scan Parental Controls Surfing the Internet today can be risky business especially with more than one PC Fortunately your Zyxel router includes 60 day FREE home network security protection by Trend Micro a Q Home Network Internet Security Router based Security Check Vantivirus Scan Parental Controls i Anti spam Personal Firewall Perform Security Scan to check your PC for i exposure to hackers and other online threats Scan Now Get the full value of your router Take advantage of your free services today Tell me more Trend Micro Incorporated is a global leader in network antivirus and Internet content security software and services I Dontremind me next time About Trend Micro Legal Notice Privacy Policy Contact Us In partnership with ZyXEL Copyright 2004 Trend Micro Inc All rights reserved 3 Click Activate My Services to begin a 3 step process to activate TMSS Figur
246. eature When you download a page containing a restricted feature that part of the web page will appear blank or grayed out Activex A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object applications When you visit an ActiveX Web site ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser where they remain in case you visit the site again Java A programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID Web Proxy A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security administrative control and caching service When a proxy server is located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server Enable Parental Controls Select the check box to enable this feature on your Prestige Blocking Schedule The blocking schedule for TMSS is the same as that used for content filtering web site blocking by keyword If blocking schedule configuration changes are made here then the same changes apply to the Filter screen and vice versa Day to Block Select everyday or the day s of the week to activate web page blocking Time of Day to Block 24 Select the time of day you want web page blocking to take effect Hour Format Configure blocking to take effect all day by selecting the All Day
247. ection Set this field to 0 0 0 0 if the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address the IPSec Keying Mode field must be set to IKE Peer ID Type Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name Select E mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e mail address Peer Content The configuration of the peer content depends on the peer ID type e For IP type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection If you configure this field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank the Prestige will use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field refer to the Secure Gateway Address field description For DNS or E mail type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 or use the DNS or E mail ID type in the following situations e When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers When you want the Prestige to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses IKE Phase 1 A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA Security Negotiation Mode Select Main or Aggressive from the drop down
248. ed you will not receive the e mail logs User Name Enter the user name up to 31 characters usually the user name of a mail account Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Log Schedule This drop down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E mail e Daily Weekly Hourly When Log is Full None If you select Weekly or Daily specify a time of day when the E mail should be sent If you select Weekly then also specify which day of the week the E mail should be sent If you select When Log is Full an alert is sent when the log fills up If you select None no log messages are sent Day for Sending Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs Log Time for Sending Enter the time of the day in 24 hour format for example 23 00 equals 11 00 pm to send the logs Clear log after Select the checkbox to delete all the logs after the Prestige sends an E mail of sending mail the logs Syslog Logging The Prestige sends a log to an external syslog server Click Active to enable syslog logging Syslog Server IP Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected Address categories of logs Log Facility Select a location from the drop down list box The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server Refer to the syslog server manual for more information gt F lt O
249. eed Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Change Console Port Speed Console Port Speed 9600 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 36 3 Log and Trace There are two logging facilities in the Prestige The first is the error logs and trace records that are stored locally The second is the syslog facility for message logging 36 3 1 Syslog Logging The Prestige uses the syslog facility to log the CDR Call Detail Record and system messages to a syslog server Syslog and accounting can be configured in Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog Logging as shown next Figure 216 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog Logging Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog Logging Syslog Active No Syslog Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Log Facility Local 1 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel You need to configure the syslog parameters described in the following table to activate syslog then choose what you want to log Table 143 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Syslog Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to turn syslog on or off Syslog Server IP Enter the IP Address of the server that will log the CDR Call Detail Record and Address system messages i e the syslog server Log Facility Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select a Local option The log facility allows you to log the message to different files in the server Please refer to the documentation of your
250. efer to the table shown next for more information about these fields Table 108 Menu 1 General Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes It is recommended you enter your computer s Computer name in this field This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores _ are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP You can go to menu 24 8 and type sys domain name to see the current domain name used by your router The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name If you want to clear this field just press SPACE BAR and then ENTER First System DNS DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding Server IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because Second System without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it DNS Server The Prestige uses a system DNS server in the order you specify here to resolve domain names for VPN DDNS and the time server Tord System DNS Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select an option Select From ISP if Server your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the Prestige s WAN IP address The IP Address field below displays the read only DNS server IP address
251. eight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x WEP Authentication Steps Three different methods can be used to authenticate wireless stations to the network Open System Shared Key and Auto The following figure illustrates the steps involved Figure 307 WEP Authentication Steps i Wireless Station Authentication Prestige Authentication Acceptance Challenge Text Authentication Acceptance Open system authentication involves an unencrypted two message procedure A wireless station sends an open system authentication request to the AP which will then automatically accept and connect the wireless station to the network In effect open system is not authentication at all as any station can gain access to the network Appendix I Wireless LANs 464 P 335 Series User s Guide Shared key authentication involves a four message procedure A wireless station sends a shared key authentication request to the AP which will then reply with a challenge text message The wireless station must then use the AP s default WEP key to encrypt the challenge text and return it to the AP which attempts to decrypt the message using the AP s default WEP key If the decrypted message matches the challenge text the wireless station is authenticated When your device authentication method is set to open system it will only accept open system authentication requests The same is true for shared key authentica
252. el The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 121 Menu 11 6 Traffic Redirect Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Active Press SPACE BAR and select Yes to enable or No to disable traffic redirect setup The default is No Zeg 1 Enter the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation The Prestige automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestige s Internet connection terminates Metric Enter a number from 1 to 15 to set this route s priority among the Prestige s routes see the Metric section in the WAN and Dial Backup Setup chapter The smaller the number the higher priority the route has Check WAN IP Enter the IP address of a reliable nearby computer for example your ISP s DNS server address to test your Prestige s WAN accessibility The Prestige uses the default gateway IP address if you do not enter an IP address here If you are using PPTP or PPPoE Encapsulation enter 0 0 0 0 to configure the Prestige to check the PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit or PPTP tunnel Fail Tolerance Enter the number of times your Prestige may attempt and fail to connect to the Internet before traffic is forwarded to the backup gateway Two to five is usually a good number Period sec Enter the time interval in seconds between WAN connection checks Five to 60 is usually a good number Timeout sec Enter the number of seconds the Prestige waits for a ping response from
253. eless LANs P 335 Series User s Guide A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type A preamble is used to synchronize the transmission timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes Long and Short Short preamble takes less time to process and minimizes overhead so it should be used in a good wireless network environment when all wireless stations support it Select Long if you have a noisy network or are unsure of what preamble mode your wireless stations support as all IEEE 802 11b compliant wireless adapters must support long preamble However not all wireless adapters support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support to ensure interpretability between the AP and the wireless stations and to provide more reliable communication in noisy networks Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when all wireless stations support it otherwise the AP uses long preamble Note The AP and the wireless stations MUST use the same preamble mode in o
254. em and the AC as opposed to all the way to the ISP However the PPP negotiation is between the computer and the ISP Prestige as a PPPoE Client When using the Prestige as a PPPoE client the computers on the LAN see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE This alleviates the administrator from having to manage the PPPoE clients on the individual computers Figure 249 Prestige as a PPPoE Client AH A Ethernet Ethernet Concentrator 407 Appendix B PPPoE P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix C PPTP What is PPTP PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol is a Microsoft proprietary protocol RFC 2637 for PPTP is informational only to tunnel PPP frames How can we transport PPP frames from a computer to a broadband modem over Ethernet A solution is to build PPTP into the ANT ADSL Network Termination where PPTP is used only over the short haul between the computer and the modem over Ethernet For the rest of the connection the PPP frames are transported with PPP over AALS RFC 2364 The PPP connection however Is still between the computer and the ISP The various connections in this setup are depicted in the following diagram The drawback of this solution is that it requires one separate ATM VC per destination Figure 250 Transport PPP frames over Ethernet ATM over ADSL RFC 2364 PPTP and the Prestige When the Prestige is deployed in such a setup it appears as a computer to the ANT In Windows VPN or
255. ement Wizard Complete Follow the on screen instructions and click Finish to complete the wizard setup and save your configuration Figure 36 Bandwidth Management Wizard Complete Congratulation Bandwidth Management setup complete Please press Finish to complete Bandwidth Management Wizard For more detailed configuration of Bandwidth Management and to review your current settings select BANDWIDTH MGMT In Management configuration Well done You have finished configuration of Bandwidth Management You may now continue configuring your device 19 Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard 80 P 335 Series User s Guide 81 Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT This chapter discusses how to configure Wireless LAN 5 1 Introduction A wireless LAN can be as simple as two computers with wireless LAN adapters communicating in a peer to peer network or as complex as a number of computers with wireless LAN adapters communicating through access points which bridge network traffic to the wired LAN Note See the WLAN appendix for more detailed information on WLANs 5 2 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless stations access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the Prestige a
256. ent Wizard FymEL s Media Bandwidth Management allows you to allocate bandwidth based on applications services and or user s You can prioritize unused bandwidth capacity for defined services users via 3 basic bandwidth classes low medium and high This wizard willtake you through the following steps Step 1 General Information Step 2 Services 5 Step 3 Priority Setup 4 2 Predefined Media Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management using the wizard screens Table 24 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION Xbox Live This is Microsoft s online gaming service that lets you play multiplayer Xbox games on the Internet via broadband technology Xbox Live uses port 3074 VoIP SIP Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP Session Initiated Protocol SIP is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP using the default port number 5060 Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard 76 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 24 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION FTP File Transfer Pr
257. enu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation Ethernet Service Type Standard My Login N A My Password N A Retype to Confirm N A Login Server N A Relogin Every min N A IP Address Assignment Dynamic IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A Gateway IP Address N A Network Address Translation SUA Only Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following figure shows how you apply NAT to the remote node in menu 11 1 1 Enter 11 from the main menu 2 When menu 11 appears as shown in the following figure type the number of the remote node that you want to configure 3 Move the cursor to the Edit IP field press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to bring up Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options 297 Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 167 Menu 11 3 Applying NAT to the Remote Node Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Address Assignment Dynamic IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A Gateway IP Addr N A Network Address Translation SUA Only Metric 1 Private N A RIP Direction None Version N A Multicast None Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL The following table describes the options for Network Address Translation Table 123 Applying NAT in Menus 4 amp 11 3 FIELD DESCRIPTION Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige The SMT
258. er s Guide 385 Chapter 39 Remote Management P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 40 Call Scheduling Call scheduling applicable for PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation only allows you to dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long 40 1 Introduction to Call Scheduling The call scheduling feature allows the Prestige to manage a remote node and dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long This feature is similar to the scheduler in a videocassette recorder you can specify a time period for the VCR to record You can apply up to 4 schedule sets in Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile From the main menu enter 26 to access Menu 26 Schedule Setup as shown next Figure 235 Menu 26 Schedule Setup Menu 26 Schedule Setup Schedule Schedule Enter Schedule Set Number to Configure 0 Edit Name N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Lower numbered sets take precedence over higher numbered sets thereby avoiding scheduling conflicts For example if sets 1 2 3 and 4 in are applied in the remote node then set I will take precedence over set 2 3 and 4 as the Prestige by default applies the lowest numbered set first Set 2 will take precedence over set 3 and 4 and so on Chapter 40 Call Scheduling 386 P 335 Series User s Guide You can design up to 12 schedule sets but you can only apply up to four schedule sets for a remote node To setup a schedule set select the schedule set
259. er 369 FTP Restrictions 218 365 383 FTP Server 307 Functionally Equivalent 5 Index G Gas Pipes 4 Gateway 295 Gateway IP Addr 289 Gateway IP Address 280 General Setup 242 General wireless LAN screen 84 Germany Contact Information 6 Global 134 God act of 5 H Harmful Interference 3 Hidden Menus 262 Hidden node 458 High Voltage Points 4 Hop Count 295 Host 243 HTTP 139 322 IBSS 456 Idle Timeout 287 IEEE 802 119 43 460 IEEE 802 111 43 IGMP 123 124 Independent Basic Service Set 456 Indirect Damages 5 Inside 134 Inside Global Address 134 Inside Local Address 134 Insurance 5 Interference 3 Interference Correction Measures 3 Interference Statement 3 Internet Access 278 ISP s Name 279 Internet access 278 Internet Access Setup 279 296 391 Introduction to Filters 332 IP Address 55 123 126 132 138 141 274 279 289 295 353 IP Address Assignment 289 Index P 335 Series User s Guide IP Pool 130 131 274 IP Pool Setup 122 IP Ports 322 IP Static Route Setup 294 J Java 153 199 L Labor 5 LAN Setup 110 122 LAN TCP IP 122 Legal Rights 5 Liability 2 License 2 Lightning 4 Link type 51 Liquids Corrosive 4 Local 134 Log Facility 354 Login Name 279 MAC Address 270 MAC Address Filter Action 101 MAC Address Filtering 100 MAC Filter 100 MAC filter 83 Management Information Base MIB 223 347 Many to Many No Overload 137 Many to Many Overload 1
260. er Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution 16 2 Bandwidth Management Configuration Screen Click the Bandwidth MGMT link under Management to open the bandwidth management Configuration screen Figure 117 Bandwidth Management Configuration Bandwidth Management Setup IV active WAN BW Budget kbps f10000 SE _DestPort Priority Modify 1 ToLan sl hestt FTP DN fo High v g 2 To LAN DN User defined DN fo High Di g mi SS ee ep A ras Lag 29 To LAN 3 Dez mm as defined gt fo High v g G 30 ToLan sl User defined v fo High g Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Bandwidth Management Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the Prestige apply bandwidth management Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule WAN BW Budget Enter the amount of bandwidth in kbps 2 to 100 000 that you want to allocate for kbps traffic 20 kbps to 20 000 kbps is recommended The recommendation is to set this speed to be equal to or less than the speed of the broadband device connected to the WAN port For example se
261. er and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 247 Chapter 20 System P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 21 Logs This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the Prestige s logs Refer to the appendices for example log message explanations 21 1 View Log The web configurator allows you to look at all of the Prestige s logs in one location Click the Logs link under Maintenance to open the View Log screen Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen see the Log Settings section Options include logs about system maintenance system errors access control allowed or blocked web sites blocked web features such as ActiveX controls Java and cookies attacks such as DoS and IPSec Log entries in red indicate system error logs The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills
262. er key It can be comprised of any character including spaces but trailing spaces are truncated Authentication Press SPACE BAR to choose from MD5 or SHA1 and then press ENTER Algorithm Key Enter the authentication key to be used by IPSec if applicable The key must be unique Enter 16 characters for MD5 authentication and 20 characters for SHA 1 authentication Any character may be used including spaces but trailing spaces are truncated AH Setup The AH Setup fields are N A if you chose an ESP Active Protocol SPI Decimal The SPI must be from one to four unique decimal characters 0 to 9 long Authentication Press SPACE BAR to choose from MD5 or SHA1 and then press ENTER Algorithm Key Enter the authentication key to be used by IPSec if applicable The key must be unique Enter 16 characters for MD5 authentication and 20 characters for SHA 1 authentication Any character may be used including spaces but trailing spaces are truncated When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 33 SA Monitor This chapter teaches you how to manage your SAs by using the SA Monitor in SMT menu 212 33 1 SA Monitor Overview A Security SA is the group of security settings related to a specific VPN tunnel This menu show
263. ernet Traffic Redirect Traffic Redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway on the LAN when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet thus acting as an auxiliary backup when your regular WAN connection fails Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige P 335 Series User s Guide Port Forwarding Use this feature to forward incoming service requests to a server on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows the individual client computers to obtain the TCP IP configuration at start up from a centralized DHCP server The Prestige has built in DHCP server capability enabled by default which means it can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to all systems that support the DHCP client Any IP The Any IP feature allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet Full Network Management The embedded web configurator is an all platform web based utility that allows you to easily access the Prestige s management settings and configure the firewall Most functions of the Prestige are also software configurable via the SMT System Management Terminal in
264. ernet encapsulation and down line is down idle line ppp idle dial starting to trigger a call and drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation This is the number of transmitted packets on this port RxPkts Collisions This is the number of received packets on this port This is the number of collisions on this port This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port Rx B s Up Time This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port This is the total amount of time the line has been up Hii w x a System Up Time This is the total time the Prestige has been on Poll Interval s Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval s field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics click Stop 2 4 8 Summary VPN Monitor Click the VPN Monitor Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here includes encapsulation mode and security protocol Security Associations Table Current IPSec Security Associations Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Summary VPN Monitor DESCRIPTION This is the security index number Name This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy Encapsulation This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode Chapter 2 Introducing t
265. erver and the Prestige The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your Prestige The key is not sent over the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 96 P 335 Series User s Guide 5 4 13 802 1x Screen In order to configure and enable 802 1x click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the Wireless screen Select 802 1x No WEP from the Security list Figure 46 Wireless 802 1x General Wireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL Channel 06 2437MHz Hide SSID Channel Selection Security 802 1 No WEP D 1800 In Seconds 3600 In Seconds Security Mode ReAuthentication Timer Idle Timeout Authentication Server 97 IP Address Port Number Shared Secret Accounting Server IT Active IP Address Port Number Shared Secret f 0 10 10 10 fi 812 fi 2345678 o 0 0 0 fi 813 emam Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Wireless 802 1x and No WEP ReAuthentication Timer in seconds Idle Timeout DESCRIPTION Specify how often wireless stations have to reenter usernames and passwords in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless station authenti
266. ess LAN adapter and equipped with a web browser with JavaScript enabled and or Telnet e A wireless station computer must be running IEEE 802 1x compliant software Not all Windows operating systems support IEEE 802 1x see the Microsoft web site for details For other operating systems see their documentation If your operating system does not support IEEE 802 1x then you may need to install IEEE 802 1x client software e An optional network RADIUS server for remote user authentication and accounting 5 4 11 802 1x and Dynamic WEP Key Exchange Screen In order to configure and enable 802 1x and Dynamic WEP Key Exchange click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the Wireless screen Select 802 1x Dynamic WEP from the Security list Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 92 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 44 Wireless 802 1x and Dynamic WEP Wireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID Hide SSID Channel Selection Security Security Mode ReAuthentication Timer Idle Timeout Dynamic WEP Key Exchange Authentication Server IP Address Port Number Shared Secret Accounting Server I active IP Address Port Number Shared Secret ZyXEL Channel 06 2437MHz 1800 In Seconds 3600 In Seconds raue E fi 0 10 10 10 fi 812 fi 2345678 has Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Wireless 802 1x and Dynamic WEP ReA
267. ests for unauthorized services Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 Security Remote Management Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Respond to Ping The Prestige will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is on selected Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Otherwise select LAN amp WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests Do not respond to Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the Prestige by probing for requests for unused ports If you select this option the Prestige will not respond to port unauthorized request s for unused ports thus leaving the unused ports and the Prestige unseen services By default this option is not selected and the Prestige will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports Note that the probing packets must first traverse the Prestige s firewall mechanism before reaching this anti probing mechanism Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet the Prestige reacts based on the firewall polic
268. example 1 5 9 12 in each filter field Note that spaces are accepted in this field For more information on defining the filters please refer to the Filters chapter For PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation you have the additional option of specifying remote node call filter sets Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration 290 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 161 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Ethernet Encapsulation Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL Figure 162 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter PPPoE or PPTP Encapsulation Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Gall Filter Secs protocol filters device filters Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL 28 4 1 Traffic Redirect Setup Configure parameters that determine when the Prestige will forward WAN traffic to the backup gateway using Menu 11 6 Traffic Redirect Setup 291 Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 163 Menu 11 6 Traffic Redirect Setup Menu 11 6 Traffic Redirect Setup Active Yes Configuration Backup Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Metric 15 Check WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Fail Tolerance 2 Period sec 5 Timeout sec 3 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Canc
269. ey management IKE or Manual Remote Addr When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to Single this is a Start static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to Range this is the beginning static IP address in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to SUBNET this is a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router This field displays N A when you configure the Secure Gateway Addr field in SMT 27 1 1 to 0 0 0 0 Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup 318 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 128 Menu 27 1 IPSec Summary FIELD DESCRIPTION Remote Addr When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to Single this is End the same static IP address as in the Remote Addr Start field When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to Range this is the end static IP address in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to SUBNET this is a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router This field displays N A when you configure the Secure Gateway Addr field in SMT 27 1 1 to 0 0 0 0 Secure GW _ This is the WAN IP address or the domain name up to the first 15 characters are Ad
270. figuration sanke 431 POO Zor e e EE 431 FOR elle EE 432 Figure 289 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration ccccsseceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 445 Figure 290 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address rrrnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnvannnnnennn 446 Figure 291 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration 008 447 PA EG SA MENU EEE 448 Figure 293 Windows XP Control Panel EEE 448 Figure 294 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties 00 449 List of Figures 28 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 295 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties Figure 296 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Settings Figure 297 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Figure 298 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu Figure 299 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP Figure 300 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu Figure 301 Macintosh OS X Network Figure 302 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network Figure 303 Basic Service Set Figure 304 Infrastructure WLAN Figure 305 RTS CTS Figure 306 EAP Authentication Figure 307 WEP Authentication Steps Figure 308 Roaming Example Figure 309 Ideal Setup Figure 310 Triangle Route Problem Figure 311 IP Alias Figure 312 Gateways on the WAN Side 29 List of Figures P 335 Series User s Guide List of Tables Table 1 Front Panel LEDS amnesi sedan veken ske nr 46 PE COn ROS E 50 Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen rranrnarnanenannnnrnannnannnnnna
271. figure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Enter a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the remote IP address is a single address type it a second time here When the remote IP address is a range enter the end static IP address ina range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the remote IP address is a subnet address enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router Enter the WAN IP address of your Prestige The Prestige uses its current WAN IP address static or dynamic in setting up the VPN tunnel if you leave this field as 0 0 0 0 The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if this IP address changes Select IP to identify this Prestige by its IP address Select DNS to identify this Prestige by a domain name Select E mail to identify this Prestige by an e mail address When you select IP in the Local ID Type field type the IP address of your computer in the local Content field The Prestige automatically uses the IP address in the My IP Address field refer to the My IP Address field description if you configure the local Content field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 in the local Content field or use the DNS or E mail ID type in the following situations When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers When you want
272. figuring this new set Enter a Set Name choose the Edit Action and then enter 1 for the Select Rule field Press ENTER to confirm 5 Select Type as One to One direct mapping for packets going both ways and enter the local Start IP as 192 168 1 10 the IP address of FTP Server 1 the global Start IP as 10 132 50 1 our first IGA see Figure 181 6 Repeat the previous step for rules 2 to 4 as outlined above 7 When finished menu 15 1 1 1 should look like as shown in Example 3 Final Menu 15 1 1 307 Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 180 NAT Example 3 Menu 11 3 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Address Assignment Dynamic IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A Gateway IP Addr N A Network Address Translation Full Feature Metric 1 Private N A RIP Direction None Version N A Multicast None Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL The following figures show how to configure the first rule Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT 308 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 181 Example 3 Menu 15 1 1 1 Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Type One to One Local IP Start 192 168 1 10 End N A Global IP Start 10 132 50 1 End N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Press Space Bar to Toggle Figure 182 Example 3 Final Menu 15 1 1 Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Set Name NAT SET Local Start IP Local End IP Gl
273. fits of PPPoE 1s the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the Prestige rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the Prestige does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access The screen shown next is for PPPoE encapsulation Chapter 6 WAN 112 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 55 PPPoE Encapsulation ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation PPP over Ethernet v Service Name optional User Name Password Retype to Confirm Nailed Up Connection Idle Timeout sec fioo fin seconds WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP Default C Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address Remote IP Address Remote IP Subnet Mask Metric Private WAN MAC Address IY Spoof WAN MAC Address Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address 192 168 1 33 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation The PPP
274. g Packet Filtering Process A 332 Figure 197 Filter RUIG FTOCOSS PE NE NE 334 Figure 198 Menu 21 Filter and Firewall Setup KENNEN KL Figure 199 Menu 21 1 Filter Set Configuration AEN 335 Figure 200 Menu 21 1 1 1 TCP IP Filter Rule ccccseiivesuavdnerconatasetieucincialaciwancesudoamsedmiersenrien 337 Feet 542 339 Figure 202 Menu 21 1 4 1 Generic Filter Rule rrrarrrnnrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 340 PIU 203 TONo FR POT E 341 Figure 204 Example Filter Menu 21 1 3 1 ernnernnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnennnennnnnnnnenne 342 Figure 205 Example Filter Rules Summary Menu 2113 343 Figure 206 Protocol and Device EE 344 FET LAN MAME ssia Ta 345 Figure 208 Filtering Remote Node Traffic RRE 345 List of Figures 26 P 335 Series User s Guide 2 Figure 209 SNMP Management Model RE 346 Figure 210 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration EE 348 Figure 211 Menu 24 System Maintenance bk 350 Figure 212 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status r rnerrnonrernennernnannvanennronnannvannennenene 351 Figure 213 Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed rrrrrnrnnanenanrnnnnnnennn 352 Figure 214 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information 353 Figure 215 Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Change Console Port Speed 354 Figure 216 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog Logging ss sssennsnneerensnenrnesreennne 354 Figure 217 Call Triggering Packet Example cisco ercvciectercise eric
275. ge File Sharing General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Speech Startup Disk 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 452 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 299 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP E TFF Comett wia Ethernet Setup Configure Using DHEF Server IF Address s will be supplied by server gt Subnet mask lt will be supplied by server gt Eouter address will be supplied by server gt Search domans Mane server addr will be supplied by server a 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list 4 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure box select Manually e Type your IP address in the IP Address box e Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box e Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your configuration 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 300 M
276. ge will use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field refer to the Secure Gateway Address field description For DNS or E mail type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 or use the DNS or E mail ID type in the following situations When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers When you want the Prestige to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses Encapsulation Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop down list box Mode Select ESP if you want to use ESP Encapsulation Security Payload The ESP protocol RFC 2406 provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH If you select ESP here you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields described next Select AH if you want to use AH Authentication Header Protocol The AH protocol RFC 2402 was designed for integrity authentication sequence integrity replay resistance and non repudiation but not for confidentiality for which the ESP was designed If you select AH here you must select options from the Authentication Algorithm field described later
277. gement Control This field shows the port number for the service or protocol You may change the port number if needed but you must use the same port number to access the Prestige Access Select the access interface if any by pressing SPACE BAR then ENTER to choose from LAN only WAN only ALL or Disable Secure Client IP The default 0 0 0 0 allows any client to use this service or protocol to access the Prestige Enter an IP address to restrict access to a client with a matching IP address Once you have filled in this menu press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel 39 1 1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when 1 A filter in menu 3 1 LAN or in menu 11 5 WAN is applied to block a Telnet FTP or Web service 2 You have disabled that service in menu 24 11 383 Chapter 39 Remote Management P 335 Series User s Guide 3 The IP address in the Secure Client IP field menu 24 11 does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately 4 There is an SMT console session running 5 There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time 6 There is a firewall rule that blocks it Chapter 39 Remote Management 384 P 335 Series Us
278. gement field to IKE this will take you to Menu 27 1 1 1 IKE Setup If you set the Key Management field to Manual this will take you to Menu 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 32 3 IKE Setup To edit this menu the Key Management field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup must be set to IKE Move the cursor to the Edit Key Management Setup field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to display Menu 27 1 1 1 IKE Setup 323 Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 193 Menu 27 1 1 1 IKE Setup Menu 27 1 1 1 IKE Setup Phase 1 Negotiation Mode Main Pre Shared Key Encryption Algorithm DES Authentication Algorithm MD5 SA Life Time Seconds 28800 Key Group DH1 Phase 2 Active Protocol ESP Encryption Algorithm DES Authentication Algorithm SHA1 SA Life Time Seconds 28800 Encapsulation Tunnel Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS None Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Press Space Bar to Toggle The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 130 Menu 27 1 1 1 IKE Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Phase 1 Negotiation Press SPACE BAR to choose from Main or Aggressive and then press ENTER Mode See earlier for a discussion of these modes Multiple SAs connecting through
279. guration Upload Firmware Command Interpreter Mode Gabi CONTEO Time and Date Setting Remote Management Setup Enter Menu Selection Number Enter 10 to go to Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting to update the time and date settings of your Prestige as shown in the following screen Chapter 38 System Maintenance 378 P 335 Series User s Guide 379 Figure 233 Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting Time Protocol NTP RFC 1305 Time Server Address time b nist gov Current Time 08 07 14 New Time hh mm ss 08 06 48 Current Date 2003 12 24 New Date yyyy mm dd 2003 gt 12 e Time Zone GMT Daylight Saving No Start Date mm dd 01 01 End Date mm dd 01 01 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 150 Time and Date Setting Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Time Protocol Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver sends when you turn on the Prestige Not all timeservers support all protocols so you may have to check with your ISP network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the format Daytime RFC 867 format is day month year time zone of the server Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP R
280. hanges Peer ID type Press SPACE BAR to choose IP DNS or E mail and press ENTER Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name Select E mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e mail address Content When you select IP in the Peer ID Type field type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection or leave the field blank to have the Prestige automatically use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field When you select DNS in the Peer ID Type field type a domain name up to 31 charac ters by which to identify the remote IPSec router When you select E mail in the Peer ID Type field type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify the remote IPSec router The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail address The domain name also does not have to match the remote router s IP address or what you configure in the Secure Gateway Address field below Type the IP address or the domain name up to 31 characters of the IPSec router with which you re making the VPN connection Set this field to 0 0 0 0 if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic WAN IP address the Key Management field must be set to IKE see later Enter 1 for ICMP 6 for TCP 17 for UDP etc 0 is the default and sig
281. hanges to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select DNS Relay to have the Prestige act as a DNS proxy The Prestige s LAN IP address displays in the field to the right read only The Prestige tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the Prestige itself is the DNS server When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the Prestige the Prestige forwards the query to the Prestige s system DNS server configured in the SYSTEM General screen and relays the response back to the computer You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server that choice changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 3 Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To change your Prestige s Static DHCP settings c
282. have a static IP The WAN Release and Renewal fields in menu 24 4 conveniently allow you to release and or renew the assigned WAN IP address subnet mask and default gateway in a fashion similar to winipcfg Figure 219 LAN amp WAN DHCP WAN Client None The following table describes the diagnostic tests available in menu 24 4 for your Prestige and associated connections Table 144 System Maintenance Menu Diagnostic FIELD DESCRIPTION Ping Host Enter 1 to ping any machine with an IP address on your LAN or WAN Enter its IP address in the FA IP Address field below WAN DHCP Release Enter 2 to release your WAN DHCP settings Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis P 335 Series User s Guide Table 144 System Maintenance Menu Diagnostic FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN DHCP Renewal Enter 3 to renew your WAN DHCP settings Internet Setup Test Enter 4 to test the Internet setup You can also test the Internet setup in Menu 4 Internet Access Please refer to the Internet Access chapter for more details This feature is only available for dial up connections using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation Reboot System Enter 11 to reboot the Prestige Host IP Address If you entered 1 in Ping Host then enter the IP address of the computer you want to ping in this field Enter the number of the selection you would like to perform or press ESC to cancel Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis 360 P 335 Series User s Gu
283. he Web Configurator 58 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 10 Summary VPN Monitor TABLE DESCRIPTION IPSec Algorithm This field displays the security protocols used for an SA Both AH and ESP increase Prestige processing requirements and communications latency delay Poll Interval s Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval s field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics 59 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 3 Connection Wizard This chapter provides information on the Wizard setup screens in the web configurator 3 1 Wizard Setup The web configurator s Wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet Refer to your ISP Internet Service Provider checklist in the Quick Start Guide to know what to enter in each field Leave a field blank if you don t have that information 1 After you access the Prestige Web configurator click the Go to Wizard setup hyperlink You can click the Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this wizard setup and configure advanced features Figure 16 Select a Wizard Please select Wizard or Advanced mode The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings We suggest you use this mode if it is the first time you are setting up your router or if you need to make basic config
284. he ZyNOS Firmware version and the date created ZyNOS is ZyXEL s proprietary Network Operating System design WAN Information IP Address This shows the WAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the WAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the WAN port s DHCP role Client or None LAN Information IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address eneen Current Date Time This field displays your Prestige s present date and time along with the difference from the Greenwich Mean Time GMT zone The difference from GMT is based on the time zone It is also adjusted for Daylight Saving Time if you set the Prestige to use it System Resource CPU Usage This number shows how many kilobytes of the heap memory the Prestige is using Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System and is thus available for running processes like NAT VPN and the firewall The bar displays what percent of the Prestige s heap memory is in use The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached This number shows the Prestige s total heap memory in kilobytes The bar displays what percent of the Prestige s heap memory is in use The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached Interface This displays the Prestige port types The port types are WAN LAN and WLAN Status This field displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethe
285. he appendix for more on triangle route topology Max NAT Firewall Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT firewall sessions Session Per User that a host can create LAN to WAN To log packets related to firewall rules make sure that Access Control under Log is selected in the Logs Log Settings screen Choose what LAN to WAN packets to log Choose from No Log Log Blocked blocked LAN to WAN services appear in the Blocked Services textbox in the Services screen with Enable Services Blocking selected Log All log all LAN to WAN packets WAN to LAN To log packets related to firewall rules make sure that Access Control under Log is selected in the Logs Log Settings screen Choose what WAN to LAN and WAN to WAN Prestige packets to log Choose from No Log Log Forwarded see how to forward WAN to LAN traffic in the next section Log All log all WAN to LAN packets Apply Click Apply to save the settings Click Reset to start configuring this screen again 10 3 Services Screen Click the Firewall link under Security and the Services tab The screen appears as shown next Use this screen to enable service blocking enter delete modify the services you want to block and the date time you want to block them Chapter 10 Firewall 148 P 335 Series User s Guide 149 Figure 77 Services Services Service Setup IV Enable Services Blocking Available Services Blocked Services BGP TCP 179 BOOTP
286. he command interpreter 11 6 1 Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking By default the Prestige checks the URL s domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking This means that the Prestige checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php content filtering only searches for keywords within www zyxel com tw 155 Chapter 11 Content Filtering P 335 Series User s Guide 11 6 2 Full Path URL Checking Full path URL checking has the Prestige check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php full path URL checking searches for keywords within www zyxel com tw news Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s full path 11 6 3 File Name URL Checking Filename URL checking has the Prestige check all of the characters in the URL For example filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s complete filename Chapter 11 Content Filtering 156 P 335 Series User s Guide 157 Chapter 11 Content Filtering P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 12 Introduction to
287. he following diagram illustrates this 343 Chapter 34 Filter Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 206 Protocol and Device Filter Sets Interface 34 5 Firewall Versus Filters Firewall configuration is discussed in the firewall chapters of this manual Further comparisons are also made between filtering NAT and the firewall 34 6 Applying a Filter This section shows you where to apply the filter s after you design it them The Prestige already has filters to prevent NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls and block incoming telnet FTP and HTTP connections Note If you do not activate the firewall it is advisable to apply filters 34 6 1 Applying LAN Filters LAN traffic filter sets may be useful to block certain packets reduce traffic and prevent security breaches Go to menu 3 1 shown next and enter the number s of the filter set s that you want to apply as appropriate You can choose up to four filter sets from twelve by entering their numbers separated by commas e g 3 4 6 11 Input filter sets filter incoming traffic to the Prestige and output filter sets filter outgoing traffic from the Prestige For PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation you have the additional option of specifying remote node call filter sets Chapter 34 Filter Configuration 344 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 207 Filtering LAN Traffic Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup Input Filter Sets protocol filters device filters O
288. he following figure and the backup gateway in another subnet Subnet 2 Configure a LAN to LAN Prestige firewall rule that forwards packets from the protected LAN Subnet 1 to the backup gateway Subnet 2 Chapter 6 WAN 118 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 59 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup LAN Subnet 1 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 Ni Backup Gateway Subnet 2 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 24 6 7 Traffic Redirect Screen 119 To change your Prestige s Traffic Redirect settings click the WAN link under Network and the Traffic Redirect tab The screen appears as shown Figure 60 WAN Traffic Redirect Traffic Redirect Traffic Redirect I Active Backup Gateway IP Address booo Check WAN IP Address booo Fail Tolerance Bo Period sec 5 fin seconds Timeout sec B tin seconds Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Traffic Redirect LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the Prestige use traffic redirect if the normal WAN connection goes down Backup Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation The Prestige Gateway IP automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestige s Internet connection Address terminates Chapter 6 WAN P 335 Series User s Guide Table 48 Traffic Redirect LABEL DESCRIPTION Check WAN IP Configuration of this field is optional If you do not enter an IP address
289. he wireless LAN If you change this field on the Prestige make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network Channel The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g wireless devices is called a Selection channel Select a channel ID that is not already in use by a neighboring device Security Select a Security level from the drop down list box Choose Auto to use WPA PSK security with a default Pre Shared Key and only if your wireless clients support WPA PSK If you choose this option skip directly to section dl Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured If you do not enable any wireless security on your Prestige your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range If you choose this option skip directly to section 3 3 3 Choose Basic security if you want to configure WEP Encryption parameters If you choose this option go directly to section 3 3 1 Choose Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK security to configure a Pre Shared Key Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK respectively If you choose this option skip directly to section 3 3 2 Click Back to display the previous screen Click Next to proceed to the next screen Note The wireless stations and Prestige must use the same SSID channel ID and WEP encryption key if WEP is enabled WPA PSK if WPA PSK is enabled or WPA2 PSK if WPA2 PSK is enabled for wireless
290. here the Prestige will use the default gateway IP address Configure this field to test your Prestige s WAN accessibility Type the IP address of a reliable nearby computer for example your ISP s DNS server address If you are using PPTP or PPPoE Encapsulation type 0 0 0 0 to configure the Prestige to check the PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit or PPTP tunnel Fail Tolerance Type the number of times your Prestige may attempt and fail to connect to the Internet before traffic is forwarded to the backup gateway Period Type the number of seconds for the Prestige to wait between checks to see if it can seconds connect to the WAN IP address Check WAN IP Address field or default gateway Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic Timeout Type the number of seconds for your Prestige to wait for a ping response from the IP seconds Address in the Check WAN IP Address field before it times out The WAN connection is considered down after the Prestige times out the number of times specified in the Fail Tolerance field Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 6 WAN 120 P 335 Series User s Guide 121 Chapter 6 WAN P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 7 LAN This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings 7 1 LAN Overview Local Are
291. hind the VPN gateway The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header 12 4 IPSec and NAT 161 Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the Prestige NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet both data payload and headers with a hash value appended to the packet When using AH protocol packet contents the data payload are not encrypted Chapter 12 Introduction to IPSec P 335 Series User s Guide A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the incoming packet by computing its own hash value and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn t match The VPN device at the receiving end doesn t know about the NAT in the middle so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet including headers in a new IP packet The new IP packet s source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end When using ESP protocol with authentication the packet contents in this case the entire original packet are encrypted The encrypte
292. ibution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the pair wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 42 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example CS 3 Wi rema 5 4 9 WPA Authentication Screen In order to configure and enable WPA Authentication click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the Wireless screen Select WPA from the Security list Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide 91 Figure 43 Wireless WPA Wireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID Hide SSID Channel Selection Security Security Mode ReAuthentication Timer Idle Timeout Group Key Update Timer ZyXEL Channel 06 2437MHz e ma 3 1800 In Seconds 3600 In Seconds 1800 In Seconds Authentication Server IP Address Port Number Shared Secret Accounting Server I Active IP Address Port Number Shared Secret fi 0 10 1010 fi 812 12345676 he GE Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Tab
293. ic route Leave this field blank to delete this static route This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Private This parameter determines if the Prestige will include this route to a remote node in its RIP broadcasts Select this check box to keep this route private and not included in RIP broadcasts Clear this checkbox to propagate this route to other hosts through RIP broadcasts Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is Address always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address Prestige that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Prestige over the WAN the gateway must be the IP address of one of the Remote Nodes Metric Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Apply Click Apply to save your ch
294. ically used for video traffic which has some tolerance for jitter but needs to be prioritized over other data traffic Typically used for traffic from applications or devices that lack QoS capabilities Use mid priority for traffic that is less sensitive to latency but is affected by long delays such as Internet surfing and print jobs that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Use low priority for applications that do not have strict latency and throughput requirements This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers 103 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide 5 8 3 Services The commonly used services and port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Next to the name of the service two fields appear in brackets The first field indicates the IP protocol type TCP UDP or ICMP The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type For example look at the DNS service UDP TCP 53 means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53 Table 41 Commonly Used Services AUTHCTCP T19 ser CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software g DNS UDP TCP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX
295. ich is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The default is public and allows all requests Trap Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to SNMP Service Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Service Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the Prestige using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Address Prestige using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the Prestige using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the Prestige using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 225 Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens P 335 Series User s Guide 17 8 DNS Screen Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa Refer to the chapter on Wizard Setup for background information To change your Prestige s DNS settings click the Remote MGMT link under Management and the DNS tab The screen appears as shown Figure 125 DNS Remote Management DNS Service Port Service Access Secured Client IP Address all Selected 0 0 0 0 Re
296. ide 201 Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 15 Static Route Screens This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your Prestige 15 1 Static Route Overview Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the Prestige has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the Prestige knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node router R1 However the Prestige is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn t know that there is a route through the same remote node router R1 via gateway router R2 The static routes are for you to tell the Prestige about the networks beyond the remote nodes Figure 109 Example of Static Routing Topology 15 2 IP Static Route Screen Click the IP Static Route link under Management to open the IP Static Route screen The following screen displays Chapter 15 Static Route Screens 202 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 110 IP Static Route IP Static Route Static Route Rules pe Name active Destination Gateway Modify default e 0 0 0 0 210 192 31 14 sch kk e ec e Eb Eb amp E amp ei amp DD zw A Im A La NM ra The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 IP Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Number of an individual static route Name that describes or identifies this route Active This icon is turned on when this
297. ide 361 Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance This chapter tells you how to backup and restore your configuration file as well as upload new firmware and configuration files 37 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file often called the romfile or rom 0 contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password DHCP Setup TCP IP Setup etc It arrives from ZyXEL with a rom filename extension Once you have customized the Prestige s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension With many FTP and TFTP clients the filenames are similar to those seen next Note Only use firmware for your Prestige s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your Prestige ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Prestige Lop get Fom Contag crg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to the computer file config cfg If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Prestige only recognizes rom 0 and ras Be sure you keep unaltered
298. ide Figure 31 Connection Wizard Complete STEP 1 STEP 2 STEPS Ss Internet Configuration Please Click the Apply Button to Complete the Connection Wizard Note If you are currently using a Wireless PC card to access this router AND you made changes to the SSID then you will need to make the same changes to your Wireless PC card AFTER you click the Apply Button Once the changes have been made to the Wireless PC card you will be able to connect back to the router and continue the configuration process Well done You have successfully set up your Prestige to operate on your network and access the Internet Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 74 P 335 Series User s Guide 19 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard This chapter shows you how to configure basic bandwidth management using the wizard screens 4 1 Introduction Click the Bandwidth Management wizard option in the wizard language selection screen or click the hyperlink in the final Connection Wizard screen Bandwidth management allows you to control the amount of bandwidth going out through the Prestige s WAN port and prioritize the distribution of the bandwidth according to service bandwidth requirements This helps keep one service from using all of the available bandwidth and shutting out other users Figure 32 Welcome to the Bandwidth Management Wizard Welcome to the ZyXEL Bandwidth Managem
299. identiality for which the ESP was designed If you select AH here you must select options from the Authentication Algorithm field Encryption Algorithm The encryption algorithm for the Prestige and the secure remote gateway should be identical When DES is used for data communications both sender and receiver must know the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput Authentication Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop down list box MD5 Message Digest 5 Algorithm and SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA 1 for maximum security 181 Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Table 73 Advanced Rule Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION SA Life Time Define the length of time before an IKE SA automatically renegotiates in this field It may range from 60 to 3 000 000 seconds almost 35 days A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resource
300. ient for some valid WLAN clients If you don t hide the ESSID at least you should change the default one 5 2 5 G plus G plus is an enhancement to the IEEE 802 11g wireless standard G plus combines multiple frames into a larger frame size This increases wireless transmission speeds by allowing larger frames up to 4 KB to be sent G plus speed applies only to unicast traffic not broadcast or multicast G plus is automatically disabled if wireless transmission speeds fall below 11 Mbps 5 2 6 Using OTIST To automatically configure the wireless security settings and set the wireless client to use the same SSID and WEP or WPA PSK settings use the OTIST setup wizard or the advanced wireless OTIST screen To manually configure the security setting enter the WEP or WPA PSK keys and SSID in the wireless screen After that you can enter the same settings in the wireless client or run OTIST to have the wireless client acquire the SSID and key automatically If you change the SSID or the keys after OTIST you need to run OTIST again or enter them manually in the wireless client Note You must activate and start OTIST on both the Prestige and the wireless client at the same time See the wireless client Quick Start Guide for information on wireless client OTIST setup For more information on OTIST see Activating OTIST on page 99 5 3 Configuring Wireless LAN on the Prestige 1 Configure the SSID and WEP in the Wireless screen If y
301. if you do not want to configure this feature Once you have configured this menu press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 28 2 2 PPPoE Encapsulation The Prestige supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet You can only use PPPoE encapsulation when you re using the Prestige with a DSL modem as the WAN device If you change the Encapsulation to PPPoE then you will see the next screen Please see the appendix for more information on PPPoE Figure 158 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for PPPoE Encapsulation Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name MyISP Route IP Active Yes Encapsulation PPPoE Edit IP No Service Type Standard Telco Option Service Name Allocated Budget min 0 Outgoing Period hr 0 My Login Schedules My Password x x xx asied on TE ReEyoe to CONT rem trees ae Authen CHAP PAP Session Options Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec 100 Edit Traffic Redirect No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 28 2 2 1 Outgoing Authentication Protocol Generally speaking you should employ the strongest authentication protocol possible for obvious reasons However some vendor s implementation includes a specific authentication protocol in the user profile It will disconnect if the negotiated protocol is different from that in the user profile even when the negotiated protocol is stronger tha
302. if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and Second DNS Server the Prestige s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Third DNS Server Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it RIP and Multicast Setup Both is the default RIP Version The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Prestige sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting Multicasting can reduce the load on non router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets However if one
303. igurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information e ZyXEL Glossary and Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for an online glossary of networking terms and additional support documentation 36 P 335 Series User s Guide User Guide Feedback Help us help you E mail all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters zyxel com tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Thank you Syntax Conventions e Enter means for you to type one or more characters Select or Choose means for you to use one predefined choices e The SMT menu titles and labels are in Bold Times New Roman font Predefined field choices are in Bold Arial font Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets ENTER means the Enter or carriage return key ESC means the Escape key and SPACE BAR means the Space Bar e Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma For example click the Apple icon Control Panels and then Modem means first click the Apple icon then point your mouse pointer to Control Panels and then click Modem e For brevity s sake we will use e g as a shorthand for for instance and 1 e for that is or in other words throughout this manual Graphics Icons Key
304. immediately n F if the action is not matched no matter whether there are more rules to be checked there aren t in this example After you ve created the filter set you must apply it 1 Enter 11 from the main menu to go to menu 11 2 Go to the Edit Filter Sets field press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER 3 This brings you to menu 11 5 Apply a filter set our example filter set 3 4 Press ENTER to confirm after you enter the set numbers and to leave menu 11 5 34 4 Filter Types and NAT There are two classes of filter rules Generic Filter Device rules and protocol filter TCP IP rules Generic filter rules act on the raw data from to LAN and WAN Protocol filter rules act on the IP packets Generic and TCP IP filter rules are discussed in more detail in the next section When NAT Network Address Translation is enabled the inside IP address and port number are replaced on a connection by connection basis which makes it impossible to know the exact address and port on the wire Therefore the Prestige applies the protocol filters to the native IP address and port number before NAT for outgoing packets and after NAT for incoming packets On the other hand the generic or device filters are applied to the raw packets that appear on the wire They are applied at the point when the Prestige is receiving and sending the packets 1 e the interface The interface can be an Ethernet port or any other hardware port T
305. in a menu press ENTER to move to the next field You DOWN arrow can also use the UP DOWN arrow keys to move to the keys previous and the next field respectively Entering Type in or press You need to fill in two types of fields The first requires you to information SPACE BAR type in the appropriate information The second allows you then press to cycle through the available choices by pressing SPACE ENTER BAR lt gt or ChangeMe All fields with the symbol lt gt must be filled in order to be able to save the new configuration All fields with ChangeMe must not be left blank in order to Required fields be able to save the new configuration N A fields lt N A gt Some of the fields in the SMT will show a lt N A gt This symbol refers to an option that is Not Applicable Save your ENTER Save your configuration by pressing ENTER at the configuration message Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel Saving the data on the screen will take you in most cases to the previous menu Exit the SMT Type 99 then Type 99 at the main menu prompt and press ENTER to exit press ENTER the SMT interface After you enter the password the SMT displays the main menu as shown next 263 Chapter 23 Introducing the SMT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 144 SMT Main Menu Copyright 06 1994 2005 ZyXEL Communications Corp P 335 P 335WT Main Menu Getting Started Advanced Manageme
306. ing ES Internet address or ONS name Complete and valid address Use default queue on server Queue Name Pl Printer Model Generic H 12Click Add to select a printer model save and close the Printer List configuration screen Figure 287 Printer Model Printer List IP Printing 3 Printer s Address 192 168 1 1 Internet address or DNS name Complete and valid address C Use default queue on server Queue Name LP1 Printer Model ESP ES EPSON 24 Pin Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Photo Series CUPS v1 1 g EPSON Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 Ne ez 13The Name LP1 on 192 168 1 1 displays in the Printer List field The default printer Name displays in bold type 431 Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 288 Print Server 000 Printer List l Make Default Add Delete LP1 on 192 168 1 1 Stylus C43 Stopped 14Your Macintosh print server set up is complete You can now use the Prestige s print server to print from a Macintosh computer Refer to the Print Server on page 249 for information on your Prestige print server configuration screen Appendix D Print Server 432 P 335 Series User s Guide 433 Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix E Print Server Specifications This appendix provides details on the print server interface and system requirements Table 162 Print Se
307. intenance Upload System Firmware To upload the system firmware follow the procedure below le Launch the FTP client on your w rkstati 0n 2 Type open and the IP address of your system Then type root and SMT password as requested 3 Type put firmware filename ras where firmwarefilename is the name of your firmware upgrade file on your workstation and ras is the remote file name on the system 4 The system reboots automatically after a successful firmware upload For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP note that you must remain on this menu to upload system firmware using TFTP please see your manual Press ENTER to Exit 37 4 2 Configuration File Upload You see the following screen when you telnet into menu 24 7 2 Figure 225 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance Upload System Configuration File To upload the system configuration file follow the procedure below Launch the FTP client on your workstation Type open and the IP address of your system Then type root and SMT password as requested Type put configuration filename rom 0 where configurationfilename is the name of your system configuration file on your workstation which will be transferred to the rom 0 file on the system The system reboots automatically after the upload system configuration file pr
308. ion Algorithm MD5 Key N A AH Setup SPI Decimal N A Authentication Algorithm N A Key Press ENTER to Confirm Or ES0 to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 132 Menu 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Active Protocol Press SPACE BAR to choose from ESP Tunnel ESP Transport AH Tunnel or AH Transport and then press ENTER Choosing an ESP combination causes the AH Setup fields to be non applicable N A ESP Setup The ESP Setup fields are N A if you chose an AH Active Protocol SPI Decimal The SPI must be unique and from one to four integers 0 to 9 Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup 326 P 335 Series User s Guide 327 Table 132 Menu 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Encryption Press SPACE BAR to choose from NULL 3DES or DES and then press ENTER Algorithm Fill in the Key1 field below when you choose DES and fill in fields Key1 to Key3 when you choose 3DES Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption When you select NULL you do not enter any encryption keys Key1 Enter a unique eight character key Any character may be used including spaces but trailing spaces are truncated Fill in the Key1 field when you choose DES and fill in fields Key1 to Key3 when you choose 3DES Key2 Enter a unique eight character key It can be comprised of any character including spaces but trailing spaces are truncated Key3 Enter a unique eight charact
309. ion field This is the Many to One mapping discussed in section General NAT Examples The SUA Only read only option from the Network Address Translation field in menus 4 and 11 3 is specifically pre configured to handle this case 30 5 2 Example 2 Internet Access with an Inside Server The dynamic Inside Global Address is assigned by the ISP 305 Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 177 NAT Example 2 Inside Loca Addresses ILA ees N Internet Dynamic Inside Global Address In this case you do exactly as above use the convenient pre configured SUA Only set and also go to menu 15 2 to specify the Inside Server behind the NAT as shown in the next figure Figure 178 Menu 15 2 1 Specifying an Inside Server Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup Address Default Default 0 0 D Glas L Ki pe eee kes ee kok a O SOO oO see OS oo E ENER ENEE hehe tem ET k Sooo E E EE oo EC EE E O O O O O O O O O O Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 30 5 3 Example 3 Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers In this example there are 3 IGAs from our ISP There are many departments but two have their own FTP server All departments share the same router The example will reserve one IGA for each department with an FTP server and all departments use the other IGA Map the FTP servers to the first two IGAs and the other LAN traffic to the remaining IG
310. ion field and then press ENTER to make the schedule sets field available as shown next Figure 237 Applying Schedule Set s to a Remote Node PPPoE Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name MyISP Route IP Active Yes Encapsulation PPPoE Edit IP No Service Type Standard Telco Option Service Name Allocated Budget min 0 Oucgoing Period Uhr 0 My Login Schedules 1 2 3 4 My Password x x xx naed ane onecoa onr a6 Retype to Conf irm SERIFER Authen CHAP PAP Session Options Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec 100 Edit Traffic Redirect No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel You can apply up to four schedule sets separated by commas for one remote node Change the schedule set numbers to your preference s Chapter 40 Call Scheduling 388 P 335 Series User s Guide 389 Chapter 40 Call Scheduling P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 41 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and the corresponding remedies 41 1 Problems Starting Up the Prestige Table 153 Troubleshooting Starting Up Your Prestige PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the Make sure that the Prestige s power adaptor is connected to the Prestige and plugged LEDs turn on in to an appropriate power source Make sure that the Prestige and the power source when I turn on are both turned on the Prestige Turn the Prestige off and on lf the error persists you may have a hardware problem In this
311. ireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz D Security Security Mode 802 1x Static WEP DN Passphrase fi 2345 Generate WEP Encryption 64 bit WEP Di Authentication Method Auto v Q Note 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 256 bit WEP Enter 29 characters or 58 digit 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission C ASCII Hex key 1 oxe235485511 C key2 fOx292bbSthco A Key 3 fOx3dcd220bc8 tt Cc Key 4 0x97c74da650 ReAuthentication Timer 1800 In Seconds Idle Timeout 3500 In Seconds Authentication Server IP Address 10 10 10 10 Port Number he Shared Secret fi 2345678 Accounting Server 1 Active IP Address 0 0 0 0 Port Number 1813 Shared Secret Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Wireless 802 1x and Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Passphrase Enter a Passphrase up to 32 printable characters and clicking Generate The Prestige automatically generates a WEP key WEP Encryption Select 64 bit WEP 128 bit WEP or 256 bit WEP to enable data encryption Authentication This field is activated when you select 64 bit WEP 128 bit WEP or 256 bit Me
312. issieqrsmnntionitinieinenna 358 Figure 218 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic rrrrnrrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnennnnrennnennnnnnnnnnrn 359 TE RO EE 359 PENE EA EEE EE 364 Figure 221 FTP Session Example agedeelt 365 FOUG A TONE IMO Monu ERE ER NR 368 Figure 223 Restore Using FTP Session Evaomple 369 Figure 224 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 1 Upload System Firmware ccccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 370 Figure 225 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance ernnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnne 370 Figure 226 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload rrrrnnnnnnnornnnnnnrnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 371 Figure 227 Command Mode in Menu 24 rrnnnnnnannnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnrnnnnnnannnnnnnnnennnnnnnnen 374 TN NNN ee 375 Figure 229 Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control rnrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnennnnennnnennnnenn 375 Fe 230 B dgei Eg EE aaia 376 Figure 231 Menu 24 9 2 Call History ysicsacsedevnassevexmningsaieianssdacnavensacnaietastssiticnerttensseraassbanies 377 Figure 232 Menu 24 System Maintenance 378 Figure 233 Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Gettmg eee 379 Figure 234 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control rrrrnnnrnnnnvrvnnnrnennnernrnnrrennnerennnen 383 Figure 235 Menu 26 Schedule Setup EE 386 Figure 236 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup ENEE 387 Figure 237 Applying Schedule Set s to a Remote Node PPPOE cccccceeeeeeeeee eens 388 FR Eg LE EE EEE ERE 394 SIICHT 395 Va PEO EE
313. ithin an agent 4 Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 35 2 Supported MIBs The Prestige supports RFC 1215 and MIB II as defined in RFC 1213 as well as ZyXEL private MIBs The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistic data and monitor status and performance 35 3 SNMP Configuration To configure SNMP select option 22 from the main menu to open Menu 22 SNMP Configuration as shown next The community for Get Set and Trap fields is SNMP terminology for password 347 Chapter 35 SNMP Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 210 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration Menu 22 SNMP Configuration SNMP Get Community public Set Community public Trusted Host 0 0 0 0 Trap Community public Destination 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the SNMP configuration parameters Table 138 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration FIELD DESCRIPTION SNMP Get Community Type the Get Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Type the Set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station Trusted Host If you enter a trusted host your Prestige will only respond to SNMP messages from this address A blank default field means your Prestige will respond to all SNMP messages it receives regardless of source Community Type the trap c
314. itial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 37 2 5 TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations TFTP FTP and Telnet over WAN will not work when e You have disabled Telnet service in menu 24 11 e You have applied a filter in menu 3 1 LAN or in menu 11 5 WAN to block Telnet service e The IP address in the Secured Client IP field in menu 24 11 does not match the client IP If it does not match the Prestige will disconnect the Telnet session immediately e You have an SMT console session running 365 Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide 37 2 6 Backup Configuration Using TFTP The Prestige supports the up downloading of the firmware and the configuration file using TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol over LAN Although TFTP should work over WAN as well it is not recommended To use TFTP your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients To backup the configuration file follow the procedure shown next 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the Prestige and log in Because TFTP does not have any security checks the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address 2 Put the SMT in command interpreter CI mode by entering 8 in Menu 24 System Maintenance 3 Enter command sys stdio 0 to disable the SMT timeout so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted Enter command sys s
315. k Print Server Setup Wizard Installation Complete cece 418 FN NN EE 419 Figure 262 Network Print Monitor Setup Welcome rrrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennn 420 Figure 263 Network Print Monitor Setup Location REENEN ENEE 420 Figure 264 Network Print Monitor Setup Complete rrrnnrrnnrnnnnrnanrranernnrnnnrnrannnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 421 FN N 421 Figure 266 Add Printer Wizard Welcome Screen rrrnnnrnanenannnnnrnnannnannnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 422 Figure Es en ENE ERE 422 Figure 268 SPT EPOST EE 423 Figure 269 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Screen rrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnen 423 FOUS FT ee EEE NE ER NE 424 Figure 271 Additional Port Information Screen EE 424 Figure 272 Port Settings Screen EE 425 Figure 273 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Complete AA 425 Figure 274 Add PN TSN eege aenecieniea asta tenventcievenrienianieretimncasonerseactoers ease ee 426 Figure 275 Use Existing Driver Screen EEN 426 Figure 27 6 Name Your Printer SON EE 427 EEN Primer 0 eg EE tends 427 Figure 278 LOCATION and Comment Screen Lusmeeresakimsmnamiesnemmesennisajdksvinne 428 Figure 279 Frim Tost Fago SOGO aie paddies ee 428 Figure 280 Add Printer Wizard Complete rrarrrannnnnnnnannrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnannnnnennnennnnrnnnennn 429 FANN TT Jr 429 FR S 262 Macintosh HD NN Jared 429 Figuro 293 Appicalone TEE 430 FN EUT WEE 430 ge So PWO OOT FOOI ENN E 430 Figure 286 Printer Con
316. k Start Settings Control Panel Network Click the Identification tab note the entry for the Computer Name field and enter it as the System Name e In Windows 2000 click Start Settings and Control Panel and then double click System Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name e In Windows XP click Start My Computer View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name 3 2 2 Domain Name The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used While you must enter the host name System Name on each individual computer the domain name can be assigned from the Prestige via DHCP Click Next to configure the Prestige for Internet access 61 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 19 Connection Wizard System Information STEPI STEP 2 STEP 3 ES System Information Enter a name to help you identify your router on the network This information is optional and you may safely leave this field blank System Name P 335 P 335VVT The ISP s domain name is often sent automatically by the ISP to the router If you are having difficulty accessing ISP services you may need to enter the Domain Name manually in the fiel
317. k the Remove icon to delete an address mapping rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 5 1 Rule Setup Screen To edit a port forwarding rule click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Figure 73 Rule Setup Rule Setup Active Service Name ll Start Port fo End Port fo km Server IP Address Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Rule Setup Select the check box to enable this port forwarding entry Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry Service Name Type a Service Name to identify this port forwarding rule Start Port Type a start port number To forward only one port enter it again in the End Port field To specify a range of ports enter the last port to be forwarded in the End Port field Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 142 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 60 Rule Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION End Port Type an end port number Server IP Address Type the inside IP address of the server Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes 9 6 Trigger Port Forwarding Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on
318. ked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames 459 Appendix Wir
319. keywords and should not be confused with packet filtering via SMT menu 21 1 11 2 Restrict Web Features The Prestige can block web features such as ActiveX controls Java applets cookies and disable web proxies 11 3 Days and Times The Prestige also allows you to define time periods and days during which the Prestige performs content filtering 11 4 Filter Screen Click the Content Filter link under Security to open the Filter screen You will see the following message if Parental Control in TMSS is enabled If you want to use content filtering you must disable Parental Control Figure 78 Content Filter Disabled t Filter is disabled because Parental Control in TMS5 is enab Once you disable Parental Control you can configure the Content Filter screen as shown in the following figure Chapter 11 Content Filtering 152 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 79 Filter Filter Trusted IP Setup trusted computer has full access to all blocked resources 0 0 0 0 means there is no trusted computer Trusted Computer IP Address 1 1 1 1 Restrict Web Features I activex Fo Java Cookies 1 Web Proxy Keyword Blocking IV Enable URL Keyword Blocking Keyword Add Keyword List vn yahoo com wy nctu edu tw ww zyxel com tw Delete Clear Al Message to display when site is blocked Denied Access Message Msg Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Filter
320. ld in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to Single this is End the same static IP address as in the Local Addr Start field When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to Range this is the end static IP address in a range of computers on the LAN behind your Prestige When the Addr Type field in Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup is configured to SUBNET this is a subnet mask on the LAN behind your Prestige This field displays Tunnel mode or Transport mode See earlier for a discussion of these You need to finish configuring the VPN policy in menu 27 1 1 1 or 27 1 1 2 if 2 is displayed This field displays the security protocols used for an SA ESP provides confidentiality and integrity of data by encrypting the data and encapsulating it into IP packets Encryp tion methods include 56 bit DES and 168 bit 3DES NULL denotes a tunnel without encryption AH Authentication Header provides strong integrity and authentication by adding authentication information to IP packets This authentication information is calculated using header and payload data in the IP packet This provides an additional level of security AH choices are MD5 default 128 bits and SHA 1 160 bits Both AH and ESP increase the Prestige s processing requirements and communica tions latency delay You need to finish configuring the VPN policy in menu 27 1 1 1 or 27 1 1 2 if is displayed Key Mgt This field displays the SA s type of k
321. le 33 Wireless WPA ReAuthentication Timer in seconds Idle Timeout WPA Group Key Update Timer DESCRIPTION Specify how often wireless stations have to reenter usernames and passwords in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority The Prestige automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed The default time interval is 3600 seconds or 1 hour The WPA Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA key management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis Setting of the WPA Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK mode The Prestige default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value u
322. le describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Client List MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address Select this check box to have the Prestige always assign this IP address to this MAC address and host name You can select up to 8 entries in this table After you click Apply the MAC address and IP address also display in the Static DHCP screen where you can edit them Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table Reserve 133 Chapter 8 DHCP Server P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 9 Network Address Translation NAT This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Prestige 9 1 NAT Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet For example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network 9 1 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Prestige For example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the I
323. les Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user 1s encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Notice 1 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B
324. lick the DHCP Server link under Network and the Static DHCP tab The following screen displays 131 Chapter 8 DHCP Server P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 66 Static DHCP Static DHCP Table EEE EE TT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DD sy AA anA A N Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Static DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the Static IP table entry row MAC Address Type the MAC address with colons of a computer on your LAN IP Address Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 Client List Screen The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of all network clients using the Prestige s DHCP server Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name Click the DHCP Server link under Network and the Client List tab Note You can also view a read only client list by clicking the DHCP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen The following screen displays Chapter 8 DHCP Server 132 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 67 Client List Client List DHCP Client Table L TP Address HostName aC Address Reserve 1 a 192 168 1 33 twil477 02 00 50 8d 48 59 1f Apply Refresh The following tab
325. licy Application Priority D ef Name Service Dest Port Priority Modify T O O kk R R R E E E E E E E amp e amp ei Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 42 QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable WMM QoS Select the check box to enable WMM QoS on the Prestige WMM QoS Policy Select Default to have the Prestige automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends Select Application Priority from the drop down list box to display a table of application names services ports and priorities to which you want to apply WMM QoS H This is the number of an individual application entry This field displays a description given to an application entry Service This field displays either FTP WWW E mail or a User Defined service to which you want to apply WMM QoS Dest Port This field displays the destination port number to which the application sends traffic Priority This field displays the WMM QoS priority for traffic bandwidth Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 106 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 42 Qos DESCRIPTION Click the Edit icon to open the Application Priority Configuration screen Modify an existing application entry or create a application entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Pre
326. list box The Prestige s negotiation mode should be identical to that on the remote secure gateway Chapter 13 VPN Screens 180 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 73 Advanced Rule Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Encryption Algorithm Select DES or 3DES from the drop down list box The Prestige s encryption algorithm should be identical to the secure remote gateway When DES is used for data communications both sender and receiver must know the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput Authentication Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop down list box The Prestige s Algorithm authentication algorithm should be identical to the secure remote gateway MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate the source and integrity of packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Select SHA 1 for maximum security SA Life Time Define the length of time before an IKE SA automatically renegotiates in this field It may range from 60 to 3 000 000 seconds almost 35 days A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authen
327. ll Programs gt ET Run ES Log OFF 0 Turn Off Computer gt untitled Paint 2 For Windows XP click Network Connections For Windows 2000 NT click Network and Dial up Connections Figure 293 Windows XP Control Panel E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help R 3 ES Search Ke Folders Hab address F Control Panel vg Control Fanel e i 4 Tee Add Hardware g Switch to Category view Connections See Also G Game Controllers 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 448 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 294 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help QO E gt Ba po Search Wey Folders Bee Address e Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks x a ocal Area Connection a Create anew nabled connection Wf Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte A Set up a home or small Disable office network Status Wi Disable this network device Repair E Repair this connection Bridge Connections mi Rename this connection K3 view status of this connection Change settings of this i PENNE connection Create Shortcut Properties 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under the General tab in Win XP and click Properties Figure 295 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties Local Area C
328. lnet or Web SNMP manageable FTP for firmware downloading configuration backup and restoration Syslog Built in Diagnostic Tools for FLASH memory ADSL circuitry RAM and LAN port Syslog IEEE 802 11g Compliance Frequency Range 2 4 GHz Advanced Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM Data Rates 54Mbps and Auto Fallback Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Data Encryption 64 128 256 bit WLAN bridge to LAN Up to 32 MAC Address filters WPA WPA PSK OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology IEEE 802 1x External Radius server using EAP MD5 TLS TTLS Wi Fi Multimedia Management WMM Stateful Packet Inspection Prevent Denial of Service attacks such as Ping of Death SYN Flood LAND Smurf etc Real time E mail alerts Reports and logs Port Forwarding 2048 NAT sessions Multimedia application PPTP under NAT SUA IPSec passthrough SIP ALG passthrough Web page blocking by category BP a O Any IP Traffic Redirect Dynamic DNS IP Alias IP Policy Routing MBM Multimedia Bandwidth Management QoS Quality of Service Appendix A Product Specifications P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix B PPPoE PPPoE in Action An ADSL modem bridges a PPP session over Ethernet PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 from your computer to an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit which connects to a DSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates see the next figure One PVC can support any number of P
329. ls equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas For WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications Appendix J Antenna Selection and Positioning Recommendation 470 P 335 Series User s Guide e Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points e Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight The angle of the beam width determines the direction of the coverage pattern typically ranges from 20 degrees less directional to 90 degrees very directional The directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both transmitting and receiving antenna at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attend the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close
330. lt e Java permissions enabled by default See the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 2 2 Accessing the Prestige Web Configurator 1 Make sure your Prestige hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer computer network to connect to the Prestige refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Launch your web browser 3 Type 192 168 1 1 as the URL 4 Type 1234 default as the password and click Login In some versions the default password appears automatically if this is the case click Login 5 You should see a screen asking you to change your password highly recommended as shown next Type a new password and retype it to confirm and click Apply or click Ignore Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 48 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 7 Change Password Screen Please enter a new password Your router is currently using the default password To protect your network from unauthorized users we suggest you change your password at this time Please select new password that will be easy to remember yet difficult for others to guess We suggest you combine text with numbers to make it more difficult for a to guess Note The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires default five minutes Simply log back into the Prestige if this happens to you 2 3
331. make sure that no electrical gas or water pipes will be damaged Do NOT install nor use your device during a thunderstorm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool e Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports e Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e Do NOT store things on the device e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Safety Warnings 4 P 335 Series User s Guide ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product is modified misused tampere
332. mary Gorriplete Ifthe print server you want to set up is not displayed Refresh check the connection and click Refresh Mote fyour print server has just been turned on it may take a few minutes for the print server to initialize before it can be detected and displayed bythe wizard lt Back Cancel 5 The Change Settings screen displays Select the Yes I want to change settings radio button type a password and click Next to change your print server settings Alternatively select No I don t want to change settings and click Next to use the current print server settings and continue with the wizard 415 Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 256 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Change Settings Network Print Server Setup Wizard Ss x Welcome This Wizard allows the network administrator to change some basic settings ofthe print server Ifyou are notthe network administrator do not change settings Wrong settings may cause the print server not to function properly Si Select 4 Print Server Configure AW Comigure TOP IP C Yes wantto change settings Password No I dont wantto change settings Summary complete To change settings you must enter a password A brand new network print server has no default password In the next step you may have to configure the IP address of the network print server lt Back Cancel 6 Select the printer which is connected
333. ment ZyXEL s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth classes based on an application and or subnet You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to different bandwidth classes Trend Micro Security Services TMSS Trend Micro Security Services identifies vulnerabilities and protects computers and networks that have Internet connections TMSS is enabled by default on the Prestige but you must register at the TMSS web page After you register you can configure TMSS using the Prestige web configurator 39 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige P 335 Series User s Guide IPSec VPN Capability Establish a Virtual Private Network VPN to connect with business partners and branch offices using data encryption and the Internet to provide secure communications without the expense of leased site to site lines The Prestige VPN is based on the IPSec standard and is fully interoperable with other IPSec based VPN products Firewall The Prestige is a stateful inspection firewall with DoS Denial of Service protection By default when the firewall is activated all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN is blocked unless it is initiated from the LAN The Prestige firewall supports TCP UDP inspection DoS detection and prevention real time alerts reports and logs Content Filtering The Prestige can also block access to web sites containing keywords that you specify You can define time periods a
334. ment Rule and Filter Use the Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration screen to configure a bandwidth management rule Use bandwidth rules to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to specific applications and or subnets 16 3 1 Bandwidth Borrowing Enable bandwidth borrowing by selecting Use All Managed Bandwidth on a rule to allow the rule to use any unused bandwidth Unused bandwidth is given to the highest priority rule first To edit a bandwidth management rule click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 214 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 118 Bandwidth Management Rule and Filter Configuration Rule Configuration VM Active Rule Name BW Budget Priority M Use All Managed Bandwidth Filter Configuration Service Destination Address Destination Subnet Netmask Destination Port Source Address Source Subnet Netmask Source Port Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Bandwidth Management Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the Prestige apply this bandwidth management rule Enable a bandwidth management rule to give traffic that matches the rule priority over traffic that does not match the rule Rule Name Use the auto generated name or enter a descriptive name of up to 20 alphanumeric characters including spaces BW Budget Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed f
335. mer Support 6 P 335 Series User s Guide METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL support Qzyxel co uk 44 0 1344 303044 www zyxel co uk ZyXEL Communications UK 08707 555779 UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard UNITED KINGDOM only Eastern Road Bracknell sales zyxel co uk 44 0 1344 303034 ftp zyxel co uk Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK a is the prefix number you enter to make an international telephone call 7 Customer Support P 335 Series User s Guide Table of Contents KSE 2 Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement 3 No EWEN 4 EES KEE Eeer 5 PT TT ee EE ee EE EE 6 PET NNN ceca per orice cee te acne epee 8 Wu 36 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige mccscsiscstscexccsxacciassastsccsinsnesnanndivanzeesnernsantinanaarisaexastas 38 AO SEE 38 TPM esken 38 TENT NNN da Eiaa 39 1 2 3 Wireless Features P 335WT rrrrrnnannrnnnnnrrrnnnvnnnnnrnnrnnnrnvannrnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnn 43 1 3 Appicalons Tor EEE EE 44 LT NTN NN 44 1 3 2 Secure Broadband Internet Access via Cable or DSL Modem 44 E PR NN 45 1 3 4 Wireless LAN Application P 335WT nnnaannnannnnnnnnnennnnrnnnsnnesrnnnnnnnesnnnnne 45 LARO Fano LEDE arser isa nein aioe aes 46 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator xrnnnxnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnr 48 2 1 Web Configurator Overview EE 48 2 2 Accessing the Pre
336. mit access to the Prestige MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Prestige This is the index number of the MAC address MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the Prestige in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 7 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen See the appendix for background information on roaming To enable roaming on your Prestige click the Wireless LAN link under Network and then the Advanced tab The screen appears as shown 101 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT Figure 51 Advanced Advanced Roaming Configuration Enable Roaming Port Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold Fragmentation Threshold Preamble 351 7 a096 0 2432 4096 when G Enhanced 4096 256 2432 4096 when G Enhanced Long v P 335 Series User s Guide 802 11 Mode 802 119 Only DN I G Enhanced Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Roaming Configuration Enable Roaming Select the check box to enable roaming on the Prestige if you have two or more Prestiges on the same subnet Note All APs on the same subnet and
337. mmended Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting Chapter 13 VPN Screens 172 P 335 Series User s Guide 173 Table 72 Rule Setup continued LABEL DNS Server for IPSec VPN Local Address Remote Address Start Remote Address End Mask My IP Address Local ID Type Local Content Secure Gateway Address DESCRIPTION If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN type its IP address here The Prestige assigns this additional DNS server to the Prestige s DHCP clients that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule s range of local addresses A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their private domain names The local IP address must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router s configured remote IP addresses Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router s configured local IP addresses The remote address fields do not apply when the Secure Gateway Address field is configured to 0 0 0 0 In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can con
338. mt Cicek Cancel to ag Setup and then dote hive nerag Ob reefer dof poima WARMING Thit i Pr line ane P 335 Series User s Guide 4 The Choose Destination Location screen displays Choose a file location to install your print monitor and click Next to continue eg 263 Network Print Monitor Setup Location TS H CH Ne ah Pr rini Monitor for Windows 95 98 Me 5 The Setup Complete screen displays Click Finish to save your settings and close the wizard Appendix D Print Server 420 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 264 Network Print Monitor Setup Complete ech Hebwork Print Morstor Seta Network Print Monitor for Windows 95 98 Me Windows 2000 NT XP Computer Wizard Use the following wizard if you do not want to use the provided setup wizards Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 98 SE Second Edition and Windows ME have similar print server setups 1 Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Printers icon to open the Printers window 2 Double click the Add Printer icon Figure 265 Printers Screen Eq Printers File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ge Back gt tj Search LFolders 4 AS OS ei be Address Printers LaserJet IR SO00 60 8000 Seri 3 The Add Printer Wizard screen displays Click Next to continue 421 Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 266 Add Printer Wizard Welcome Screen Add Printer
339. n This table provides information on all TMSS client computers and the Status Prestige itself H This field displays the index number of a TMSS client computer or the Prestige IP Address This field displays the IP address of a TMSS client computer or Prestige Computer Name This field displays the host name of a TMSS client computer or the Prestige system name Antivirus Software This field displays Internet Security if TIS see the footnote on page 193 is installed on the TMSS client computer It displays N A if you don t aan TM anti virus software installed Virus Pattern This field displays the current TMSS anti virus pattern version number on a TMSS client Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services P 335 Series User s Guide Table 80 Virus Protection continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Scan Engine This field displays the current TMSS anti virus scan engine version number of a TMSS client Status This field displays whether you have the latest Trend Micro anti virus software installed on a TMSS client computer Potential Threat displays if e The Prestige had no response after an update request e There is currently no Trend Micro anti virus installed on the TMSS client The LAN computer is using a UNIX or Macintosh operating system This message displayed for computers with these operating systems does not mean they may be a potential threat but rather that TMSS cannot monitor them Needs Update displays if
340. n Tonn Fee Appendix E Print Server Specifications P 335 Series User s Guide Table 164 Compatible USB Printers Epson Swuscaux ww Frenn reg jw TI Fran eg ww TI EPSON SwusColorero ww Fran I necaent ww TI Epson SwusPhotostS wa Ir Frenn SwusPnototz70 we TI Frenn epes we Ir Frenn SwusPnotosto ww TI Epson pe we Ir Fan an Il Epson spe we Ir Laser SS Fam Ca LI Epson Iron ee TI Frenn SmuePnotossU we Ir TM T88lll DeskJet 1125C Inkjet Change data type to EMF and disable bi directional support on printer DeskJet 1220C Inkjet Change data type to EMF and disable bi directional support on printer E ee a Kg ee EE eck oo DE ie SS ee Ss es SSS Appendix E Print Server Specifications 436 P 335 Series User s Guide 437 Table 164 Compatible USB Printers omme re fe gt fe e e eg me e sem mw fee St e mw pm pm me e pws me fe bm fe bm fe em fee be e em en on em e vom em en vo een em MN Appendix E Print Server Specifications P 335 Series User s Guide Table 164 Compatible USB Printers Z42 PS For MFP the print server supports the printing function only m x lt gt E A N a l 3 E i CO Appendix E Print Server Specifications 43 P 335 Series User s Guide 4
341. n Type Ethernet PPP over Ethernet E The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Connection Wizard WAN Connection Type CONNECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION Ethernet Select the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet PPPoE Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial up connection If your ISP gave you a an IP address and or subnet mask then select PPTP PPTP Select the PPTP option for a dial up connection 3 4 1 Ethernet Connection Type Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet Figure 25 Ethernet Connection Type ES Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type 3 4 2 PPPoE Connection Type Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE functions as a dial up connection PPPoE is an IETF Internet Engineering Task Force draft standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem for example DSL cable wireless etc to achieve access to high speed data networks For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for instance Radius For the user PPPoE provides a login and authentication method that the existing Microsoft Dial Up Networking software can activate and therefore requires no new learning or procedures for Windows users One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end
342. n next displays active VPN connections Note When there is outbound traffic but no inbound traffic the SA times out automatically after two minutes A tunnel with no outbound or inbound traffic is idle and does not timeout until the SA lifetime period expires See the Web configurator part on keep alive to have the Prestige renegotiate an IPSec SA when the SA lifetime expires even if there is no traffic 33 2 Using SA Monitor 1 Use the Refresh function to display active VPN connections 2 Use the Disconnect function to cut off active connections 3 Type 2 in Menu 27 VPN IPSec Setup and then press ENTER to go to Menu 27 2 SA Monitor Chapter 33 SA Monitor 328 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 195 Menu 27 2 SA Monitor Menu 27 2 SA Monitor Taiwan 3 3 3 1 SS 3 3 3 100 Tunnel ESP DES MD5 Select Command Refresh Select Connection N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 133 Menu 27 2 SA Monitor FIELD DESCRIPTION This is the security index number This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy This name is unique for each connection where the secure gateway IP address is a public static IP address When the secure gateway IP address is 0 0 0 0 as discussed in the last chapter there may be different connections using this same VPN rule In this case the name is followed by the remote IP address as configured in Menu 27
343. n pre defined web site categories Note See the TM User s Guide for details on all features Click the TMSS link under Security 14 2 Configuring TMSS on the Prestige 1 Use the Service Settings screen to enable or disable TMSS configure how often the TMSS web page displays and exempt computers from TMSS monitoring 1 All TMSS processes and names used are correct at the time of writing Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services P 335 Series User s Guide 2 Use the Virus Protection screen to configure if and how often updates are checked and to display the status of computers under TMSS monitoring 3 Use the Parental Controls screen to schedule and block web pages based on pre defined web site categories such as pornography gambling etc 14 2 1 TMSS General Screen Click the General tab from the TMSS main screen to display the screen shown next Note At the time of writing TMSS may monitor up to 10 Prestige LAN computers with TMSS installed The Prestige must have an Internet connection for TMSS clients to display in this screen Figure 105 General TMSS amp Parental Control Setup IV Enable Trend Micro Security Services IV Enable Parental Controls Security Services Display Interval Automatically display TMSS Web page every 1 day v Check for Trend Micro Internet Security IV Automatically check for update components Check for update components every 30 minutes Di Scan Engine N A Virus Pattern
344. n specified If you encounter a case where the peer disconnects right after a successful authentication please make sure that you specify the correct authentication protocol when connecting to such an implementation Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration 286 P 335 Series User s Guide 28 2 2 2 Nailed Up Connection A nailed up connection is a dial up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand The Prestige does two things when you specify a nailed up connection The first is that idle timeout is disabled The second is that the Prestige will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down A nailed up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons Do not specify a nailed up connection unless your telephone company offers flat rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern The following table describes the fields not already described in Table 117 Table 118 Fields in Menu 11 1 PPPoE Encapsulation Specific FIELD DESCRIPTION Service Name If you are using PPPoE encapsulation then type the name of your PPPoE service here Only valid with PPPoE encapsulation Authen This field sets the authentication protocol used for outgoing calls Options for this field are e CHAP PAP Your Prestige will accept either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node e CHAP accept CHAP only e PAP accept PAP only Telco Option Allocated Budget
345. ncel to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel and go back to the previous screen Note Menu 15 1 255 is read only 30 3 1 1 User Defined Address Mapping Sets Now let s look at option 1 in menu 15 1 Enter I to bring up this menu Well just look at the differences from the previous menu Note the extra Action and Select Rule fields mean you can configure rules in this screen Note also that the in the Set Name field means that this is a required field and you must enter a name for the set Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT 300 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 171 Menu 15 1 1 First Set Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Ser Names NAT SET Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Les Da SE A om Ox Ka Bi Ep oe 1 Action Edit Select Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Note If the Set Name field is left blank the entire set will be deleted Note The Type Local and Global Start End IPs are configured in menu 15 1 1 1 described later and the values are displayed here 30 3 1 2 Ordering Your Rules 301 Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty
346. nd days during which content filtering is enabled and include or exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering Packet Filtering The packet filtering mechanism blocks unwanted traffic from entering leaving your network Time and Date The Prestige allows you to get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Prestige You can also set the time manually Universal Plug and Play UPnP Using the standard TCP IP protocol the Prestige and other UPnP enabled devices can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network Call Scheduling Configure call time periods to restrict and allow access for users on remote nodes PPPoE PPPoE facilitates the interaction of a host with an Internet modem to achieve access to high speed data networks via a familiar dial up networking user interface Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige 40 P 335 Series User s Guide 41 PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using a TCP IP based network PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet The Prestige supports one PPTP server connection at any given time Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS Domain Name System suppor
347. nd have OTIST enabled Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige 38 P 335 Series User s Guide 10 100 Mbps Auto negotiating Ethernet Fast Ethernet Interface s This auto negotiation feature allows the Prestige to detect the speed of incoming transmissions and adjust appropriately without manual intervention It allows data transfer of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode depending on your Ethernet network Auto negotiation allows data transfer of 100 Mbps in full duplex mode Auto crossover 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Interface s These interfaces automatically adjust to either a crossover or straight through Ethernet cable 4 Port Switch A combination of switch and router makes your Prestige a cost effective and viable network solution You can add up to four computers to the Prestige without the cost of a hub Add more than four computers to your LAN by using a hub Reset Button The Prestige reset button is built into the rear panel Use this button to restore the factory default password to 1234 IP address to 192 168 1 1 subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 and DHCP server enabled with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting at 192 168 1 33 1 2 2 Non Physical Features Print Server The Prestige has a built in print server that allows computers on the LAN to share a USB printer This eliminates the need to assign a dedicated computer as a print server or have a standalone print server device Bandwidth Manage
348. ned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that 1s easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your Prestige but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Prestige will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Prestige unless you are instructed to do otherwise 3 4 7 DNS Server Address Assignment Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The Prestige can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways 1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you
349. nels the PPP frames to the PNS The PPTP user is unaware of the tunnel between the PAC and the PNS Figure 251 PPTP Protocol Overview PPTP User Phone call PAC PPP frames PNS Microsoft includes PPTP as a part of the Windows OS In Microsoft s implementation the computer and hence the Prestige is the PNS that requests the PAC the ANT to place an outgoing call over AALS to an RFC 2364 server Control amp PPP Connections Each PPTP session has distinct control connection and PPP data connection Call Connection The control connection runs over TCP Similar to L2TP a tunnel control connection is first established before call control messages can be exchanged Please note that a tunnel control connection supports multiple call sessions The following diagram depicts the message exchange of a successful call setup between a computer and an ANT 409 Appendix C PPTP P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 252 Example Message Exchange between Computer and an ANT Start Control Connection Request Outgoing Call Request gt Outgoing Call Reply PPP Data Connection The PPP frames are tunneled between the PNS and PAC over GRE General Routing Encapsulation RFC 1701 1702 The individual calls within a tunnel are distinguished using the Call ID field in the GRE header Appendix C PPTP 410 P 335 Series User s Guide 411 Appendix C PPTP P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix D Print Server This ap
350. nenernnnennennnenunnnnennnnnuennnene 51 Table 4 Screens Summary RE EE NE EN NE 52 eV 54 Tabie 6 NTP re 55 Table 7 Summary Parental Control Statistics rrrrrrnrrnnrnnnrnannrnrnnnrnannnnenannnaennnrnnnnanennnnnn 56 Table 8 Summary Wireless Association List ccccccceccesecseeceeeeeeceeceseeaeeceeseueeeeeeeeseeees 57 Table 9 Summary Packet Statistics rrarrareranrnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnenannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnsnnennnnnnnnnanennsene 58 TR TN TNT EE 58 Table 11 Connection Wizard System Information 62 Table 12 Connection Wizard Wireless LAN cccccccseccsscceeeeceeceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeess 63 ei ES EE 64 Table 14 Extend WPA2 PSK and WPA2 PSK Security rrrrrrerenronenranerrnnnennanenrnnennanennnn 65 TR E e W 66 Table 16 Connection Wizard WAN Connection Type cccceccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeesaees 67 Table 17 PPPoE Connection Type arsen eee eee her er sent rennet ee eee ene 68 TT NNN Ses 69 HE Lei ER 70 Table 20 Private IP Address Ranges NENNEN 70 Table 21 IP and DNS Server Address Assignment 72 Table 22 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses 73 Table 25 WAN MAG Address EEN C Table 24 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services rrrrrrrunnrnnenanennnnnnnnnrnnennnnnnnnnn 76 Table 25 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees TT Table 26 Bandwidth Management Wizard Services mrr
351. network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following 1 Dynamic port mapping 2 Learning public IP addresses 3 Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the SUA NAT chapter for further information about NAT 18 1 3 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments Chapter 18 UPnP 228 P 335 Series User s Guide All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention 18 2 UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum Creates UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports IGD 1 0 Internet Gateway Device At the time of writing ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Windows Messenger 4 6 and 4 7 while Windows Messenger 5 0 and Xbox are still being tested UPnP broadcasts are only allowed on the LAN Please see later in this User s Guide for examples of installing UPnP in Windows XP and Windows Me as well as an example of using UPnP in Windows
352. network cables Wireless stations can move freely anywhere in the coverage area and use resources on the wired network 45 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 4 Internet Access Application Example hy L Wireless LAN Connection p N Smit Internet bi be Cable ADSL Modem 1 4 Front Panel LEDs Figure 5 P 335 Front Panel ZyXEL CWR CAND CAND CANS CANS CWAN ID E2 Cs Figure 6 P 335WT Front Panel ZyXEL The following table describes the LEDs Table 1 Front Panel LEDs COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green On The Prestige is receiving power and functioning properly Blinking The Prestige is performing testing Red On Power to the Prestige is too low The Prestige is not receiving power Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige 46 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 1 Front Panel LEDs continued LED LAN 1 4 WAN WLAN OTIST 47 COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green On The Prestige has a successful 10Mb Ethernet connection Blinking The Prestige is sending receiving data Amber On The Prestige has a successful 100Mb Ethernet connection Blinking The Prestige is sending receiving data The LAN is not connected Green On o The Prestige has a successful 10Mb WAN connection Blinking Blinking The dea is sending receiving data connection TK Blinking The Prestige is sending receiving data None 10 The WAN connec
353. network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 140 Temporarily Disconnected A Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Prestige IP address 192 168 1 1 See your Quick Start Guide for details on how to set up your computer s IP address If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen Figure 141 Configuration Restore Error Status 4 file system error was detected disk full 22 2 3 Back to Factory Defaults Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user entered configuration information and returns the Prestige to its factory defaults You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Prestige Refer to the Introducing the Web Configurator chapter for more information on the RESET button 22 3 Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the Prestige without turning the power off Click the Tools link under Maintenance and the Restart tab Click Restart to have the Prestige reboot This does not affect the Prestige s configuration 257 Chapter 22 Tools P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 142 System Restart Restart System Restart Click Restart to have the device perform a
354. nfiguration for this screen See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen 5 4 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption 85 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your Prestige your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 38 Wireless No Security Generel Wireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz v Security Security Mode no Security Di Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Wireless No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose No Security from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 4 2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key Your Prestige allows you to configure up to four 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time In order to configure
355. nfiguring an Individual Rule maer 302 Figure 173 Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup aervanorerenenervnnannvanrerennnennnenernenvrennnanesaneneneneune 303 Figure 174 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example EEN 304 KEN ES RE EEE ETE TE EE ME 305 Figure 176 Menu 4 Internet Access amp NAT Example rrrrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnvnnennnnrnnnnrnnnrennnnennnnen 305 SEP EEE EE 306 Figure 178 Menu 15 2 1 Specifying an Inside Server rrrarrrnnnnnnnnnannnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 306 FN TN AN aS 307 Figure 180 NAT Example SMET Jevne eden 308 Figure 151 Example WT EN En D DEE 309 Figure 182 Example 3 Final Menu T LI eden 309 Fe 183 Example 3 Monu EE ES 310 Figure 184 NAT Example REESE es eas ee ee EE 310 Figure 185 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule r rrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennn 311 Figure 186 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules rrrarrnanrnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 311 Figure 187 kienu ME Forn SEUD EE 312 Figure 188 Menu 21 2 Firewall Setup cccccccceecceseeeseecececeeeceeecaeecueeceeeseueeseeesseesseeseas 315 Figure 189 VPN SMT Menu Tree ten scares suttanctnednnvaransunertucnnduanaetedneiaeepinewimetectnssamneseenspaes 316 Figure 190 Menu FP Setup WEE 317 POO T O reel 317 Foure 192 Menu 27 1 1 IFP OC Slup EE 320 Foure 193 Menu 27 Ee NW EE 324 Figure 194 Menu 27 1 1 2 Manual Setup arrnrernnrnnnnrnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnennn 326 re DO REMA ERE 329 Figure 196 Outgoin
356. ng Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday April and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s Time Server Address Enable Daylight Saving time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Chapter 20 System 246 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 100 Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Last Sunday Octob
357. nifies any protocol Local Local IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router s config ured remote IP addresses Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Addr Type This field displays SINGLE for a single IP address Local IP Addr Enter a static IP address on the LAN behind your Prestige 321 Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup P 335 Series User s Guide Table 129 Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Port Start 0 is the default and signifies any port Type a port number from 0 to 65535 You cannot create a VPN tunnel if you try to connect using a port number that does not match this port number or range of port numbers Some of the most common IP ports are 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POP3 End Enter a port number in this field to define a port range This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field This field is N A when 0 is configured in the Port Start field Remote Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router s con figured local IP addresses The remote fields are N A when the Secure Gateway Address field is configured to 0 0 0 0 Two active SAs cannot have
358. nless your network administrator instructs You to do so with additional information Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide Table 33 Wireless WPA LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the Prestige The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Prestige The key is not sent over the network Accounting Server Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server The default port number is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the Prestige The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your Prestige The key is not sent over the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 4 10 802 1x Overview You need the following for IEEE 802 1x authentication e A computer with an IEEE 802 11 a b g wirel
359. nn 362 T R eg EE ees 362 ee Uy TMI OI EEE EE ardane adi 363 Table of Contents 18 P 335 Series User s Guide T R TE EEE 363 37 2 2 Using the FTP Command from the Command Line annnnnnrnnnnennnnennnnen 364 37 2 3 Example of FTP Commands from the Command Line rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnre 365 TERESE EEE 365 37 2 5 TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations rrrrareranennnnrnnre 365 37 2 0 Backup Coniguration Using TF P tier gegen AE hehehe Age 366 TET TT Command EE ve 366 37 2 0 GUl based TFTP Clients Lane maa deeg GEAR 367 FANN EE 367 dranl Peer LUOTO FTI Gen 367 37 3 2 Restore Using FTP Session Example ccccsscccsecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeesnees 369 37 4 Uploading Firmware and Configuration Files rrrrrnrrrnnrrrnnrnvnnrernnrnvnnrrnnnnen 369 37 4 1 Firmware File Upload A 369 FA TN File VANN EE 370 37 4 3 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 370 37 4 4 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload rrrrnnrrnnreranennnrnnnrnnnrr 371 TE REE EE 371 37 4 6 TFTP Upload Command Example a nnonnannannnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 372 Chapter 38 oS ETE Te E 374 30 1 Command IMerpreler MOQO E 374 EE ien CN 374 Nae OI EEN 379 PE Ege EE 315 30 2 1 EE RE 375 ENN sii EEA 376 EE HME BEG SEUNG WEE 377 38 3 1 Resetting the Time EEE 380 Chapter 39 Eeg EE ER RE 382 GE og EEE 382 39 1 1 Remote Management Limitations rnrrnnnnennnnornenennnnernnnvrnnnvnnnnennnnennnn 3
360. nnenne 226 Figure 126 Security Remote Management AEN 227 Figure 127 Configuring EEE EE SN PER 229 FV GN PT FN EE 241 FT veve Ree 242 Foure T30 Dinamie ONG vare 244 PNS T ME ra E EAEE E 245 FT eee 249 FOUS 123 LOG SONGE PR EE ER 251 Figure 134 Maintenance Firmware Upload uk 254 Faure 139 EEE S 255 Figure 136 Network Temporarily Disconnected rrrrnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnenanennnnnnnnennnrnnnennnrnnnnnnnnenne 255 Figure 137 Upload Error Message re One 255 TNS 256 Figure 139 Configuration Restore Successful scscsicceiccscrsiccsssciwcsissavesnecesndeeresesdarsnesscsapesvecees 257 Figure 140 Temporarily Disconnected rrnrrrnnrrnnnnnnnrnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnanrnnnnnnnnenanennnennnennnnnnnsenne 257 Figure 141 Configuration Restore Error EEE 257 FONR es ROSII EE 258 Figure 143 Login NY reegt Aerer 261 SEET Oe eege 264 Figure 145 Menu 23 System Password rrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnennnennnnnnsenne 265 Figure 146 Menu 1 General Setup EEN 267 Figure 147 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS rrrrnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnvnnnnnnnnenne 268 FOUS TS NOI Z WAN EE e aa 270 Figure 149 Menu 3 LAN Setup WEE 272 Figure 150 Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup geesde eege geg deele 272 Figure 151 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup rrrrnrrrnnrrrrarernnnrrrnrenrnnennanennnnen 273 Figure 152 Physical Network amp Partitioned Logical Networks rrrrrrrnrrnnnnnnnennnrnnnennarnnnenn 275 Figure 193 Menu
361. nnne 90 Figure 43 Wireless WPA ER 91 Figure 44 Wireless 802 1x and Dynamic WEP 93 Figure 45 Wireless 802 1x and Static WEP E 95 FE KN REE EE 97 FE JE PRE EE EE 99 FO KST EE EE tan 100 Foure d3 OTST FOSS E 100 NTN en 101 MTT 102 Nes 106 Figure 53 Application Priority Configuration scicercisescasevaivesesaoreseeindesvsuviscisernesesancicdisesmisisecias 107 FOTS 54 EMS Encapsulation E 111 FOR 39 FPFFOE ENN entgeet dee Seele eeben 113 Fe PEN NNN 115 FOUG EE een 117 FR Se Irae FAST WAN SEN E 118 Figure 59 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup cicasecsesacenveseseanecnesaudevenndvatesterechanisnesesieiseesseemsrasbanins 119 Figure 60 WAN Traffic Redirect EE 119 Figure STANY IF FOTEN Ane 124 GEN JR E REN EEE 126 ART PT arr 127 GE ET gs DE A R 128 FE erte 130 FANN geet 132 Bile Cer ge ec geen 133 FOUG EC NAT EE EE Perr tert etn Creer ener te ket en rrr RE 136 Figure 69 NAT Application With IP Alias EE 136 Figure 70 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example rrrnnennnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenne 140 FT NN 140 PP FN EE 141 Figure 73 Rule SELD TEE 142 Figure 74 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example cccsseccsseceseceseccsersoseconsenserens 143 FOUS To GE 145 TN hr 148 FEE dengt 149 Figure 73 Content FIAT LIGA WEE 152 UR TN 153 List of Figures P 335 Series User s Guide Fe ee EEE 155 Figure 81 Encrypion and Decryption EE 159 Figure 92 NS RE EEE EE 160 Figure 83 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Enca
362. nnnnnnn 193 Figure 104 Example TMSS Activated Parental Controls Screen rrrrrrnnrrnnnrnrnnrranrnnnennnnnn 193 FS NN eee 194 Foure 10G Exception LIST meeega 196 Ter EE ee 197 Figure 108 Farental Controls gett ebe eer 198 Figure 109 Example of Static Routing Topology ONE 202 PRP ROUI geed 203 Figure 111 Static Roule SeU Ledende 204 Figure 112 Application based Bandwidth Management Example cccssccceeeeeeeeeneeees 207 Figure 113 Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 207 Figure 114 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example 208 Figure 115 Bandwidth Lenert ci inerdcasienmsi staan edavu dekke isje 209 Figure 116 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example cccccccceecceeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeesaeeaes 210 Figure 117 Bandwidth Management Configuration cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeesaeeeess 213 Figure 118 Bandwidth Management Rule and Filter Configuration rarrrnnrrnnrrnnnnvanennnnnnn 215 Figure 119 WWW Remote Management uk 219 Figure 120 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Network 220 Figure 121 Telnet Remote Management uk RENE 221 Figure 122 FTP Remote Management EE 222 List of Figures 24 P 335 Series User s Guide 25 Figure 123 SNMP Management Model NEE 223 Figure 124 SNMP Remote Management uk 225 Figure 125 DNS Remote Management rrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnannnnnennnennnnnn
363. nnnrnnnrrnnnnnnsrrannnnnennnnnnnnnnn 88 5 4 7 Wireless Client WPA Supplicants ccccscccseeceseceeeeeseeseeeseeeseeeneeess 89 5 4 8 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example rrornrrnnrrnannnrnnnrnnnrnrnnnnnnnennnn 90 5 4 9 WPA Authentication Screen ENN 90 RES EE EE EE 92 5 4 11 802 1x and Dynamic WEP Key Exchange Screen rrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnennnn 92 5 4 12 802 1x and Static WEP Key Exchange Screen rrrurnnnnenanennnrnnernnnnnnnnn 94 EE EE ER EEE EE 97 E ML WEEN 98 FE 00 Sk FG WEE 99 GET PE EEE 100 PV NS 100 5 7 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen mummmenmeasmmemleivmneeivrimeiv 101 NNN 103 FT NNN NN ann 103 5 0 2 WMM OS POTENS sanicrssnavarsisnaisaustedseiaxersnseiaciosieanieeqieiieiemesecemansinis 103 Eg ER ER EE iene r 104 GE En ee E eee 105 5 9 1 ToS Type of Service and WMM QOS REENEN 106 5 10 Application Priority Configuration Screen rrrrrrnrnrrrarrrannrnnernnrrnnrnnnnnnnnennnennne 107 Chapter 6 EE NN NE 110 ETNE EE 110 Ce Ei NN Gen 110 PE Eee EE EE EES 110 JE EEE ER NN 111 6 4 1 Ethernet Encapsulation eneren dan 111 ER EEE EE a aeons 112 6 4 3 PPTP Encapsulation ep ekke 114 Fe EEE aa A 116 GE EE 118 6 7 Traffic Redirect Screen ER RAR ee 119 Table of Contents 10 P 335 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 EJ EEE 122 ew Cha NG 122 L N 122 FJ System DNS SN ene 122 ENGL JE EE 122 ENN VPN 122 1 2 2 P Address and Subnet Mask Leken 123 TAP NNN eeh 123 EN EE 123 PN 124 FN PN Je 125
364. nt 1 General Setup 21 Filter and Firewall Setup 2 WAN Setup 22 SNMP Confrguration 3 LAN Setup 23 System Password 4 Internet Access Setup 24 System Maintenance 26 Schedule Setup 27 VPN IPSec Setup Advanced Applications 11 Remote Node Setup 12 Static Rouring Setup 15 NAT Setup 99 EXIT Enter Menu Selection Number 23 2 1 System Management Terminal Interface Summary The following table describes the fields in the previous screen Table 107 Main Menu Summary GE MENU TITLE DESCRIPTION General Setup Use this menu to set up your general information WAN Setup Use this menu to clone a MAC address from a computer on your LAN LAN Setup Use this menu to set up your LAN connection 4 Internet Access Setup Configure your Internet Access setup Internet address gateway login etc with this menu emote Node Setup Use this menu to configure detailed remote node settings your ISP is also a remote node as well as apply WAN filters 11 12 Static Routing Setup Use this menu to set up static routes 15 NAT Setup Use this menu to specify inside servers when NAT is enabled 21 Filter and Firewall Setup Use this menu to configure filters activate deactivate the firewall and view the firewall log on SNMP Configuration Use this menu to set up SNMP related parameters EW System Security Use this menu to change your password 22 23 etc 26 i 26 Schedule Setup Use this menu to schedule outgoing calls
365. nter a descriptive name or comment in the Edit Comments field and press ENTER 5 Press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to confirm to open Menu 21 1 1 Filter Rules Summary This screen shows the summary of the existing rules in the filter set The following tables contain a brief description of the abbreviations used in the previous menus Table 134 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu FIELD DESCRIPTION The filter rule number 1 to 6 Active Y means the rule is active N means the rule is inactive The type of filter rule GEN for Generic IP for TCP IP Filter Rules These parameters are displayed here M More Y means there are more rules to check which form a rule chain with the present rule An action cannot be taken until the rule chain is complete N means there are no more rules to check You can specify an action to be taken i e forward the packet drop the packet or check the next rule For the latter the next rule is independent of the rule just checked Chapter 34 Filter Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Table 134 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu FIELD DESCRIPTION m Action Matched F means to forward the packet immediately and skip checking the remaining rules D means to drop the packet N means to check the next rule n Action Not Matched F means to forward the packet immediately and skip che
366. nternet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser e User Defined User defined services are user specific services configured using known ports and applications Dest Port This displays the port the selected service uses Type a port number in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port See table 57 for information on port numbers Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen Chapter 5 108 P 335 Series User s Guide 109 Chapter 5 P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WAN This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings 6 1 WAN Overview See the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on the fields in the WAN screens 6 2 TCP IP Priority Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost The metric sets the priority for the Prestige s routes to the Internet If the routes have the same metric the Prestige uses the following
367. nterpreter CI is a part of the main system firmware The CI provides much of the same functionality as the SMT while adding some low level setup and diagnostic functions Enter the CI from the SMT by selecting menu 24 8 See the included disk or the zyxel com web site for more detailed information on CI commands Enter 8 from Menu 24 System Maintenance A list of valid commands can be found by typing help or at the command prompt Type exit to return to the SMT main menu when finished Figure 227 Command Mode in Menu 24 Menu 24 System Maintenance system Status System Information and Console Port Speed Log and Trace Diagnostic Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Firmware Update Command Interpreter Mode o Call Control O Time and Date Setting 1 Remote Management Setup d 2 3 4 Bra Ox Ta 8 9 il d Enter Menu Selection Number 38 1 1 Command Syntax e The command keywords are in courier new font e Enter the command keywords exactly as shown do not abbreviate e The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt e The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets e The symbol means or e For example e sys filter netbios config lt type gt lt on off gt e means that you must specify the type of netbios filter and whether to turn it on or off Chapter 38 System Maintenance 374 P 335 Series User s Guide 38 1 2 Command Usage
368. o ougdrg mach Pate Makt Cal Feng O makt Hise cal Mine rol up ri patel ard reel Hie Ter BIH dets Call Fillers mb m ee ep ra pm dl gg Drop paste lte rol ug Drop Iron pael pater Kie rep i patel E 22rd pel Bul dorel e bu do rol re sel De Ter Hle Timer For incoming packets your Prestige applies data filters only Packets are processed depending upon whether a match is found The following sections describe how to configure filter sets Chapter 34 Filter Configuration 332 P 335 Series User s Guide 34 1 1 The Filter Structure of the Prestige A filter set consists of one or more filter rules Usually you would group related rules e g all the rules for NetBIOS into a single set and give it a descriptive name The Prestige allows you to configure up to twelve filter sets with six rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system You cannot mix device filter rules and protocol filter rules within the same set You can apply up to four filter sets to a particular port to block multiple types of packets With each filter set having up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for a single port Sets of factory default filter rules have been configured in menu 21 to prevent NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls and to prevent incoming telnet sessions A summary of their filter rules is shown in the figures that follow The following
369. o this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts RIP Direction Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP direction from Both None In Only Out Only See the LAN Setup chapter for more information on RIP The default for RIP on the WAN side is None It is recommended that you do not change this setting Version Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP 2B RIP 2M or None Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and version 2 IGMP v2 Press SPACE BAR to enable IP Multicasting or select None to disable it See the LAN Setup chapter for more information on this feature Once you have completed filling in Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration and return to menu 11 or press ESC at any time to cancel 28 4 Remote Node Filter Move the cursor to the field Edit Filter Sets in menu 11 1 and then press SPACE BAR to set the value to Yes Press ENTER to open Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Use menu 11 5 to specify the filter set s to apply to the incoming and outgoing traffic between this remote node and the Prestige to prevent certain packets from triggering calls You can specify up to 4 filter sets separated by commas for
370. o button and then click the Next button if you want to print a test page A pop up screen displays to ask if the test page printed correctly Otherwise select the No radio button and then click Next to continue Figure 279 Print Test Page Screen Add Printer Wizard Print Test Page To confirm that the printer is installed properly you can print a test page Do vou want to print a test page e Yes C Ho lt Back Cancel 29 The following screen shows your current printer settings Select the Finish button to complete the print server setup Appendix D Print Server 428 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 280 Add Printer Wizard Complete Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard Tou have successfully completed the Add Printer wizard You specified the following printer settings Mame EPSOM Stylus Shared as EPSON Sty Part IP 192 168 1 1 Model EPSON Stylus c60 Default Yes Test page Yes Location Comment To close this wizard click Finish g Back Cancel Macintosh OS X Use the following steps to set up a print server on your Macintosh computer 1 Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock Proceed to step 6 to continue If the Print Center 1con is not in the Macintosh Dock proceed to the next step 2 On your desktop double click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window Figure 281 Macintosh HD 3 Double click the Applications folder
371. oad and download the Prestige s firmware and configuration files using FTP please see the chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client To change your Prestige s FTP settings click the Remote MGMT link under Management and the FTP tab The screen appears as shown 221 Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 122 FTP Remote Management FTP Server Port Server Access Secured Client IP Address Ge all C Selected 0 0 0 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 FTP Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the Prestige using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Prestige using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the Prestige using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the Prestige using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 SNMP Simple Network Man
372. obal Start IP Global End IP 192 168 110 EE AE reel GB DDD Action None Select Rule N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Now configure the IGA3 to map to our web server and mail server on the LAN 8 Enter 15 from the main menu 9 Enter 2 in Menu 15 NAT Setup 10Enter 1 in Menu 15 2 NAT Server Setup to see the following menu Configure it as shown 309 Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 183 Example 3 Menu 15 2 Menu 15 2 NAT Server Setup Start Port No End Port No IP Address Default Default 80 80 25 25 OO OOO OO CH O CO OOOO CH CH CH CO 0000 0 0 CH OFM ba CH O CH CH CH 0 0 0 CH OFF e CH CO CH CH CH CO CH CH CH Olo MO Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel HTTP 80 FTP 21 Telnet 23 SMTP 25 POP3 110 PPTP 1723 30 5 4 Example 4 NAT Unfriendly Application Programs Some applications do not support NAT Mapping using TCP or UDP port address translation In this case it is better to use Many to Many No Overload mapping as port numbers do not change for Many to Many No Overload and One to One NAT mapping types The following figure illustrates this Figure 184 NAT Example 4 Mapping Rules A B C lt gt IGAs 1 2 3 Type Many toMany No Overload A 192168 1 33 3 IGAS 10 132 50 1 IGA1 C 192 168 1 35 10 132 50 2 IGA2 10 132 50 3 IGA3 Note Other applications such as some gaming programs are NAT unfriendly because they embed
373. ocess is complete For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP note that you must remain on this menu to upload system firmware using TFTP please see your manual Press ENTER to Exit To upload the firmware and the configuration file follow these examples 37 4 3 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 370 P 335 Series User s Guide 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Prestige for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Prestige and renames it ras Similarly put config rom rom 0 transfers the configuration file on your computer config rom to the Prestige and renames it rom 0 Likewise get rom 0 config rom transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it config rom See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 37 4 4 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload Figure 226 FIP
374. ogram enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 eMule These programs use advanced file sharing applications relying on central servers to search for files They use default port 4662 WWW The World Wide Web WWW is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser 4 3 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Click Next in the Welcome to the Bandwidth Management Wizard screen to display the first wizard screen Figure 33 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information STEP I STee ES General Information Select the check box to apply bandwidth management to traffic going through the device Enter the amount of bandwidth that you want to allocate W active Managed Bandwidth kbps WE The following fields describe the label in this screen Table 25 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information LABEL DE
375. ollowing screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen Figure 137 Upload Error Message system Upload Firmware upload error The uploaded file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file Click Help for more information Return 22 2 Configuration Screen 255 See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for transferring configuration files using FTP TFTP commands Click the Tools link under Maintenance and the Configuration tab Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears as shown next Chapter 22 Tools P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 138 Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload File Path Browse Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the Password will be 1234 LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset to server Reset 22 2 1 Backup Configuration Backup configuration allows you to back up save the Prestige s current configuration to a file on your computer Once
376. ommunity which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel and go back to the previous screen 35 4 SNMP Traps The Prestige will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs Table 139 SNMP Traps TRAP TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION coldStart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting power on warmstart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting software reboot linkDown defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent with the port number when any of the links are down See the following table Chapter 35 SNMP Configuration 348 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 139 SNMP Traps TRAP TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION 4 linkUp defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent with the port number 5 authenticationFailure defined in A trap is sent to the manager when receiving any RFC 1215 SNMP gets or sets requirements with wrong community password 6a whyReboot defined in ZYXEL MIB A trap is sent with the reason of restart before rebooting when the system is going to restart warm start For intentional reboot A trap is sent with the message System reboot by user if reboot is done intentionally for example download new files CI command sys reboot etc
377. on a network Each computer on the print server network must use the LPR protocol to communicate with the print server Print requests are sent by each computer to the Prestige These request are placed in a queue and are then printed when the printer becomes available 19 2 1 Installation Requirements Use Appendix D on page 435 in this User s Guide to set up your computer to use the Prestige print server To install the print server driver you will need the following requirements e Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 SE Second Edition Windows ME Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP and Macintosh OS X e A computer with an Ethernet port e RJ 45 cables and a USB cable Chapter 19 Print Server 240 P 335 Series User s Guide The print server must be set up on each computer in your network that you want to use the print server Before you set up the print server make sure the USB printer is connected to the Prestige using the USB cable and that both the Prestige and the USB printer are turned on 19 3 Prestige Print Server Screen 241 Click the Print Server link under Management to display the Print Server screen Figure 128 Configuring Print Server Print Server Print Device Name Printserver Print Model Name M Print Port Status Offline Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Configuring Print Server Print Device Name Type a Print Device Name
378. on Ethernet v Service Type Standard DN WAN IP Address Assignment fe Get automatically from ISP Default Use Fixed IP Address IP Address 210 192 31 12 Remote IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 240 Backup Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 WAN MAC Address V Spoof WAN MAC Address Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address 192 168 1 33 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Encapsulation You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regula Ethernet Service Type Choose from Standard Telstra RoadRunner Telstra authentication method RR Manager Roadrunner Manager authentication method RR Toshiba Roadrunner Toshiba authentication method or Telia Login The following fields do not appear with the Standard service type WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the from ISP default selection Use fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address Remote IP Enter the Remote IP Subnet Mask if your ISP gave you one in this field Subnet Mask Backup Enter a Backup Gateway IP Address if your ISP gave you one in this field Gateway IP Address 111 Chapter 6 WAN P 335 Series User s Guide Table 44 Etherne
379. on and select Properties Address Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Create new connection Set up a home or small office network wi Disable this network evice S Create Shortcut mij Rename this connection view status of this Fr connection a Status Change settings of this 3 In the Internet Connection Properties 4 You may edit or delete the port window click Settings to see the port mappings or click Add to mappings that were automatically created manually add port mappings Note When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically Chapter 18 UPnP 234 P 335 Series User s Guide 5 Select the Show icon in notification area when connected check box and click OK An icon displays in the system tray WI e a Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using J Internet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through shared connection on another computer Settings Show icon in notification area when connected 6 Double click the icon to display your current Internet connection status Advances Settings Select He serine luring on pour eist hat nere vert car ee Services msma 122168 1 668678 IER TEP mennene 192 168 1 66 9059 271171 UDF VEG menne 192 1681 817281 38087 UDP fe menes 192 1681
380. onnection Properties General Authentication I Advanced Connect using aa Accton EN 207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter Configure This connection uses the following thems El Client for Microsoft Networks ja File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Ja as Packet Scheduler Internet Protocol TOR AF Install Uninstall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol lnternet Protocol The default Wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP e Ifyou have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically 449 0 Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address P 335 Series User s Guide e Ifyou have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields Click Advanced Figure 296 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Settings Advanced TCP IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 6 If you do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses e Inthe IP Settings tab in IP ad
381. onnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed The default time interval is 3600 seconds or 1 hour Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the Prestige The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Prestige The key is not sent over the network Accounting Server Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server The default port number is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external accounting s
382. ontrols or to use Trend Micro Security Serivces Make sure that ActiveX controls are allowed in Internet Explorer Screen shots for Internet Explorer 6 are shown Steps may vary depending on your version of Internet Explorer 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 In the Internet Options window click Custom Level Chapter 41 Troubleshooting P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 246 Internet Options Security Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings amp 0 Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all web sites you havent placed in other zones Security level for this zone Custom Custom settings To change the settings click Custom Level To use the recommended settings click Default Level 3 Scroll down to ActiveX controls and plug ins 4 Under Download signed ActiveX controls select the Prompt radio button 5 Under Run ActiveX controls and plug ins make sure the Enable radio button is selected 6 Then click the OK button Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 402 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 247 Security Setting ActiveX Controls Security Settings dl Automatic prompting for Activex controls i Binary and script behaviors dl Download signed Actives controls O Disable WI Om unsigned Actives
383. onvenience The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 OTIST LABEL DESCRIPTION Setup Key Type an OTIST Setup Key of exactly eight ASCII characters in length The default OTIST setup key is 01234567 Note If you change the OTIST setup key here you must also make the same change on the wireless client s Yes If you want to configure your own WPA PSK and have OTIST use that WPA PSK you must e Configure a WPA PSK in the Wireless screen e Clear the Yes checkbox in the OTIST screen and click Apply Note If you already have a WPA PSK configured in the Wireless screen and you run OTIST with Yes selected OTIST will not replace the WPA PSK Clear the checkbox in the OTIST screen If you want OTIST to automatically generate a WPA PSK you must e Change your security to None in the Wireless screen e Select the the Yes checkbox in the OTIST screen and click Apply e The wireless screen displays an auto generated WPA PSK and is now in WPA PSK security mode The WPA PSK security settings are assigned to the wireless client when you start OTIST Start Click Start to encrypt the wireless security data using the setup key and have the Prestige set the wireless station to use the same wireless settings as the Prestige You must also activate and start OTIST on the wireless station at the same time The process takes three minutes to complete 5 5 1 Activating OTIST After you click Start a di
384. ooting P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 244 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings CH Disable Gh Enable St Font download CH Disable Enable CH Prompt Microsoft VM Java permissions Custom ii High safety CH Low safety CH Medium safe Reset custom settings me Eo Medium Reset cancel 41 5 1 3 1 JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 400 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 245 Java Sun Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings CT Use inline AutoComplete Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling 1 HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections a Sun se Java 2 vldl Or for applety requires restart rosoft VM Java console enabled requires restart TT Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia TT Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar TT Dont display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing m Restore Defaults 41 5 2 ActiveX Controls in Internet Explorer 401 If ActiveX is disabled you will not be able to download ActiveX c
385. or the appropriate IP settings 8 Obtain an IF address automatically O Use the following IP address 8 Obtain ONS server address automatically O Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab 451 Appendix H Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Macintosh OS 8 9 P 335 Series User s Guide 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP IP to open the TCP IP Control Panel Figure 298 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu About This Computer amp Apple System Profiler Calculator Le Chooser PS Control Panels DL Favorites Key Caps Network Browser Lal Recent Applications oi Recent Documents rir Remote Access Status Scrapbook ge Sherlock 2 a Speakable Items d Stickies File Edit View Window Text USB Printer Sharing Special Help ADSL Control and Status Appearance Apple Menu Options AppleTalk Colorsync Control Strip Date amp Time DialAssist Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchan
386. or the rule in kbps The recommendation is a setting between 20 kbps and 20000 kbps for an individual rule Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High Mid or Low The higher the number the higher the priority Use All Managed Select this option to allow a rule to borrow unused bandwidth on the interface Bandwidth Bandwidth borrowing is governed by the priority of the rules That is a rule with the highest priority is the first to borrow bandwidth Do not select this if you want to leave bandwidth available for other traffic types or if you want to restrict the amount of bandwidth that can be used for the traffic that matches this rule Select a service for your rule or you can define your own Destination Address Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Destination Subnet Enter the destination subnet mask This field is N A if you do not specify a Netmask Destination Address Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination See Table 86 for some common services and port numbers Source Address Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation Source Subnet Enter the destination subnet mask This field is N A if you do not specify a Netmask Source Address Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting 215 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management P 335 Series User s Guide Table 88 Ban
387. ork Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to display menu 3 2 1 When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 26 Menu 3 LAN Setup 214 P 335 Series User s Guide 26 3 1 IP Alias Setup 275 IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network Figure 152 Physical Network amp Partitioned Logical Networks LAN 1 IP Address Menu 3 2 Ethernet Interface a e LAN 2 IP Alias 1 Menu 3 2 1 LAN 3 IP Alias Menu 3 2 1 You must use menu 3 2 to configure the first network Move the cursor to the Edit IP Alias field press SPACE BAR to choose Yes and press ENTER to configure the second and third network Press ENTER to open Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup as shown next Figure 153 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup IP Alias 1 Yes IP Address IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 RIP Direction None Version RIP I1 Incoming protocol filters Outgoing protocol filters IP Alias 2 No IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A RIP Direction N A Version N A Incoming protocol filters N A Outgoing protocol filters N A Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANC
388. ou configure WEP you can t configure WPA or WPA PSK 2 Use the MAC Filter screen to restrict access to your wireless network by MAC address 3 Configure the RADIUS authentication database settings in the Wireless screen 83 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide 4 If you have OTIST enabled clients configure OTIST in the OTIST screen OTIST transfers device SSID and WEP or WPA PSK key settings if enabled to wireless clients The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your Prestige Table 28 ZyAIR Wireless Security Levels Security Level Security Type Wi Fi Protected Access WPA Most Secure VWPA2 Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Prestige and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it 5 4 General Wireless LAN Screen Note If you are configuring the Prestige from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Prestige s SSID or WEP settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Prestige s new settings Click the Wireless LAN link under Network to open the Wireless screen Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 84 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 37 Wireless Wireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID ZyXEL IT Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MH
389. ould not be the same as the router password the password you use to log in to your ISP You will need to remember this key to setup new devices via OTIST Do you want to enable OTIST Yes Vo The following table describes the labels in this screen DESCRIPTION Do you want to Select the Yes radio button and click Next to proceed with the setup wizard and enable OTIST enable OTIST only when you click Finish in the final wizard screen Click No and then Next to proceed to the following screen Table 15 OTIST Setup Key The default OTIST Setup Key is 01234567 This key can be changed in the web configurator Be sure to use the same OTIST Setup Key on the Prestige and wireless clients Bak Click Back to display the previous screen Net Click Next to proceed to the next screen Refer to the chapter on wireless LAN for more information 3 4 Connection Wizard WAN The Prestige offers three Internet connection types They are Ethernet PPP over Ethernet or PPTP The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using If the wizard does not detect a connection type you must select one from the drop down list box Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 66 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 24 Connection Wizard WAN Connection Type STEP Z STEPS Es Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connectio
390. our changes Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a machine in order to access it DHCP Server If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then type the IP address of the actual Address remote DHCP server here Use the instructions in the following table to configure TCP IP parameters for the LAN port Table 112 Menu 3 2 LAN TCP IP Setup Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION TCP IP Setup IP Address Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige RIP Direction Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP direction Options are Both In Only Out Only or None Version Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP version Options are RIP 1 RIP 2B or RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a session layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and version 2 IGMP v2 Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to enable IP Multicasting or select None default to disable it Edit IP Alias The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN netw
391. own list box MD5 Message Digest 5 and Algorithm SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA 1 for maximum security Chapter 13 VPN Screens 174 P 335 Series User s Guide 13 11 175 Table 72 Rule Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Advanced Click Advanced to configure more detailed settings of your IKE key management Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh IKE Phases There are two phases to every IKE Internet Key Exchange negotiation phase I Authentication and phase 2 Key Exchange A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec Figure 90 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA Phase Phase CAKE SA IPsec SA In phase 1 you must e Choose a negotiation mode e Authenticate the connection by entering a pre shared key e Choose an encryption algorithm Choose an authentication algorithm e Choose a Diffie Hellman public key cryptography key group DH1 or DH2 Set the IKE SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established the IPSec SA sta
392. pendix shows you how to set up a print server for the following operating systems e Windows 95 e Windows 98 e Windows 98 SE Second Edition e Windows ME e Windows 2000 e Windows XP e Windows NT 4 0 e MAC OS X e Use the Setup Wizard for Windows NT 2000 XP if you want to set up a print server on any of the operating systems listed above except Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 98 SE Second Edition Windows ME and Macintosh OS X or If you want to use TCP IP port protocol on any of the operating systems listed above except Macintosh OS X e Use the Setup Wizard for Windows 98 ME NT 2000 XP if you want to set up a print server on Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 98 SE Second Edition Windows ME or If you want to use UDP port protocol on any of the operating systems listed above except Macintosh OS X e Use the Windows 2000 NT XP Computer Wizard if you do not want to use the provided Setup Wizard for Windows NT 2000 XP or the Setup Wizard for Windows 98 ME NT 2000 XP e Use the Macintosh OS X section to set up a print server on a Macintosh with operating system X or higher You must have a printer with a driver and you need to know the IP address of the Prestige All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP and Macintosh OS X Appendix D Print Server 412 P 335 Series User s
393. perform DHCP client renewal 269 Chapter 24 Menu 1 General Setup P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 25 Menu 2 WAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure the WAN using menu 2 25 1 Introduction to WAN This chapter explains how to configure settings for your WAN port 25 2 WAN Setup From the main menu enter 2 to open menu 2 Figure 148 Menu 2 WAN Setu Menu 2 WAN Setup MAC Address Assigned By Factory default IP Address N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 110 Menu 2 WAN Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION MAC Address Assigned By Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to choose one of two methods to assign a MAC Address Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address Choose IP address attached on LAN to use the MAC Address of that computer whose IP you give in the following field IP Address This field is applicable only if you choose the IP address attached on LAN method in the Assigned By field Enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 25 Menu 2 WAN Setup 2 70 P 335 Series User s Guide 271 Chapter 25 Menu 2 WAN Setup P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 26 Menu 3 LAN Setup This chapter covers
394. plays the latest TMSS anti virus scan engine version number that the Prestige has downloaded Virus pattern This field displays the latest TMSS anti virus pattern version number that the Prestige has downloaded N A displays if there has been no reply for an update request Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 14 3 Exception List Screen Click the TMSS link under Security and the Exception List tab Use the Exception List to specify which computers should not to be restricted by Parental Controls The default setting is to have Parental Controls enabled on all computers 195 Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 106 Exception List Exception List TMSS Exclude computer s from displaying Trend Micro Home Network Security Services Computer s that will display Trend Micro Home Network Security Services Computer s to exclude lt lt Remove Parental Control amp Enforce Parental Control policies for all computers C Include specified address ranges in the Parental Control enforcement C Exclude specified address ranges from the Parental Control enforcement Available IP Addresses Selected IP Addresses Add gt gt lt lt Remove Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Exception List LABEL DESCRIPTION Exclude computer s from displaying
395. ple log messages Table 166 System Error logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION s exceeds the max number This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum of session per host number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host Table 167 System Maintenance Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Time calibration is The router has adjusted its time based on information from the successful time server WEB Login Successfully Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface Someone has failed to log on to the router s web configurator interface NAT Session Table is Full The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full 1 Phase 1 ID type mismatch The ID type of an incoming packet does not match the local s peer ID type Phase 1 ID content The ID content of an incoming packet does not match the mismatch local s peer ID content I No known phase 1 ID type The ID type of an incoming packet does not match any known found ID type Appendix G Log Descriptions 442 P 335 Series User s Guide 443 Table 168 UPnP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION UPnP pass through Firewall UPnP packets can pass through the firewall Table 169 ICMP Type and Code Explanations o mon SSCS fo emorepymese gt S paren gt mee gt fi ren gt 2 ron gt a mee gt 4 A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don t Fragment DF a
396. pre defined priorities 1 WAN designated by the ISP or a static route see the IP Static Route Setup chapter 2 Traffic Redirect see the Traffic Redirect Screen section For example if WAN has a metric of 1 and Traffic Redirect has a metric of 2 the WAN connection acts as the primary default route If the WAN route fails to connect to the Internet the Prestige tries Traffic Redirect next 6 3 WAN MAC Address The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address Otherwise click Spoof this computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file ZyNOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port Chapter 6 WAN 110 P 335 Series User s Guide 6 4 WAN ISP Screen To change your Prestige s WAN ISP settings click WAN then the WAN ISP tab The screen differs by the encapsulation 6 4 1 Ethernet Encapsulation The screen shown next is for Ethernet encapsulation Figure 54 Ethernet Encapsulation Internet Connection ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulati
397. psulation rrrarrranrrnnrrnnrrnnnrrnnrnnnrvnnnnnn 161 Figure 84 IPSec Summary Fields ccccesccsscccseeceeeceeeceeeceaeceeeseeeseeeeeeesaeeseeesseesaeesegeess 166 FT NNN rd 167 Figure 86 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers rrrrrnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnrnanvrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnennnnnnnnennn 168 Figure 87 VPN Host using Intranet DNS Server Example rrrurnranrrnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnvnnnnnennnn 169 Figure 88 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example rrrrrerareranennnrnnnnn 171 FT E 172 Figure 90 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec S rrrnrrranrnnannnarnnanrvanrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 175 Figure 91 Advanced ES EE 178 Figure 92 Rule Setup with Manual Key cccccccseccseecseceseeseeceeseaeesaeeseesaeesaeesaseesagess 183 NNN Eege 186 TN dn re 187 Figure 95 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example rrrrrnnrnvnnnnnrrvrnnnnrrrnnnnnrrernnnnnr 188 Figure 96 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example rrrrnrnnenanennnrnnnnnnanennnnnnnnnn 189 Figure 97 TMSS First Time Access E 190 Figure 98 Download ActiveX to View TMSS Web Page rrrrnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 191 Figure 99 TMSS Web Page Dashboard EE 191 Figure 100 TMSS Service Summary E 191 Le T EE JE E AA 192 Figure 102 TMSS Registration Form sisccvwrrsinacentessaniasxeiesieieverestintstennsaeseeqniesimiavieiasistennereis 192 Figure 103 Example TMSS Activated Service Summary Screen rrrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnrnnn
398. r SMT Configuration via Telnet rrrrrrnnrnnnrrnnnrnanennnnnnnnn 260 15 Table of Contents P 335 Series User s Guide SE EE EN 260 23 1 3 Prestige SMT Menu Overview EE 261 23 2 Navigating the SMT Interface AA 262 23 2 1 System Management Terminal Interface Summary rrrnrrrnnrrrnrevanennnr 264 23 3 Changing the System Password rrnrrnnrrnanrnnnnnnnrnnannnnnnnnnrnnnrnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 265 Chapter 24 MENT GLA ene 266 NNN NG 266 24 2 Procedure To Configure Menu E WEE 266 24 2 1 Procedure to Configure Dynamic DNS rrrrarnnnnennrnnrnnnnnrnnennnennnnnnnnnn 268 Chapter 25 Menu Z WAN KIT EEN 270 STN A serina pens teens 270 eE E 270 Chapter 26 EET LAN SOTUN EN eee eee 272 TILT 272 26 1 1 General Ethernet Setup rrrarrnnnrrnnrrnannnanrnnnrvnnrnnannnnnrnnnrnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnen 272 26 2 Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup cece ccecceeccceeeeeeeseeseeeeseeeseeeseens 273 26 3 TCP IP Ethernet Setup and DHOP sic cssiemccxciesseassionessnaicversssesistericiesiarestiests 273 E F AaS EE E NE 275 Chapter 27 Takle ER REE EN EE el 278 27 1 Introduction to Internet Access Setup rrrnrrranrvannnnnrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrrnnnennne 278 2 2 Ethernet Encapsulation EEE EE Re 278 FMV PPT Ne 280 STN PPPE GN ee 281 TJ EE EE EEE EE ER 282 Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration anxrnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnennnnnnnnennnnennnr 284 28 1 Introduction to Remote Node Setup L
399. r TCP IP To edit menu 3 2 enter 3 from the main menu to display Menu 3 LAN Setup When menu 3 appears press 2 and press ENTER to display Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup as shown next Figure 151 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup DHCP Server TCP IP Setup Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 LP Address 192 168 141 Size of Client IP Pool 32 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 First DNS Server From ISP RIP Direction Both IP Address N A Version RIP 1 Second DNS Server From ISP Multicast None IP Address N A Edit IP Alias No Third DNS Server DNS Relay IP Address N A DHCP Server Address N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Follow the instructions in the next table on how to configure the DHCP fields Table 111 DHCP Ethernet Setup Fields DESCRIPTION This field enables disables the DHCP server If set to Server your Prestige will act as a DHCP server If set to None the DHCP server will be disabled If set to Relay the Prestige acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays requests and responses between the remote server and the clients When set to Server the following items need to be set Client IP Pools Starting Address _ This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool 273 Chapter 26 Menu 3 LAN Setup P 335 Series User s Guide Table 111 DHCP Ethernet Setup Fields FIELD DESC
400. r Windows Add Print Wizard finishes you must return to Network Print Server Setup Wizard When Windows Add Printer Wizard starts click Mest Click Local printer and then click Next Select LPT1 Recommended Printer Port and then click Next Follow the instructions on the screen to finish setting up the printer by selecting the manufacturer and model of your printer and typing a name for your printer Do not print a test page to the printer Click Finish to complete the Windows Add Printer Wizard Now return to the Network Print Server Setup Wizard and continue setting up print server 9 A Summary screen displays Check your settings and click Next to continue Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 259 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Summary Network Print Server Setup Wizard The Wizard is about to finish the installation Following is the summary of the settings Change Settings Configure Wireless Printer Marne HF DeskJet 8100 Port Name LPT P52345 1 Configure TCP IP IP Address 192 168 1 1 Save Settings Summary GorAplete Verify all information 10Click Finish to save and close your Network Print Server Setup Wizard Your print server setup is complete Figure 260 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Installation Complete Network Print Server Setup Wizard i Welcome Geo The Wizard has successfully installed the network print SOE FEET server and
401. r intentional reboot A trap is sent with the message System reboot by user if reboot is done intentionally for example download new files Cl command sys reboot etc For fatal error A trap is sent with the message of the fatal code if the system reboots because of fatal errors whyReboot defined in ZYXEL A trap is sent with the reason of restart before MIB rebooting when the system is going to restart warm 17 7 SNMP Screen To change your Prestige s SNMP settings click the Remote MGMT link under Management and the SNMP tab The screen appears as shown Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens 224 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 124 SNMP Remote Management SNMP Configuration Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 SNMP Service Port 161 Service Access LAN v Secured Client IP Address Ge all C Selected 0 0 0 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 SNMP Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION SNMP Configuration Get Community Enter the Get Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests Set Community Enter the Set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests Trap Community Type the trap community wh
402. r the date the set should Date activate here in year month date format Weekday If you selected Weekly in the How Often field above then select the day s when the Day set should activate and recur by going to that day s and pressing SPACE BAR to select Yes then press ENTER 387 Chapter 40 Call Scheduling P 335 Series User s Guide Table 152 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Start Time Enter the start time when you wish the schedule set to take effect in hour minute format Enter the maximum length of time this connection is allowed in hour minute format Action Forced On means that the connection is maintained whether or not there is a demand call on the line and will persist for the time period specified in the Duration field Forced Down means that the connection is blocked whether or not there is a demand call on the line Enable Dial On Demand means that this schedule permits a demand call on the line Disable Dial On Demand means that this schedule prevents a demand call on the line When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel and go back to the previous screen Once your schedule sets are configured you must then apply them to the desired remote node s Enter 11 from the Main Menu and then enter the target remote node index Using SPACE BAR select PPPoE or PPPOA in the Encapsulat
403. raffic must pass through the Prestige to your LAN The following steps describe such a scenario 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN 2 The Prestige reroutes the packet to Gateway B which is in the 192 168 2 1 to 192 168 2 24 subnet 3 The reply from WAN goes through the Prestige to the computer on the LAN in the 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 24 subnet 475 Appendix L Triangle Route P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 311 IP Alias 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 y internet 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 24 Gateways on the WAN Side A second solution to the triangle route problem is to put all of your network gateways on the WAN side as the following figure shows This ensures that all incoming network traffic passes through your Prestige to your LAN Therefore your LAN is protected Figure 312 Gateways on the WAN Side Internet How To Configure Triangle Route 1 From the SMT main menu enter 24 2 Enter 8 in menu 24 to enter CI command mode 3 Use the following command to allow triangle route sys firewall ignore triangle all on or this command to disallow triangle route sys firewall ignore triangle all off Appendix L Triangle Route 476 P 335 Series User s Guide 477 Appendix L Triangle Route Numerics 110V AC 4 230V AC 4 802 1x 92 A Abnormal Working Conditions 5 AC 4 Accessories 4 Active 285 ActiveX 153 199 Act
404. ranennnnrnnnnnannnannnnnnnnnrnnnennnr 314 PN EE 314 31 3 Enabling the Firewall EEE EN 314 Chapter 32 TPAIS OC SETUD ET EE a 316 CW WR le e eee 316 GE Py UNI ERE NE 317 AA gt ERE EEE EET REN 323 TNT EE 325 32 4 1 Active PI EEE EEE 326 32 4 2 Security Parameter Index E E 326 Chapter 33 TE EEE 328 SEG EEE A Aaaa 328 PE Re EEE EE re cn ce or rarer eee 328 17 Table of Contents P 335 Series User s Guide Chapter 34 SEE En Oe E 332 en TO FIETS ET 332 34 1 1 The Filter Structure of the Prestige AEN 333 RE EE 334 34 2 1 Configuring a Filter TE 336 34 2 2 JOAN a GPA Fifer RUIG Lassen ende 336 34 2 3 Configuring a Generic Filter Rule RENE 339 EE DA EEE RENEE NE 341 AF TPES ana NAT nose EEE 343 34 9 Firewall Versus E 344 RE EE 344 ee E Kale NG 344 34 6 2 Applying Remote Node Filters ba 345 Chapter 35 Sa te Eeg a ereereasaneecoeeenets 346 SINT E 346 Sae IN ket 347 Ek SE NNN Gb 347 EE AT ER EE ETE 348 Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis ennxrnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnun 350 RE LES EEE EEE 350 NNN EE 352 ERE ag EE snot ENEE 352 AE sp Forn SHEO EE EE eon eo ea 353 Eee pasty ccs pee E 354 ia Le r Ene 354 TIER EE 355 RA te e E EEE iaaa 355 VET een er ee eee en ene ent ae oe Ce Seer ee eee mn oe Renner er 356 TEPPE EEN 356 G TN EE 357 GK MO ee ge EE 357 EE lie E 358 ET VPN med 359 Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance nnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnun
405. range systems UNIX systems and network servers STRM WORKS UDP 158 TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution 5 9 QoS Screen The QoS screen by default allows you to automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of the packets it sends 105 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide 5 9 1 ToS Type of Service and WMM QoS ToS defines the DS Differentiated Service field in the IP packet header The ToS value of outgoing packets is between 0 and 255 0 is the lowest priority WMM QoS checks the ToS in the header of transmitted data packets It gives the application a priority according to this number If the ToS is not specified then transmitted data is treated as normal or best effort traffic Click the Wireless LAN link under Network and the QoS tab The following screen displays Figure 52 QoS QoS Setup IV Enable WMM QoS WMM QoS Po
406. rd up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays an asterisk for each character you type Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 20 3 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This 1s for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 20 3 1 DynDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS
407. rder to communicate IEEE 802 119 Wireless LAN IEEE 802 1 1g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 170 IEEE802 11g DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Appendix Wireless LANs 460 P 335 Series User s Guide IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are e User based identification that allows for roaming e Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server e Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless station
408. re data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Prestige identity 9 2 1 Encryption e Use WPA 2 security if you have WPA 2 aware wireless clients and a RADIUS server WPA has user authentication and improved data encryption over WEP e Use WPA 2 PSK if you have WPA 2 aware wireless clients but no RADIUS server e If you don t have WPA 2 aware wireless clients then use WEP key encrypting A higher bit key offers better security at a throughput trade off You can use Passphrase to automatically generate 64 bit or 128 bit WEP keys or manually enter 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit WEP keys 5 2 2 Authentication WPA has user authentication and you can also configure IEEE 802 1x to use a RADIUS server to authenticate wireless clients before joining your network e Use RADIUS authentication if you have a RADIUS server See the appendices for information on protocols used when a client authenticates with a RADIUS server via the Prestige Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 82 P 335 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 Restricted Access The MAC Filter screen allows you to configure the AP to give exclusive access to devices Allow or exclude them from accessing the AP Deny 5 2 4 Hide Prestige Identity If you hide the ESSID then the Prestige cannot be seen when a wireless client scans for local APs The trade off for the extra security of hiding the Prestige may be inconven
409. reless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA 465 Appendix Wireless LANs P 335 Series User s Guide Key differences between WPA 2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x In addition to TKIP WPA2 also uses Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP to offer stronger encryption Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server It includes a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism TKIP regularly changes and rotates the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the pair wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically WPA2 AES Advanced Encryption Standard 1s a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathemati
410. ress 0 0 0 0 Local ID Type IP e Local Content Secure Gateway Address Peer ID Type IP e Peer Content IPSec Algorithm Encapsulation Mode Tunnel sl IPSec Protocol ESP sl Pre Shared Key 2346 Encryption Algorithm DES vi Authentication Algorithm sHa1 sl Advanced Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Rule Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate this VPN tunnel This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall Keep Alive Select this check box to have the Prestige automatically re initiate the SA after the SA lifetime times out even if there is no traffic The remote IPSec router must also have keep alive enabled in order for this feature to work NAT Traversal Select this check box to enable NAT traversal NAT traversal allows you to set up a VPN connection when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers The remote IPSec router must also have NAT traversal enabled You can use NAT traversal with ESP protocol using Transport or Tunnel mode but not with AH protocol nor with manual key management In order for an IPSec router behind a NAT router to receive an initiating IPSec packet set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to the IPSec router behind the NAT router IPSec Keying Mode Select IKE or Manual from the drop down list box IKE provides more protection so it is generally reco
411. revious Page to view the next or previous page of rules respectively Select Type the VPN connection index number that you want to disconnect and then press Connection ENTER When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 33 SA Monitor 330 P 335 Series User s Guide 331 Chapter 33 SA Monitor P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 34 Filter Configuration This chapter shows you how to create and apply filters 34 1 Introduction to Filters Your Prestige uses filters to decide whether to allow passage of a data packet and or to make a call There are two types of filter applications data filtering and call filtering Filters are subdivided into device and protocol filters which are discussed later Data filtering screens the data to determine if the packet should be allowed to pass Data filters are divided into incoming and outgoing filters depending on the direction of the packet relative to a port Data filtering can be applied on either the WAN side or the LAN side Call filtering 1s used to determine if a packet should be allowed to trigger a call Remote node call filtering 1s only applicable when using PPPoE encapsulation Outgoing packets must undergo data filtering before they encounter call filtering as shown in the following figure Figure 196 Outgoing Packet Filtering Process DS Hi Fir R
412. rference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know 1f the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other Appendix I Wireless LANs 458 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 305 RIS CTS RTS Range CTS Range wn er station AP gn dailies Tee a Ve wk i D a E eg Keng H When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invo
413. ries User s Guide 89 Figure 41 Wireless WPA PSK Wireless Setup IV Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID IT Hide SSID Channel Selection Security Security Mode Pre Shared Key ReAuthentication Timer Idle Timeout ZyXEL Channel 06 2437MHz mas e 234678 1800 In Seconds 3600 In Seconds Group Key Update Timer 1800 In Seconds Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Wireless WPA PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Shared Key ReAuthentication Timer in seconds Idle Timeout WPA Group Key Update Timer The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols Specify how often wireless stations have to reenter usernames and passwords in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority The Prestige automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed The default
414. rmesdiensbicisahuaey ecdiearnmloeaarerieets 225 Table 94 DNS Remote Management 226 Table 95 Security Remote Management uk 227 NNN Je 229 Table 97 Configuring PI EE raianta nnaia itak airiidaianaii 241 Tobio o CENA NEE 242 TD NN rra A E A ARAR 244 Table 100 Time Seling ege Atten Anger gege 245 Re len AE EE 249 RENNE vr NG 251 Table 103 Maintenance Firmware Upload rurernnennnennnrnnnnnnannnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnennnsennne 254 Table 104 Maintenance Restore Configuration 256 Table 105 SMT Menus Overview EEE 261 Table 106 Main Menu Commands gengen Eege GEES een 262 Table 107 Main Menu Summary EEE NE 264 Table 108 Menu 1 General Setup rrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen 267 Table 109 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS summmmesuednseermnebmmne ttv minen eens 268 Table TIU Menu Z WAN ar 270 Table 111 DHCP Ethernet Setup Fields rrrrnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnanenanvnnnrnnnrnnannnannnanennnrnnnrnnasennnen 273 Table 112 Menu 3 2 LAN TCP IP Setup TC EE 274 Table 113 Monu 4 21 IF EO ERE 275 Table 114 Internet Access Setup Ethernet AA 279 Table 115 New Fields in Menu 4 PPTP Screen cece ccseecccceeeeceeseeceeeeeeeeeeecsseecsensessass 281 Table 116 New Fields in Menu 4 PPPOE screen rrrrrnnnnnnnnenrnnnrnrnnnnennnnnnnnnnennrnnnennnsnnnnnn 282 Table 117 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile for Ethernet Encapsulation ceee 285 Table 118 Fields in Menu 11 1 PPPo
415. rnet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation Memory Usage Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation 51 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 335 Series User s Guide Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION sumar 1 Any IP Table Use this screen to view a list of IP addresses and MAC addresses of computers which are not in the same subnet as the Prestige DHCP Table Use this screen to view current DHCP client information Parental Control Statistics Use this screen to view a record of attempted entries to web pages or actual entries to web pages from a list of website categories WLAN Station Status Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the Prestige BW MGNT Monitor Use this screen to view the Prestige s bandwidth usage andallotments Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics VPN Monitor Use this screen to display active VPN connections 2 4 1 Navigation Panel After you enter the password use the sub menus on the navigation panel to configure Prestige features The navigation The following table describes the sub men
416. rompt to save your configuration after you define all the servers or press ESC at any time to cancel You assign the private network IP addresses The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet A is the FTP Telnet SMTP server 303 Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 174 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 192 168 1 1 I Internet C 192 168 1 35 lt D 192 168 1 36 30 5 General NAT Examples The following are some examples of NAT configuration 30 5 1 Example 1 Internet Access Only In the following Internet access example you only need one rule where the ILAs Inside Local Addresses of computers A through D map to one dynamic IGA Inside Global Address assigned by your ISP Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT 304 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 175 NAT Example 1 Inside Local Addresses ILA Dynamic Inside Global Address Figure 176 Menu 4 Internet Access amp NAT Example Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation Ethernet Service Type Standard My Login N A My Password N A Retype to Confirm N A Login Server N A Relogin Every min N A IP Address Assignment Dynamic IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A Gateway IP Address N A Network Address Translation SUA Only Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel From menu 4 choose the SUA Only option from the Network Address Translat
417. routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses Telecommuters can use separate passwords to simultaneously connect to the Prestige from IPSec routers with dynamic IP addresses see the Telecommuter VPN IPSec Examples section for a telecommuter configuration example Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide Note Regardless of the ID type and content configuration the Prestige does not allow you to save multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses With main mode see Section Negotiation Mode the ID type and content are encrypted to provide identity protection In this case the Prestige can only distinguish between up to eight different incoming SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses The Prestige can distinguish up to eight incoming SAs because you can select between three encryption algorithms DES and 3DES two authentication algorithms MD5 and SHA1 and two key groups DH1 and DH2 when you configure a VPN rule the Advanced Rule Setup Screen section The ID type and content act as an extra level of identification for incoming SAs The type of ID can be a domain name an IP address or an e mail address The content is the IP address domain name or e mail address Table 69 Local ID Type and Content Fields LOCAL ID TYPE CONTENT Type the IP address of your computer or leave the field blank to have the Prestige automatically use its own IP address Type a dom
418. rrors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites or web sites with restricted web features such as cookies active X and so on Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Alerts are e mailed as soon as they happen Logs may be e mailed as soon as the log is full see Log Schedule Selecting many alert and or log categories especially Access Control may result in many e mails being sent Chapter 21 Logs 250 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 133 Log Settings Log Settings E mail Log Settings Mail Server Outgoing SMTP Server NAME or IP Address Mail Subject Send Log to E Mail Address Send Alerts to E Mail Address SMTP Authentication User Name Password Log Schedule Day for Sending Log Time for Sending Log hour fo minute Clear log after sending mail Syslog Logging Active Syslog Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Server NAME or IP Address Log Facility Local 1 Di Active Log and Alert Send immediate alert D wO System Maintenance System Errors System Errors Access Control Access Control Blocked Web Sites TCP Reset Blocked Jaya etc Packet Filter Attacks ICMP IPSec Remote Management IKE CDR PPP UPnP Forward Web Sites Blocked Web Sites Blocked Java etc Attacks IPSec IKE 802 1x Wireless Any I
419. rt or Tunnel mode but not with AH protocol nor with Manual key management In order for an IPSec router behind a NAT router to receive an initiating IPSec packet set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to the IPSec router behind the NAT router Local ID type Press SPACE BAR to choose IP DNS or E mail and press ENTER Select IP to identify this Prestige by its IP address Select DNS to identify this Prestige by a domain name Select E mail to identify this Prestige by an e mail address Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup 320 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 129 Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Content When you select IP in the Local ID Type field type the IP address of your computer or leave the field blank to have the Prestige automatically use its own IP address When you select DNS in the Local ID Type field type a domain name up to 31 char acters by which to identify this Prestige When you select E mail in the Local ID Type field type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify this Prestige The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail address My IP Addr Enter the IP address of your Prestige The Prestige uses its current WAN IP address static or dynamic in setting up the VPN tunnel if you leave this field as 0 0 0 0 The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if this IP address c
420. rule Check Next Rule Matched Forward Drop Once you have completed filling in Menu 21 4 1 1 Generic Filter Rule press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel This data will now be displayed on Menu 21 1 1 Filter Rules Summary 34 3 Example Filter Let s look at an example to block outside users from accessing the Prestige via telnet Figure 203 Telnet Filter Example 1 Enter 21 from the main menu to open Menu 21 Filter and Firewall Setup 2 Enter 1 to open Menu 21 1 Filter Set Configuration 3 Enter the index of the filter set you wish to configure say 3 and press ENTER 4 Enter a descriptive name or comment in the Edit Comments field and press ENTER 5 Press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to confirm to open Menu 21 1 3 Filter Rules Summary 6 Enter I to configure the first filter rule the only filter rule of this set Make the entries in this menu as shown in the following figure 341 Chapter 34 Filter Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 204 Example Filter Menu 21 1 3 1 Menu 211301 TCP IP Filter Rule Filter fi 3 1 Filter Type TCP IP Filter Rule Active Yes IP Protocol 6 IP Source Route No Destination IP Addr 0 0 0 0 IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Port 23 Port Comp Equal Source IP Addr 0 0 0 0 IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Port 0 Port Comp None TCP Estab No More No Log None Action Matched Drop Action Not M
421. rules For example if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9 In the set summary screen the new rule will be rule 7 not 9 Now if you delete rule 4 rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule so as old rule 5 becomes rule 4 old rule 6 becomes rule 5 and old rule 7 becomes rule 6 Table 125 Menu 15 1 1 First Set FIELD DESCRIPTION Set Name Enter a name for this set of rules This is a required field If this field is left blank the entire set will be deleted Action The default is Edit Edit means you want to edit a selected rule see following field Insert Before means to insert a rule before the rule selected The rules after the selected rule will then be moved down by one rule Delete means to delete the selected rule and then all the rules after the selected one will be advanced one rule None disables the Select Rule item Select Rule When you choose Edit Insert Before or Delete in the previous field the cursor jumps to this field to allow you to select the rule to apply the action in question Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Note You must press ENTER at the bottom of the screen to save the whole set You must do this again if you make any changes to the set including deleting a rule No changes to the set take place until this action is taken Selecting Edit in the Action field and then selecting a rule brings up th
422. runnnnnnanennrnnnnnnennnrnannnnrnnnennennennnnen 78 Table 27 Bandwidth Management Wizard Priority 79 Table 28 ZyAIR Wireless Security Levels rrrarrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanenanennnrnnnrnnannnnnnnanrnanrnnnrnnnnnnsnn 84 We ee EE 85 ERE N Secu EEE SE iaa naiari 86 Table 31 Wireless Static WEP Encryption EE 87 Table E ETS 89 Table 33 Wireless EEN 91 Table 34 Wireless 802 1x and Dynamic E 93 Table 35 Wireless 802 1x and Static WEP 95 Table 36 Wireless 802 1x and No WEP rarrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnennnenanennnrnnnnnnnsnnnnen 97 List of Tables 30 P 335 Series User s Guide 31 TE E RA WEE 99 Table 38 MAC Address EEE SE 101 ENN NG 102 Table 40 WMM QoS Pronties teen eidedeA EE eien iere eege a age eCee ba 103 Table 41 Commonly Used Services rrrnrrrannanennnnnnnnnnennnnnernnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnennsnnennnnenunnnnennnene 104 Brel SE 106 Table 43 Application Priority Configuration 107 Table 44 Ethernet Encapsulation 111 KE ae Seen Eeg EEE EE 113 Tablo 40 PPT FS NNN E 115 ET NNN aan 117 TN Ode 119 Table 49 LAN EE EE EE Ve VE OS AE 126 TN NPE EE 127 NNN NN 128 TN Tt Need 130 Ke EEE eg Eg GE EE ER NE 132 FN NTL Je 139 Table 39 NAI ENN are dende 134 Tablo TENT jekk acai 137 Table 57 Services and Port Numbers 139 PE EE EE RR NE RE estate 140 TEPPE re 141 TOGOJ RUG SOUD SG 142 TS e EE 145 TD NNN EE ETA 148 FRE NN SG 149 TNT SN 153 lable 69 Schedule AEG 155 TN NT SEET 162 Toe Or AOE PG 1
423. rver 0 0 0 0 Local Addr Type SINGLE End N A Local IP Addr 1 1 1 1 End Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Port Start 0 End N A Addr Type SUBNET Remote IP Addr Start 4 4 4 4 Port Start 0 Enable Replay Detection No Key Management IKE Edit Key Management Setup No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 129 Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION This is the VPN rule index number you selected in the previous menu Name Enter a unique identification name for this VPN rule The name may be up to 32 characters long but only 10 characters will be displayed in Menu 27 1 IPSec Summary Active Press SPACE BAR to choose either Yes or No Choose Yes and press ENTER to activate the VPN tunnel This field determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall Keep Alive Press SPACE BAR to choose either Yes or No Choose Yes and press ENTER to have the Prestige automatically re initiate the SA after the SA lifetime times out even if there is no traffic The remote IPSec router must also have keep alive enabled in order for this feature to work Nat Traversal Select this check box to enable NAT traversal NAT traversal allows you to set up a VPN connection when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers The remote IPSec router must also have NAT traversal enabled You can use NAT tra versal with ESP protocol using Transpo
424. rver Interface PRINT SERVER INTERFACE USB USB 1 1 full speed compliant port 1 5Mbps low speed and 12Mbps full speed data transmission rates This port automatically detects the make and model of the USB printer connected to this port Table 163 Print Server Requirements and Specifications PRINT SERVER REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS Network Operating System Windows 95 98 98SE Me Support Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP 2003 Mac OS X or higher Network Protocol Support Print Monitor UDP Windows 95 98 98SE Me e Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP 2003 LPD LPR RFC 1179 TCP IP e Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP 2003 e Mac OS X or higher Management Web interface Windows based wizard program a Only a printer with a USB connection can be used with the Prestige Prestige Print Server Compatible USB Printers The following is a list of USB printer models compatible with the Prestige print server Table 164 Compatible USB Printers Appendix E Print Server Specifications 434 P 335 Series User s Guide 435 Table 164 Compatible USB Printers BRAND TYPE REMARK omr mm oe em mm omr mm omr mm pe omr m pe mon mm we canon em omr mm omr mm canon em pe oe em mm oe em pe oe mm oe em pe oe em pe oe em mm con sm en con sm en omr em we oa mem mm oa mem mm mon mees mon mme canon mme canon mee canon men en e
425. s RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks e Authentication Determines the identity of the users e Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network e Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless station and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication e Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication e Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access e Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access 461 Appendix Wireless LANs P 335 Series User s Guide e Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting e Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting e Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate
426. s IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group Chapter 7 LAN P 335 Series User s Guide The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the Prestige queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Prestige periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the Prestige LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces 7 3 Any IP Traditionally you must set the
427. s User s Guide Table 109 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS FIELD DESCRIPTION Edit Update IP Address You can select Yes in either the Use Server Detected IP field recommended or the User Specified IP Addr field but not both With the Use Server Detected IP and User Specified IP Addr fields both set to No the DDNS server automatically updates the IP address of the host name s with the Prestige s WAN IP address DDNS does not work with a private IP address When both fields are set to No the Prestige must have a public WAN IP address in order for DDNS to work Use Server Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to have the DDNS Detected IP server automatically update the IP address of the host name s with the public IP address that the Prestige uses or is behind You can set this field to Yes whether the IP address is public or private static or dynamic User Specified IP Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to update the IP Address address of the host name s to the IP address specified below Only select Yes if the Prestige uses or is behind a static public IP address IP Address Enter the static public IP address if you select Yes in the User Specified IP Addr field When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Note The IP address updates when you reconfigure menu 1 or
428. s a system or group of systems that enforces an access control policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from an untrusted network Of course firewalls cannot solve every security problem A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy It should never be the only mechanism or method employed For a firewall to guard effectively you must design and deploy it appropriately This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information security policy In addition specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself 10 1 2 Stateful Inspection Firewall Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency however they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support Firewalls of one type or another have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises 10 1 3 About the Prestige Firewall The Prestige firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated click the General tab un
429. s are temporarily disconnected Perfect Forward Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS is disabled None by default in phase 2 IPSec Secrecy PFS SA setup This allows faster IPSec setup but is not so secure Choose from DH1 or DH2 to enable PFS DH1 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number DH2 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit 1Kb random number more secure yet slower Select Basic to go to the previous VPN configuration screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 13 Manual Key Manual key management is useful if you have problems with IKE key management 13 13 1 Security Parameter Index SPI An SPI is used to distinguish different SAs terminating at the same destination and using the same IPSec protocol This data allows for the multiplexing of SAs to a single gateway The SPI Security Parameter Index along with a destination IP address uniquely identify a particular Security SA The SPI is transmitted from the remote VPN gateway to the local VPN gateway The local VPN gateway then uses the network encryption and key values that the administrator associated with the SPI to establish the tunnel Note Current ZyXEL implementation assumes identical outgoing and incoming SPIs 13 14 Manual Key Screen You only configure VPN Manual Key when you select Manual in the Key Management field on the Rule Setup screen The Rule Setup Manual screen as shown
430. s is correct Device Type Standard Genenc Network Card e Custom Settings 13 Select the LPR radio button as the printing Protocol 14 Type LP1 in the LPR Settings Queue Name field 15 Click the OK button to return to the previous screen and then click Next Appendix D Print Server 424 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 272 Port Settings Screen Configure Standard TCP IP Port Mo nitor Fort Settings Fort Hame IP 932 165 1 1 Printer Name or IP Address fi 92 168 1 1 Drotocgl C Raw Ce LPR Raw Settings Part Number LPR Settings Queue Name LF1 LPR Byte Counting Enabled SNMP Status Enabled Eommunity tame pubic SHME Device Index f 16 Make sure that your printer port settings are correct Click the Finish button to complete printer TCP IP and port set up and then return to the Add Printer Wizard Figure 273 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Complete Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Completing the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Tou have selected port with the following characteristics SNMP Mo Protocol LPR LP1 Device 192 168 1 1 Port Name IF 192 168 1 1 Adapter Type To complete this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel 17 Select the make of the printer that you want to connect to the print server in the Manufacturers list of printers 18 Select the printer model from the list of Printers 19 If your printer is not displayed in the list
431. s of God 5 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 125 Airflow 4 Allocated Budget 287 American Wire Gauge 4 Antenna Directional 471 Omni directional 471 Antenna gain 470 Any IP summary table 54 AP access point 458 AT command 363 Authen 287 Authentication 464 Authentication Protocol 286 Authority 3 AWG 4 B Backup 256 363 Bandwidth Borrowing 214 Bandwidth management monitor 57 Bandwidth Services 210 Basement 4 Index P 335 Series User s Guide Index Basic wireless security 63 BSS 456 Budget Management 375 376 C CA 463 Cables Connecting 4 Call Control 375 Call History 376 Call Scheduling 386 Maximum Number of Schedule Sets 386 PPPoE 388 Precedence 386 Precedence Example 386 Call Trigerring Packet 357 CDR 355 CDR Call Detail Record 354 Certificate Authority 463 Certifications 3 Changes or Modifications 3 Channel 458 Interference 458 Channel ID 85 Charge 5 Circuit 3 Class B 3 Command Interpreter Mode 374 Communications 3 Community 347 Compliance FCC 3 Components 5 Computer Name 266 Condition 5 Conditions that prevent TFTP and FTP from working over WAN 365 Configuration 55 130 Connecting Cables 4 Connection ID Name 288 Consequential Damages 5 478 P 335 Series User s Guide Contact Information 6 Contacting Customer Support 6 Content Filtering 152 Days and Times 152 Restrict Web Features 152 Cookies 153 199 Copyright 2 Correcting Interference 3
432. s through UPnP broadcasts are only allowed on the LAN If you block LAN to Firewall LAN Prestige traffic using the firewall then you need to select this check box to allow UPnP enabled traffic to pass through the firewall This setting remains active until you disable UPnP Clear this check box if you do not want to create a hole in the firewall for UPnP application packets for example MSN packets Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP Chapter 18 UPnP 230 P 335 Series User s Guide 18 4 1 Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install UPnP in Windows Me Add Remove Progra Instal Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add ar remove component select or clear the check box If the check box it shaded only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in component click Details Components Ey Address Book a Communications 5 6 ME O Fe Desktop Themes 0 0 MB il hel f l Games 10 1 ME Eq a Multilanguage Support 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 4 4 ME Space required 0 0 ME Space available on disk 866 3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services 5 of 10 components selected Details Have Disk OF
433. s to access Intranet servers on a remote network that has a DNS server you must identify that DNS server You cannot use DNS servers on the LAN or from the ISP since these DNS servers cannot resolve domain names to private IP addresses on the remote network The following figure depicts an example where three VPN tunnels are created from Prestige A one to branch office 2 one to branch office 3 and another to headquarters In order to access computers that use private domain names on the headquarters HQ network the Prestige at branch office 1 uses the Intranet DNS server in headquarters The DNS server feature for VPN does not work with Windows 2000 or Windows XP Figure 87 VPN Host using Intranet DNS Server Example E RE DNS Servers 212 54 64 170 212 54 64 171 L LAN Wem ai HQ Leg DN S 212 54 64 170 10 1 1 1 200 D SA 212 54 64 171 a GES ps VPN ONS 10 1 1 10 i VPN Tunnel A bell Wi e e a 3 192 168 4 1 50 l 172 16 1 4 50 Note If you do not specify an Intranet DNS server on the remote network then the VPN host must use IP addresses to access the computers on the remote network 13 8 ID Type and Content 169 With aggressive negotiation mode see Section Negotiation Mode the Prestige identifies incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted This enables the Prestige to distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec
434. ser s Guide See the following graphic for an example where three telecommuters each use a different VPN rule to initiate a VPN connection to a Prestige located at headquarters The Prestige at headquarters identifies each by its secure gateway address a dynamic domain name and uses the appropriate VPN rule to establish the VPN connection Figure 96 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example Local IP Address 192 168 1 12 Local ID Type IP Local ID Content 140 168 1 12 Dynamic Domain Name KR LAN www telecommuter2 cam D kv KZ Local IF Address LAN Talecommuter B Headquarters 192168 110 Local IP Address 192 168 1 2 bs FEE p Local ID Type DNS VPN Tunnel AG Local ID Gontenl www lel eoornnu ber cn t Dynamic Domain Name www telecommuter2 com LAN Rule 1 Peer ID Type IF i Peer ID Content 192 168 1 12 Serre Lal raar Address www lelen er I oam eer SE mis NR Remote Address 192 168 1 12 ocal ID Type E mail Local ID Cantent m y PN myplace cam Rule 2 Peer ID Type DNS Peer 1D Content www tel ac om muter 2 2 om Dynamic Domain Name Secure Gateway Address www telecom muter2com fs Remole Address 192 188 1 2 www telecommuter3 com Rule 3 Peer ID Type E mail Peer ID Content mv PN m yplace com Secure sateway Address vw tele oomm erd com All lekecormmules use My IP Address 0 0 0 0 Remote Addresss 189 15A 1 15 Secure Gateway Address a b c d Remote IP Address 192 188 1 10 All rules use
435. ser name and password If you use PPPoE pass through make sure that bridge mode is turned on The Internet Check the schedule rules Refer to Chapter 33 on page 328 SMT connection If you use PPPoE encapsulation check the idle time out setting Refer to the disconnects Chapter 6 on page 110 web configurator or Chapter 29 on page 294 SMT Contact your ISP 391 Chapter 41 Troubleshooting P 335 Series User s Guide 41 4 Problems Accessing the Prestige Table 156 Troubleshooting Accessing the Prestige PROBLEM cannot access the Prestige cannot access the web configurator CORRECTIVE ACTION The username is admin The default password is 1234 The Password and Username fields are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the password Make sure that there is not an SMT console session running Use the Prestige s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN Refer to the instructions on checking your WAN connection Use the Prestige s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN Refer to for instructions on checking your LAN connection Check that you have enabled web service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address mus
436. set The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 DNS Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port The DNS service port number is 53 and cannot be changed here Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may send DNS queries to the Prestige Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the Prestige Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the Prestige Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send DNS queries to the Prestige Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 9 Security Screen To change your Prestige s security settings click the Remote MGMT link under Management and the Security tab The screen appears as shown If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your Prestige an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the Prestige exists Your Prestige supports anti probing which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your Prestige when unsupported ports are probed Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens 226 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 126 Security Remote Management Security ICMP Respond to Ping on LAN amp WAN DN IV Do not respond to requ
437. sing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations e Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent e GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations e Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent e Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens P 335 Series User s Guide 17 6 1 Supported MIBs The Prestige supports MIB II that is defined in RFC 1213 and RFC 1215 The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance 17 6 2 SNMP Traps The Prestige will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs Table 92 SNMP Traps TRAP TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION coldStart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting power on 1 warmStart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting software reboot authenticationFailure defined in A trap is sent to the manager when receiving any RFC 1215 SNMP get or set requirements with the wrong community password Start Fo
438. sociation Time This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the Prestige Refresh Click Refresh to redisplay the current screen 2 4 66 Summary Bandwidth Management Monitor Select the BW MGMT Monitor Details hyperlink in Status screen View the bandwidth usage of the LAN WAN and WLAN configured bandwidth rules This is also shown as bandwidth usage over the bandwidth budget for each rule The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the orange color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use Figure 13 Summary BW MGMT Monitor BW MGMT Monitor 2 4 7 Summary Packet Statistics Click the Packet Statistics Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics Also provided are system up time and poll interval s The Poll Interval s field is configurable Figure 14 Summary Packet Statistics Packet Statistics See WAN Dial 37 4104 U hd 3507 0 18 32 LAN 100M Full 1364 1333 1765 655 O 16 26 WLAN s 376 j hd j 0 18 26 System Up Time 0 18 32 Tne os E Setinterval stop 57 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 335 Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Summary Packet Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the WAN LAN or WLAN port Status This displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Eth
439. stige 5 10 Application Priority Configuration Screen 107 To edita WMM QoS application entry click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Figure 53 Application Priority Configuration Application Priority Configuration Name Service FTP vr Dest Port 21 1 65535 Priority Mid Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 43 Application Priority Configuration DESCRIPTION Application Priority Configuration Type a description of the application priority Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide Table 43 Application Priority Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Service The following is a description of the applications you can prioritize with WMM QoS Select a service from the drop down list box e FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 e E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 e WWW The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the I
440. stige Web Configurator 48 FTP 49 2 3 1 Procedure To Use The Reset Button ranrnnnrnnnnnnnnennnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennn 49 2 4 Navigating the Prestige Web Configurator kA 49 ND 52 2 4 2 Summary Any IP Table ERE 54 SNP Dee 55 2 4 4 Summary Parental Controls Statistics rrrrrrnrrnnnrrnarerarernernrannrnnennnennnnnn 959 2 4 5 Summary Wireless Station Status P 335WT rrrnnnrnnnnnnrnnnrnennnnrennnnnen 56 2 4 6 Summary Bandwidth Management Monitor 57 2 4 7 Summary Packet Statistics A ar Table of Contents 8 P 335 Series User s Guide EAS Summa IIE RE EE 58 Chapter 3 Pee eg ENE 60 TT NG 60 3 2 Connection Wizard System Information vuumsessmsismsesenanmimnisnemeerdnnennev 61 PRE E ET 61 aa DOMAN NAME i eaten os ten anini AREA NER EE anita es 61 3 3 Connection Wizard Wireless LAN P 335WT ENEE 62 SE BENER I OCOT EE KE iaa A Ea 63 3 3 2 Extend WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK Security cc ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 65 EGG ER ER EERSTE RE ER 65 3 4 Connection Wizard WAN rarennnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnennnnen 66 34 1 EEE TVD Geek eases 67 PP EE Gonnecion TYDE Jen 67 JPP GN TYDE EE 68 ERR EE elt EE 69 3 4 5 WAN IP Address Assignment NENNEN 70 3 4 6 IP Address and Subnet Mask rarrnnnnonnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnannnnnrnnnrnnnnnnanennnnnnnnnnnnen 71 3 4 7 DNS Server Address Assignment n nnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrrnnrennnernnnne 71 3
441. t you can have a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address allowing the host to be more easily accessible from various locations on the Internet You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider IP Multicast Deliver IP packets to a specific group of hosts using IP multicast IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is the protocol used to support multicast groups The latest version 1s version 2 see RFC 2236 the Prestige supports both versions 1 and 2 IP Alias IP Alias allows you to partition a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet LAN interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a member of the TCP IP protocol suite Your Prestige supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Prestige through the network The Prestige supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two SNMPv2 Network Address Translation NAT Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network for example a private IP address used in a local network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Int
442. t Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN MAC Address Spoof WAN MAC The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address Address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Clear the check box to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the Click Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter the IP computer s MAC address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is address successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file Z NOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 4 2 PPPoE Encapsulation The Prestige supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial up connection using PPPoE For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example Radius PPPoE provides a login and authentication method that the existing Microsoft Dial Up Networking software can activate and therefore requires no new learning or procedures for Windows users One of the bene
443. t Header Header Header Header 12 3 1 Transport Mode Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet In Transport mode the IP packet contains the security protocol AH or ESP located after the original IP header and options but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet such as TCP and UDP With ESP protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process Therefore the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data With the use of AH as the security protocol protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process 12 3 2 Tunnel Mode Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption This is the most common mode of operation Tunnel mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers e Outside header The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway e Inside header The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system be
444. t Management Remote Node Connection Time Total Budget Elapsed Time Total Period 1 MyISP No Budget No Budget The total budget is the time limit on the accumulated time for outgoing calls to a remote node When this limit is reached the call will be dropped and further outgoing calls to that remote node will be blocked After each period the total budget is reset The default for the total budget is 0 minutes and the period is 0 hours meaning no budget control You can reset the accumulated connection time in this menu by entering the index of a remote node Enter 0 to update the screen The budget and the reset period can be configured in menu 11 1 for the remote node Table 148 Menu 24 9 1 Budget Management FIELD DESCRIPTION Remote Node Enter the index number of the remote node you want to reset just one in this case Connection Time Total This is the total connection time that has gone by within the allocated budget Budget that you set in menu 11 1 Elapsed Time Total The period is the time cycle in hours that the allocation budget is reset see Period menu 11 1 The elapsed time is the time used up within this period Enter 0 to update the screen or press ESC to return to the previous screen 38 2 2 Call History This is the second option in Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control It displays information about past incoming and outgoing calls Enter 2 from Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control to
445. t Server 426 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 276 Name Your Printer Screen Add Printer Wizard Name Your Printer You must assign a name for this printer E Supply a name for this printer Some programs do not support server and printer name combinations of more than 31 characters Printer name JEPSON Stylus c60 Do vou want pour Windows based programs to use this printer as the default printer fr Yes C Ho g Back Cancel 24 Select the Do not share this printer radio button 25 Click Next to proceed to the following screen Figure 277 Printer Sharing Screen Printer Sharing Tou can share this printer with other network users Indicate whether you want this printer to be available to other users If you share this printer you must provide share name f Do not share this printer Shared as z Back Cancel 26 These fields are optional Type where your printer is located in the Location field Type additional information about the printer in the Comment field 27 Click Next to continue 427 Appendix D Print Server P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 278 Location and Comment Screen Add Printer Wizard Location and Comment Tou have the option of supplying location and description of this printer Tou can describe the location and capabilities of this printer This information may be helpful to users Location Comment lt Back Cancel 28 Select the Yes radi
446. t into Menu 24 6 Menu 24 6 System Maintenance Restore Configuration To transfer the firmware and configuration file to your workstation follow the procedure below ls Launch the FTP oGlient on your workstation 2 Type open and the IP address of your Prestige Then type root and SMT password as requested 3 Type put backupfilename rom 0 where backupfilename is the name of your backup configuration file on your workstation and rom 0 is the remote file name on the Prestige This restores the configuration to your Prestige 4 The system reboots automatically after a successful file transfer For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on backup using TFTP note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP please see your Prestige manual Press ENTER TO EXIT 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Find the rom file on your computer that you want to restore to your Prestige 7 Use put to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer for example put config rom rom 0 transfers the configuration file config rom on your computer to the Prestige See earlier in this chapter for more inform
447. t match it Refer to the chapter on remote management for details Your computer s and the Prestige s IP addresses must be on the same subnet for LAN access If you changed the Prestige s LAN IP address then enter the new one as the URL Remove any filters in SMT menu 3 1 LAN or menu 11 5 WAN that block web service See the following section to check that pop up windows JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed 41 5 Problems with Restricted Web Pages and Keyword Blocking Table 157 Troubleshooting Restricted Web Pages and Keyword Blocking PROBLEM Access to a restricted web page is not blocked Access to a web page with a URL containing a forbidden keyword is no blocked CORRECTIVE ACTION Make sure that the Enable Parental Control check box is selected in the Parental Control screen Make sure that you select a category in the Parental Control screen to restrict access to web pages relevant to that category For example select the Gambling check box to prevent access to www onlinegambling com Make sure that you select the Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL customize the keyword blocking using commands See the Customizing Keyword t Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter Chapter 41
448. t the speed to 1000 Kbps or less if the broadband device connected to the WAN port has an upstream speed of 1000 Kbps This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule 213 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management P 335 Series User s Guide Table 87 Bandwidth Management Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Direction Select To LAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the Prestige forwards to the LAN Select To WAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the Prestige forwards to the WAN Select To WLAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the Prestige forwards to the WLAN Name Use the auto generated name or enter a descriptive name of up to 20 alphanumeric characters including spaces Service Select a service for your rule or you can define your own in the Edit screen Dest Port Enter the port number of the destination See Table 86 for a list of services and port numbers Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High Mid or Low Modify Click the Edit icon to open the address mapping rule screen Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Setup screen Click the Remove icon to delete an address mapping rule Select a rule index number s radio button and then click Edit to set up this bandwidth management rule on the Prestige Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 3 Bandwidth Manage
449. t to Both or In Only it will incorporate the RIP information that it receives when set to None it will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received Both is the default RIP Version The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Prestige sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting Multicasting can reduce the load on non router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets However if one router uses multicasting then all routers on your network must use multicasting also By default RIP direction is set to Both and the Version set to RIP 1 Multicast Select IGMP V 1 or IGMP V 2 or None IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC
450. tandard is a newer method of data encryption that also uses a secret key This implementation of AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data AES is faster than 3DES Authentication MD5 default MD5 default MD5 Message Digest 5 produces a MD5 Message Digest 5 produces a 128 bit digest to authenticate packet 128 bit digest to authenticate packet data data SHA1 SHA1 SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm produces a 160 bit digest to produces a 160 bit digest to authenticate packet data authenticate packet data 13 3 My IP Address My IP Address is the WAN IP address of the Prestige If this field is configured as 0 0 0 0 then the Prestige will use the current Prestige WAN IP address static or dynamic to set up the VPN tunnel The Prestige has to rebuild the VPN tunnel if the My IP Address changes after setup 13 4 Secure Gateway Address Secure Gateway Address is the WAN IP address or domain name of the remote IPSec router secure gateway If the remote secure gateway has a static WAN IP address enter it in the Secure Gateway Address field You may alternatively enter the remote secure gateway s domain name if it has one in the Secure Gateway Address field 165 Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide You can also enter a remote secure gateway s domain name in the Secure Gateway Address field if the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS
451. tart 0 is the default and signifies any port Type a port number from 0 to 65535 Someone behind the remote IPSec router cannot create a VPN tunnel when attempting to con nect using a port number that does not match this port number or range of port num bers Some of the most common IP ports are 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POPS End Enter a port number in this field to define a port range This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field This field is N A when 0 is configured in the Port Start field Chapter 32 VPN IPSec Setup 322 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 129 Menu 27 1 1 IPSec Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Enable Replay As a VPN setup is processing intensive the system is vulnerable to Denial of Service Detection DoS attacks The IPSec receiver can detect and reject old or duplicate packets to pro tect against replay attacks Enable replay detection by setting this field to Yes Press SPACE BAR to select Yes or No Choose Yes and press ENTER to enable replay detection Key Press SPACE BAR to choose either IKE or Manual and then press ENTER Manual Management _ is useful for troubleshooting if you have problems using IKE key management Edit Key Press SPACE BAR to change the default No to Yes and then press ENTER to go to Management a key management menu for configuring your key management setup described Setup later If you set the Key Mana
452. tdio 5 to restore the five minute SMT timeout default when the file transfer is complete 4 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the Prestige Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer 5 Use the TFTP client see the example below to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer The file name for the configuration file is rom 0 rom zero not capital o Note that the telnet connection must be active and the SMT in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer For details on TFTP commands see following example please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program For UNIX use get to transfer from the Prestige to the computer and binary to set binary transfer mode 37 2 7 TFTP Command Example The following is an example TFTP command trip 1 h st get ronV config ron where 1 specifies binary image transfer mode use this mode when transferring binary files host is the Prestige IP address get transfers the file source on the Prestige rom 0 name of the configuration file on the Prestige to the file destination on the computer and renames it config rom Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 366 P 335 Series User s Guide 37 2 8 GUl based TFTP Clients The following table describes some of the fields that you may see in GUI based TFTP clients Table 147 General Commands for GUl based TFTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTI
453. ted this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel and go back to the previous screen 295 Chapter 29 Static Route Setup P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 30 Network Address Translation NAT This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Prestige 30 1 Using NAT Note You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA NAT to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the Prestige 30 1 1 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT SUA Single User Account is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server See section Address Mapping Sets for a detailed description of the NAT set for SUA The Prestige also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types Note Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige Note Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige 30 2 Applying NAT You apply NAT via menus 4 or 11 3 as displayed next The next figure shows you how to apply NAT for Internet access in menu 4 Enter 4 from the main menu to go to Menu 4 Internet Access Setup Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT 296 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 166 Menu 4 Applying NAT for Internet Access M
454. ter Please note that terms download and upload are relative to the computer Download means to transfer from the Prestige to the computer while upload means from your computer to the Prestige 37 2 1 Backup Configuration Follow the instructions as shown in the next screen 363 Chapter 37 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 220 Telnet in Menu 24 5 Menu 24 5 System Maintenance Backup Configuration To transfer the configuration file to your workstation follow the procedure below Launch the FTP elek on your workstation Type open and the IP address of your Prestige Then type root and SMT password as requested Locate the rom 0 file Type get rom 0 to back up the current Prestige configuration to your workstation For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on backup using TFTP note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP please see your Prestige manual Press ENTER to Exit 37 2 2 Using the FTP Command from the Command Line 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use get to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer for exampl
455. ter s Computer Name In Windows 95 98 click Start Settings Control Panel Network Click the Identification tab note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name In Windows 2000 click Start Settings Control Panel and then double click System Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name In Windows XP click start My Computer View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used While you must enter the host name System Name on each individual computer the domain name can be assigned from the Prestige via DHCP 24 2 Procedure To Configure Menu 1 1 Enter 1 in the Main Menu to open Menu 1 General Setup shown next Chapter 24 Menu 1 General Setup 266 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 146 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup system Name Domain Name zyxel com tw First System DNS Server From ISP IP Address N A Second System DNS Server From ISP IP Address N A Third System DNS Server From ISP IP Address N A Edit Dynamic DNS No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 2 Fill in the required fields R
456. ter shows you how to get started with the Prestige firewall 31 1 Remote Management and the Firewall When SMT menu 24 11 is configured to allow management see the Remote Management chapter and the firewall is enabled e The firewall blocks remote management from the WAN unless you configure a firewall rule to allow it e The firewall allows remote management from the LAN 31 2 Access Methods The web configurator is by far the most comprehensive firewall configuration tool your Prestige has to offer For this reason it is recommended that you configure your firewall using the web configurator see the following chapters for instructions SMT screens allow you to activate the firewall and view firewall logs 31 3 Enabling the Firewall From the main menu enter 21 to go to Menu 21 Filter and Firewall Setup to display the screen shown next Enter option 2 in this menu to bring up the following screen Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes in the Active field to activate the firewall The firewall must be active to protect against Denial of Service DoS attacks Additional rules may be configured using the web configurator Chapter 31 Enabling the Firewall 314 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 188 Menu 21 2 Firewall Setup Menu 21 2 Firewall Setup The firewall protects against Denial of Service DoS attacks when it is active Your network is vulnerable to attacks when the firewall is turned off Refer to
457. terface The SMT is a menu driven interface that you can access over a telnet connection RoadRunner Support In addition to standard cable modem services the Prestige supports Time Warner s RoadRunner Service Logging and Tracing e Built in message logging and packet tracing e Unix syslog facility support e Firewall logs e Content filtering logs Upgrade Prestige Firmware via LAN The firmware of the Prestige can be upgraded via the LAN refer to Maintenance F W Upload Screen Embedded FTP and TFTP Servers The Prestige s embedded FTP and TFTP Servers enable fast firmware upgrades as well as configuration file backups and restoration Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige 42 P 335 Series User s Guide 1 2 3 Wireless Features P 335WT Wireless LAN The Prestige supports the IEEE 802 11g standard which is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard meaning that you can have both IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g wireless clients in the same wireless network Note The P 335WT may be prone to RF Radio Frequency interference from other 2 4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens wireless phones Bluetooth enabled devices and other wireless LANs Wi Fi Protected Access Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 111 security specification standard Key differences between WPA and WEP are user authentication and improved data encryption WPA 2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 8
458. than or equal to 100 000 kbps you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the LAN port e The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WLAN port WLAN to WAN WAN to WLAN WLAN to WLAN Prestige must be less than or equal to 54 000 kbps you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the WLAN port 16 1 1 Application based Bandwidth Management Example The bandwidth rules in the following example are based solely on application Each bandwidth rule VoIP Web FTP E mail and Video is allotted 128 Kbps Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 206 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 112 Application based Bandwidth Management Example WAN VoIP 128 kbps Web 128 kbps a en Internet a J FTP 128 kbps E mail 128 kbps Video 128 kbps 16 1 2 Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example The following example uses bandwidth rules based solely on LAN subnets Each bandwidth rule Subnet A and Subnet B is allotted 320 Kbps Figure 113 Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example WAN subnet A 320 kbps pn subnet B 320 kbps D Internet 16 1 3 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example The following example uses bandwidth rules based on LAN subnets and applications specific applications in each subnet are allotted bandwidth 207 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 114 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example SE
459. that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access EAP Authentication EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the JEEE802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server the access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP The following figure shows an overview of authentication when you specify a RADIUS server on your access point Figure 306 EAP Authentication RADIUS Server ft Wireless Station alge The details below provide a general description of how IEEE 802 1x EAP authentication works For an example list of EAP MD5 authentication steps see the IEEE 802 1x appendix 1 The wireless station sends a start message to the device 2 The device sends a request identity message to the wireless station for identity information Appendix Wireless LANs 462 P 335 Series User s Guide 3 The wireless station replies with identity information including username
460. the IP Address in the Check WAN IP Address field before it times out The number in this field should be less than the number in the Period field Three to 50 is usually a good number The WAN connection is considered down after the Prestige times out the number of times specified in the Fail Tolerance field When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel to save your configuration or press ESC to cancel and go back to the previous screen Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration 292 P 335 Series User s Guide 293 Chapter 28 Remote Node Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 29 Static Route Setup This chapter shows how to setup IP static routes 29 1 IP Static Route Setup To configure an IP static route use Menu 12 Static Routing Setup shown next Figure 164 Menu 12 IP Static Route Setup Menu 12 IP Statre Route Setup Le OP De 4 om E Ta og Enter selection number Now type the route number of a static route you want to configure Chapter 29 Static Route Setup 294 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 165 Menu12 1 Edit IP Static Route Menu 12 1 Edit IP Static Route Route 1 Route Name Active No Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric 2 Private No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields for Menu 12 1 Edit
461. the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Addr Type Press SPACE BAR to choose SINGLE RANGE or SUBNET and press ENTER Select SINGLE with a single IP address Use RANGE for a specific range of IP addresses Use SUBNET to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask IP Addr Start When the Addr Type field is configured to Single enter a static IP address on the net work behind the remote IPSec router When the Addr Type field is configured to Range enter the beginning static IP address in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the Addr Type field is configured to SUBNET enter a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router This field displays N A when you configure the Secure Gateway Address field to 0 0 0 0 End Subnet When the Addr Type field is configured to Single this field is N A Mask When the Addr Type field is configured to Range enter the end static IP address in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the Addr Type field is configured to SUBNET enter a subnet mask on the net work behind the remote IPSec router This field displays N A when you configure the Secure Gateway Address field to 0 0 0 0 Port S
462. the printer on your system Change Settings Configure Wireless Configure TOR IP ave 5 E EET E g 5 Appendix D Print Server 418 P 335 Series User s Guide Windows 95 98 ME NT 2000 XP Print Server Setup Wizard The following Setup Wizard for Windows 98 ME NT 2000 XP uses a print server protocol called Line Printer Daemon LPD You must use this wizard if you want to set up your network print server on the following operating systems e Windows 95 e Windows 98 e Windows 98 SE Second Edition e Windows ME LPD 1s a printing protocol that uses UDP to establish connections between printers and computers on a network 1 Load the CD ROM that is supplied with the Prestige Select Network Print Server Setup 2 Select the Setup Wizard for Windows 98 ME NT 2000 XP link to begin the installation Figure 261 AutoPlay Menn i A i MN e K H nr NN Wi HII Setup Wizard for Windows NT 2000 XP K Setup Wizard for Windows 98 ME NT 2000 XP ET Firewall Router with Print Server 3 The Welcome screen displays Read the on screen information and click Next to continue 419 Appendix D Print Server Figure 262 Network Print Monitor Setup Welcome ch Hatsan Print Mor ior Setup Network Print Monitor for Windows 95 98 Me wiele bo the Metssork Print Hionta MESSE S Woe vell irtal eed Co year Eget H shore seconded thal you esol all Windows beten be e
463. thod WEP in the WEP Encryption field Select Auto Open System or Shared Key from the drop down list box Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as the WEP keys Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as the WEP keys The preceding Ox that identifies a hexadecimal key is entered automatically 95 Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT P 335 Series User s Guide Table 35 Wireless 802 1x and Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the Prestige and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 256 bit WEP then enter 29 ASCII characters or 58 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 ReAuthentication Timer in seconds Specify how often wireless stations have to reenter usernames and passwords in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority Idle Timeout The Prestige automatically disc
464. tication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected Key Group You must choose a key group for phase 1 IKE setup DH1 default refers to Diffie Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number DH2 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit 1Kb random number Pre Shared Key Type your pre shared key in this field A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection IKE Phase 2 A phase 2 exchange uses the IKE SA established in phase 1 to negotiate the SA for IPSec Encapsulation Mode Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop down list box The Prestige s encapsulation mode should be identical to the secure remote gateway IPSec Protocol Select ESP or AH from the drop down list box The Prestige s IPSec Protocol should be identical to the secure remote gateway The ESP Encapsulation Security Payload protocol RFC 2406 provides encryption as well as the authentication offered by AH If you select ESP here you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication Algorithm fields described below The AH protocol Authentication Header Protocol RFC 2402 was designed for integrity authentication sequence integrity replay resistance and non repudiation but not for conf
465. tination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload mapping NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your Prestige filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 9 1 3 How NAT Works 135 Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NA
466. tion 7 2 3 RIP Setup RIP Routing Information Protocol RFC 1058 and RFC 1389 allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers RIP Direction controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both or Out Only the Prestige will broadcast its routing table periodically When set to Both or In Only it will incorporate the RIP information that it receives when set to None it will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received RIP Version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Prestige sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M send routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting Multicasting can reduce the load on non router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets However if one router uses multicasting then all routers on your network must use multicasting also By default RIP Direction is set to Both and RIP Version to RIP 1 7 2 4 Multicast 123 Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast deliver
467. tion However when it is set to auto authentication the device will accept either type of authentication request and the device will fall back to use open authentication if the shared key does not match Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the Wireless screen You may still configure and store keys here but they will not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 171 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types enes mens ms rear mm Mutual Authentication Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client Yes Certificate Server Yes Yes Yes Dynamic Key Exchange Yes Yes Yes Yes Deployment Difficulty Moderate Client Identity Protection Yes Yes No WPA 2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 111 standard WPA 2 IEEE 802 111 is a wi
468. tion Number Enter 255 to display the next screen see SUA Single User Account Versus NAT section The fields in this menu cannot be changed 299 Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 170 Menu 15 1 255 SUA Address Mapping Rules Menu 15 1 255 Address Mapping Rules Set Name SUA Idx hocal Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Glo b l End IP Type 1 040040 25052005 25000255 MG M 1 2 Gulag Server 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table explains the fields in this menu Table 124 SUA Address Mapping Rules DESCRIPTION Set Name This is the name of the set you selected in menu 15 1 or enter the name of a new set you want to create dx This is the index or rule number Local Start IP Local Start IP is the starting local IP address ILA Local End IP Local End IP is the ending local IP address ILA If the rule is for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0 0 0 0 and the End IP is 255 255 255 255 Global Start IP This is the starting global IP address IGA If you have a dynamic IP enter 0 0 0 0 as the Global Start IP Global End IP This is the ending global IP address IGA These are the mapping types Server allows us to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this machine See later for some examples When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to ca
469. tion is not ready or has failed Green The Prestige is ready but is not sending receiving data through the wireless LAN Blinking The Prestige is sending receiving data through the wireless LAN None Off The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed Green ss Blinking OTIST is in progress OTIST is activated and the wireless security settings are given to a wireless client The LED remains on unless the WLAN settings are changed None OTIST is not activated or WLAN settings are manually configured after OTIST is successful ll a The print server connection is not ready or has failed The print server has a successful connection mm Blinking The print server is sending receiving data de 5 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 2 Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter describes how to access the Prestige web configurator and provides an overview of its screens 2 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Prestige setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 e JavaScripts enabled by defau
470. to choose from SHA1 or MD5 and then press ENTER SA Life Time Define the length of time before an IKE Security automatically renegotiates in this Seconds field It may range from 60 to 3 000 000 seconds almost 35 days A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected Key Group You must choose a key group for phase 1 IKE setup DH1 default refers to Diffie Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number DH2 refers to Diffie Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit 1Kb random number Phase 2 Active Protocol Press SPACE BAR to choose from ESP or AH and then press ENTER See earlier for a discussion of these protocols Encryption Press SPACE BAR to choose from NULL 3DES or DES and then press ENTER Algorithm Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption Authentication Press SPACE BAR to choose from SHA1 or MD5 and then press ENTER Algorithm SA Life Time Define the length of time before an IPSec Security automatically renegotiates in this Seconds field It may range from 60 to 3 000 000 seconds almost 35 days Encapsulation Press SPACE BAR to choose from Tunnel mode or Transport mode and then press ENTER See earlier for a discussion of these Perfect Forward Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS is disabled None by default in phase 2
471. to specify its security settings PG Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you havent placed in other zones Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned Actives controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites OF Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default 6 Click OK to close the window Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 398 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 243 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings We 7 x Settings Scripting Fil Active Prompt Ei Allow paste operations via script CH Disable Gh Enable Prompt 2 Scripting of Jawa applets CX Prompt Liles Drkkpskio sbi Reset custom settings ve Eg Medium Reset cancel 41 5 1 3 Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected 5 Click OK to close the window 399 Chapter 41 Troublesh
472. to the Prestige USB port 7 Click Next to continue Appendix D Print Server 416 P 335 Series User s Guide 417 Figure 257 Network Print Server Setup Wizard Select A Printer Network Print Server Setup Wizard E The Wizard now helps you set up the printer that is connected to the print server You can either select a printer that has already been installed on this computer or add a new printer Select printer from the following list Add New Printer Save Settings HP DeskJet 8100 IP 192 168 1 1 HP LaserJet 8000 Series PCL 6 IP 172 17 2 1 Select Printer Canon iRS000 6000 PELE IP2 172 17 2 5 Sam ary Acrobat Distiller CADocuments and mace To add new printer you need printer installation CD diskette or the driver file that youve downloaded from the Internet Back Cancel 8 If your printer is not listed you can use the pop up help dialog box to guide you through the add printer process After you have added a printer the Select A Printer screen displays again Select the printer you have added and click Next to continue Figure 258 Add Printer Help You have chosen to Soe anew printer Windows Add Printer Wizard has been brought up to help you add new printer Follow the instructions In this Help to add anew printer an this computer Please note though these steps might vary slightly depending on which Windows version is used the functionality of these procedures is exactly the same Afte
473. to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area 471 Appendix J Antenna Selection and Positioning Recommendation P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix K Brute Force Password Guessing Protection The following describes the commands for enabling disabling and configuring the brute force password guessing protection mechanism for the password Table 173 Brute Force Password Guessing Protection Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION sys pwderrtm This command displays the brute force guessing password protection settings sys pwderrtm 0 This command turns off the password s protection from brute force guessing The brute force password guessing protection is turned off by default sys pwderrtm N This command sets the password protection to block all access attempts for N a number from 1 to 60 minutes after the third time an incorrect password is entered Example sys pwderrtm 5 This command sets the password protection to block all access attempts for five minutes after the third time an incorrect password 1s entered Appendix K Brute Force Password Guessing Protection 472 P 335 Series User s Guide 473 Appendix K Brute Force Password Guessing Protection P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix L Triangle Route The Ideal Setup When the firewall is on your Prestige acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet In an ide
474. tocol uses this service IPSEC TUNNEL ESP 0 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol MULTICAST IGMP 0 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING ICMP 0 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL GRE 0 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login
475. tomatically drops the tunnel after two minutes 13 7 NAT Traversal NAT traversal allows you to set up a VPN connection when there are NAT routers between IPSec routers A and B Figure 86 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers Normally you cannot set up a VPN connection with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet In the previous figure IPSec router A sends an IPSec packet in an attempt to initiate a VPN The NAT router changes the IPSec packet s header so it does not match the header for which IPSec router B is checking Therefore IPSec router B does not respond and the VPN connection cannot be built NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header and responds IPSec routers A and B build a VPN connection 13 7 1 NAT Traversal Configuration For NAT traversal to work you must e Use ESP security protocol in either transport or tunnel mode e Use IKE keying mode e Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints Chapter 13 VPN Screens 168 P 335 Series User s Guide In order for IPSec router A see the figure to receive an initiating IPSec packet from IPSec router B set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A 13 7 2 Remote DNS Server In cases where you want to use domain name
476. u Computer 4 Packets Sent 5 Fecerved 5 943 Close With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the ZyXEL device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL device first This is helpful if you do not know the IP address of the ZyXEL device Chapter 18 UPnP 236 P 335 Series User s Guide Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel Network Tasks 2 Double click Network Connections 4 Create a new connection Sede Connection up rom or small Internet Connection i twor 3 Select My Network Places under ae LAN or High Speed Internet Other Places See Also Local 4rea Connection 4 Network Troubleshooter Enabled L db Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Other Places G Control Panel a My Network Places CH My Documents ig My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder ig Start Ki Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under NE Local Network E i A D Ass rds E 5 Right click the icon for your ZyXEL Viez device and select Invoke The web terser e gl no configurator login screen displays oe ene Ge e sty Steer Give nabeork di Ver Workgroup commuters 6 Right click the icon for your ZyXEL device and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the ZyXEL device ASEL Prestige 314 Plus Internet Sharing
477. u must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The Prestige uses a system DNS server in the order you specify here to resolve domain names for VPN DDNS and the time server First DNS Server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the fields provided Second DNS Server If you do not configure a system DNS server you must use IP addresses Third DNS Server when configuring VPN DDNS and the time server Click Back to return to the previous screen Me Click Next to continue 3 4 9 WAN MAC Address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 72 P 335 Series User s Guide You can configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom file ZyNOS configuration file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different rom file Table 22 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses Choose an IP address 192 168 1 2 192 168 1 32 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 254 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway or default route 192 168 1 1 Prestige LAN IP This screen allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the factory default or
478. ugh a VPN Forward Packets connection are blocked or forwarded Trigger This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are allowed to initiate Disabled dial calls Disabled means that NetBIOS packets are blocked from initiating calls NetBIOS Filter Configuration Syntax sys filter netbios config lt type gt lt on off gt where lt type gt Identify which NetBIOS filter numbered 0 3 to configure 0 Between LAN and WAN 3 IPSec packet pass through 4 Trigger Dial lt on off gt For type 0 and 1 use on to enable the filter and block NetBIOS packets Use off to disable the filter and forward NetBIOS packets For type 3 use on to block NetBIOS packets from being sent through a VPN connection Use off to allow NetBIOS packets to be sent through a VPN connection For type 4 use on to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate dial backup calls Use off to block NetBIOS packets from initiating dial backup calls Example commands sys filter netbios This command blocks LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN NetBIOS packets config O on sys filter netbios This command blocks IPSec NetBIOS packets donfig 3 on sys filter netbios This command stops NetBIOS commands from initiating calls config 4 off A440 Appendix F Print Server Specifications P 335 Series User s Guide Appendix G Log Descriptions Configure centralized logs using the embedded web configurator see online help for details This appendix provides descriptions of exam
479. ult server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet 139 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 70 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168133 p LAN WAN kb 192 168 1 1 c 192 163 135 E Les lt 192 168 1 36 FN Internet YY B 192 168 1 34 9 4 General NAT Screen Click the NAT link under Network to open the General screen Figure 71 General NAT Setup IV Enable Network Address Translation Max NAT Firewall Session Per User Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 General LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet protocol Address address used within one network for example a private IP address used in a local Translation network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Internet Select the check box to enable NAT Max NAT Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT firewall sessions Firewall Session that a host can create Per User Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 140 P 335 Series User s
480. umber is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the Prestige The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your Prestige The key is not sent over the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 5 OTIST OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology allows your Prestige to set the wireless client to use the same wireless settings as the Prestige Note The wireless client must support OTIST and have OTIST enabled The following are the wireless settings that the Prestige assigns to the wireless client if OTIST is enabled on both devices and the OTIST setup keys are the same e SSID e Security WEP or WPA PSK Note This will replace the pre configured wireless settings on the wireless clients Click the Wireless LAN link under Network and then the OTIST tab The following screen displays Chapter 5 Wireless LAN P 335WT 98 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 47 OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology Setup Key peter IV Yes Please enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA PSK automatically if no WLAN security has been set This will generate random PSK key for your c
481. unnel if you leave this field as 0 0 0 0 The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if this IP address changes Local ID Type Select IP to identify this Prestige by its IP address Select DNS to identify this Prestige by a domain name Select E mail to identify this Prestige by an e mail address Local Content When you select IP in the Local ID Type field type the IP address of your computer in the local Content field The Prestige automatically uses the IP address in the My IP Address field refer to the My IP Address field description if you configure the local Content field to 0 0 0 0 or leave it blank It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 in the local Content field or use the DNS or E mail ID type in the following situations e When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers e When you want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses When you select DNS or E mail in the Local ID Type field type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify this Prestige in the local Content field Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Secure Gateway Type the WAN IP address or the URL up to 31 characters of the remote Address secure gateway with which you re making the VPN conn
482. ur Prestige for remote Telnet access as shown next The administrator uses Telnet from a computer on a remote network to access the Prestige Figure 120 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Network 17 4 Telnet Screen To change your Prestige s Telnet settings click the Remote MGMT link under Management and the Telnet tab The following screen displays Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens 220 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 121 Telnet Remote Management Telnet Telnet Server Port Server Access Secured Client IP Address All C Selected 0 0 0 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 Telnet Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Select the interface s through which a computer may access the Prestige using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the Prestige using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the Prestige using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the Prestige using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 5 FTP Screen You can upl
483. uration changes Use Advanced made if you need access to more advanced features not included in Wizard mode 2 Choose your language from the drop down list box 3 Click the Connection Wizard radio button to configure the Prestige for Internet access 4 Click the Bandwidth Management Wizard radio button to configure the Prestige s bandwidth management 5 Click the go button to proceed to the next screen Chapter 3 Connection Wizard 60 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 17 Select a Language Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup Please choose the language you need Language H Connection Wizard WW Bandwidth Management Wizardfoptional 6 Read the on screen information and click Next Figure 18 Welcome to the Connection Wizard Welcome to the ZyXEL Connection Wizard The connection wizard will walk you through the most common configuration options This wizard has been broken down into three steps each of which may have multiple pages This wizard will take you through the following steps Step 1 System Information Setup Step 2 Wireless LON Setup Step 3 Internet Configuration Setup 3 2 Connection Wizard System Information System Information contains administrative and system related information 3 2 1 System Name System Name is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name e In Windows 95 98 clic
484. ured as a server the Prestige provides TCP IP configuration for the clients If not DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computers must be manually configured When set as a server fill in the following four fields IP Pool Starting This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Address Chapter 8 DHCP Server 130 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 52 General LABEL DESCRIPTION This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server The Prestige passes a DNS Domain Name System server IP address in the order you specify here to the DHCP clients The Prestige only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the DHCP Server check box When you clear the DHCP Server check box DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and Second DNS Server the Prestige s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only l DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Third DNS Server Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined c
485. us Table 4 Screens Summary Status This screen shows the Prestige s general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the wizard and summary statistics tables noen 0 Wireless LAN Use this screen to configure wireless LAN OTIST This screen allows you to assign wireless clients the Prestige s wireless security settings MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the Prestige to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the Prestige This screen allows you to configure your Prestige roaming capabilities QoS WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of the individual and applications Connection assignment and the WAN MAC address Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 52 P 335 Series User s Guide Table 4 Screens Summary LINK A D FUNCTION DHCP Server General Use this screen to enable the Prestige s DHCP server and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server Static DHCP Use this screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses Client List Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name NAT General Port Forwarding Use this screen to enable NAT Use this screen to configure servers behind the Prestige Trigger Port Use this screen to change your Prestige
486. used by other wireless devices within the transmission range of the Prestige This allows you to select the channel with minimum interference for your Prestige 1 3 Applications for the Prestige Here are some examples of what you can do with your Prestige 1 3 1 Print Server Application The following figure shows how you can setup your printer to operate on a LAN using the Prestige as a router and print server Figure 1 Prestige Print Server Application Computers USB Printer Prestige 1 3 2 Secure Broadband Internet Access via Cable or DSL Modem You can connect a cable modem DSL or wireless modem to the Prestige for broadband Internet access via an Ethernet or a wireless port on the modem The Prestige guarantees not only high speed Internet access but secure internal network protection and traffic management as well Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Prestige 44 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 2 Secure Internet Access via Cable DSL or Wireless Modem Internet 1 3 3 VPN Application Prestige VPN is an ideal cost effective way to connect branch offices and business partners over the Internet without the need and expense for leased lines between sites Figure 3 VPN Application VPN client E VPN client J ge oueneess VPN Tunnel Remote IPSec Router ulus Remote Network r u 1 3 4 Wireless LAN Application P 335WT Add a wireless LAN to your existing network without expensive
487. uses the address mapping set that you configure and enter in the Address Mapping Set field menu 15 1 see section Select None to disable NAT When you select SUA Only the SMT uses Address Mapping Set 255 menu 15 1 see section Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige 30 3 NAT Setup Use the address mapping sets menus and submenus to create the mapping table used to assign global addresses to computers on the LAN Set 255 is used for SUA When you select Full Feature in menu 4 or 11 3 the SMT will use Set 1 When you select SUA Only the SMT will use the pre configured Set 255 read only The server set is a list of LAN servers mapped to external ports To use this set a server rule must be set up inside the NAT address mapping set Please see the section on port forwarding in the chapter on NAT web configurator screens for further information on these menus To configure NAT enter 15 from the main menu to bring up the following screen Chapter 30 Network Address Translation NAT 298 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 168 Menu 15 NAT Setup Menu 15 NAT Setup 1 Address Mapping Sets 2 Port Forwarding Setup 3 Trigger Port Setup Enter Menu Selection Number 30 3 1 Address Mapping Sets Enter to bring up Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets Figure 169 Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets 1 NAT SET 255 SUA read only Enter Menu Selec
488. uthentication Timer in seconds Idle Timeout Dynamic WEP Key Exchange DESCRIPTION Specify how often wireless stations have to reenter usernames and passwords in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority The Prestige automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed The default time interval is 3600 seconds or 1 hour Select 64 bit WEPor 128 bit WEP to enable data encryption Up to 32 stations can access the Prestige when you configure dynamic WEP key exchange This field is not available when you set Security to WPA or WPA PSK Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Shared Secret 93 Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the Prestige The key must b
489. uticals intoxicating plants or chemicals and their related paraphernalia 199 Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services P 335 Series User s Guide Table 81 Parental Controls LABEL DESCRIPTION Selecting this category excludes pages that promote or offer the sale alcohol tobacco products or provide the means to create them It also includes pages that glorify tout or otherwise encourage the consumption of alcohol tobacco It does not include pages that sell alcohol or tobacco as a subset of other products Alcohol Tobacco Gambling Selecting this category excludes pages where a user can place a bet or participate in a betting pool including lotteries online It also includes pages that provide information assistance recommendations or training on placing bets or participating in games of chance It does not include pages that sell gambling related products or machines It also does not include pages for offline casinos and hotels as long as those pages do not meet one of the above requirements Abortion Selecting this category excludes pages that provide information or arguments in favor of or against abortion describe abortion procedures offer help in obtaining or avoiding abortion or provide information on the effects or lack thereof of abortion Apply Click Apply to save the settings Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 14 Trend Micro Security Services 200 P 335 Series User s Gu
490. utput Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 34 6 2 Applying Remote Node Filters Go to menu 11 5 shown below note that call filter sets are only present for PPPoE encapsulation and enter the number s of the filter set s as appropriate You can cascade up to four filter sets by entering their numbers separated by commas The Prestige already has filters to prevent NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls Figure 208 Filtering Remote Node Traffic Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Output Fritter Sets protocol filters device filters Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL 345 Chapter 34 Filter Configuration P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 35 SNMP Configuration This chapter explains SNMP Configuration menu 22 35 1 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a member of the TCP IP protocol suite Your Prestige supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Prestige through the network The Prestige supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two c SNMPv2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 209 SNMP Management Model MANAGER Managed Device Banaged Device Managed Device An SNMP man
491. word in the domain name or IP address will be blocked e g URL http www website com bad html would be blocked Select this check box to enable this feature Keyword Type a keyword in this field You may use any character up to 64 characters Wildcards are not allowed You can also enter a numerical IP address 153 Chapter 11 Content Filtering P 335 Series User s Guide Table 64 Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Keyword List This list displays the keywords already added Click Add after you have typed a keyword Repeat this procedure to add other keywords Up to 64 keywords are allowed When you try to access a web page containing a keyword you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request Delete Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply Q Q Clear All Message to display when a site is blocked Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords Denied Access Message Apply Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh Enter a message to be displayed when a user tries to access a restricted web site The default message is Please contact your network administrator Click Apply to save your changes 11 5 Schedule Click the Content Filter link under Security and the Schedule tab The following screen displays Chapter 11 Content Filtering 15 E P 335 Series
492. ws from appearing Block pop ups d Settings H 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Note If you change the IP address of your device make sure that the new address matches the address you type in the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Chapter 41 Troubleshooting 396 397 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 241 Pop up Blocker Settings Ke Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Sddress of Web site to allows http 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play sound when pop up Is blocked Show Information Bar when pop up i blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAL 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting 41 5 1 2 JavaScripts JavaScripts are allowed If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Chapter 41 Troubleshooting P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 242 Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone
493. xt Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis 352 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 214 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information Name P 335 P 335WT zyxel com tw Routings TP ZYNOS F W Version V3760 JO 3 8 13 2004 Country Code 255 LAN Ethernet Address 00 A0 C5 01 21 80 IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server Press ESC or RETURN to Exit The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 142 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information FIELD DESCRIPTION Name Displays the system name of your Prestige This information can be changed in Menu 1 General Setup Refers to the routing protocol used ZyNOS F W Version Refers to the ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System system firmware version ZyNOS is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Corporation DHCP This field shows the DHCP setting None Relay or Server of the Prestige 36 2 2 Console Port Speed You can set up different port speeds for the console port through Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Console Port Speed Your Prestige supports 9600 default 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the desired speed in menu 24 2 2 as shown in the following figure 353 Chapter 36 System Information and Diagnosis P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 215 Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Change Console Port Sp
494. y which by default is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet You can use the command sys firewall tcprst rst on off to change this policy When the firewall mechanism blocks a UDP packet it drops the packet without sending a response packet Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 22 Chapter 17 Remote Management Screens P 335 Series User s Guide CHAPTER 18 UPNP This chapter introduces the Universal Plug and Play feature 18 1 Universal Plug and Play Overview Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use 18 1 1 How Do I Know If I m Using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device 18 1 2 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure
495. you don t use Any enabled service could present a potential security risk A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network 5 For local services that are enabled protect against misuse Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces 6 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active 7 Keep the firewall in a secured locked room 10 2 General Firewall Screen Click the Firewall link under Security to open the General screen 147 Chapter 10 Firewall P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 76 General General Firewall Setup IV Enable Firewall IV Bypass Triangle Route Make sure this check box is selected to have the firewall protect your LAN from Denial of Service DoS attacks Max NAT Firewall Session Per User 256 Packet Direction lg LAN to WAN no Log D WAN to LAN Log Forwarded D Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall The Prestige performs access control and protects against Denial of Service DoS attacks when the firewall is activated Bypass Triangle Select this check box to have the Prestige firewall ignore the use of triangle route Route topology on the network See t
496. your Prestige is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the Prestige s current configuration to your computer 22 2 2 Restore Configuration Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Prestige Table 104 Maintenance Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process Note Do not turn off the Prestige while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a configuration upload successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the Prestige again Chapter 22 Tools 256 P 335 Series User s Guide Figure 139 Configuration Restore Successful system Upload Firmware upload error The uploaded file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select valid upgrade file Click Help for more information Return The Prestige automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary
497. ys connected In phase 2 you must e Choose which protocol to use ESP or AH for the IKE key exchange e Choose an encryption algorithm Choose an authentication algorithm Chapter 13 VPN Screens P 335 Series User s Guide e Choose whether to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS using Diffie Hellman public key cryptography see Section Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS Select None the default to disable PFS Choose Tunnel mode or Transport mode Set the IPSec SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay up before it times out The Prestige automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires The Prestige also automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if both IPSec routers have keep alive enabled even if there is no traffic If an IPSec SA times out then the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic 13 11 1 Negotiation Mode The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security SA will be established for each connection through IKE negotiations e Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication phase 1 It uses 6 messages in three round trips SA negotiation Diffie Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces a nonce is a random number This mode features identity protection your identity is not revealed in the negoti
498. z v Security Security Mode WPA PSK v Pre Shared Key 12345678 ReAuthentication Timer 1800 In Seconds Idle Timeout 3500 In Seconds Group Key Update Timer 1800 In Seconds Apply Reset The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 29 Wireless LABEL DESCRIPTION a ss the check box to activate wireless LAN Wireless LAN Name SSID Service Set IDentity The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless G ck is associated Wireless stations associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN Note If you are configuring the Prestige from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Prestige s SSID or WEP settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Prestige s new settings Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through passive scanning using a site survey tool Channel Set the operating frequency channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel from the drop down list box Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Click Reset to reload the previous co

ZyXEL P-335WT User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents